JP2021065754A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: In a jackpot type "time-shortening A" of a first special pattern and "latent probability variation B", and an effective pattern "A" of respective probability variable areas 73, 74 in a jackpot type "time-shortening C" of a second pattern, a right-side probability variable area 73 is set to be effective and a left-side probability variable area 74 is set to be ineffective in a second round. In the effective pattern "A", the left-side probability variable area 74 is set to be effective in a fifth round and the right-side probability variable area 73 is set to be ineffective. In the effective pattern "A", both the probability variable areas 73, 74 are set to be ineffective in the other rounds (namely, a first round, a third round, a fourth round, a sixth round, a seventh round, and thereafter).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 12

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on the game board, and a game ball is launched into any of a plurality of entrances provided in the game area. A winning / failing lottery is performed based on the entry of a ball, and when an advantageous state such as a hit is won in the hit / fail lottery, the normally closed variable entry means is opened to give the player a predetermined game value. (For example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2017-148264

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a launching means for launching a game ball, a ball-entry means into which the game ball launched by the launching means can enter, and a game in the ball-entry means. An information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information due to the ball entering, a determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and a first method in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter. By using the variable ball-entry means that can change between the state and the second state in which the game ball can enter, and the determination result by the determination means, the variable ball-entry means can be moved from the first state to the second state. A second advantageous state that can generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means, a special area through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass, and the advantageous state means. The advantageous state means includes a special area switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special area, and the second advantageous state means is effectively enabled by the special area switching means. The second advantageous state is generated when the game ball passes through the set special area, while the game ball passes through the special area which is not effectively set by the special area switching means. A plurality of timing inflows that are configured so as not to generate the second advantageous state and, when the second advantageous state is generated, allow the game ball to flow into the special area that is effectively set at a plurality of timings during the advantageous state. Means, equipped.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a launching means for launching a game ball, a ball entry means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and a game ball entering the ball entry means. An information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information, a determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter, and a game ball. By using the variable ball-entry means that can be changed to the second state in which the player can enter and the determination result by the determination means, the variable ball-entry means can be changed from the first state to the second state in an advantageous state. The advantageous state means is provided, a special region through which the game ball flowing into the variable entry means can pass, and a second advantageous state means capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means. The advantageous state means includes a special area switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special area, and the second advantageous state means is the special area effectively set by the special area switching means. When the game ball passes through the area, the second advantageous state is generated, while when the game ball passes through the special area which is not effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated. A plurality of timing inflow means, which is configured so as not to occur and causes the game ball to flow into the special region effectively set at a plurality of timings in the advantageous state when the second advantageous state is generated, is provided. There is. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a front enlarged view which schematically represented the front view of the variable winning apparatus. (A) is a schematic of a variable winning device for explaining the behavior of a ball flowing into the large winning opening when the right probabilistic region opening / closing plate is in the open state and the left probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74a is in the closed state. It is a cross-sectional view, and (b) is a variable prize for explaining the behavior of the ball which flowed into the big prize opening when the left probability change area opening / closing plate is open state, and the right probability variation area opening / closing plate is closed state. FIG. 3C is a schematic cross-sectional view of the device, in which (c) is a variable winning combination for explaining the behavior of a sphere that has flowed into the large winning opening when both the right probability changing region opening / closing plate and the left probability changing region opening / closing plate are closed. It is a schematic sectional view of the apparatus. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows typically the structure of various counters, the buffer for a counter, the 1st hold ball storage area, the 2nd hold ball storage area, the hold ball execution area, the normal figure hold ball storage area, and the normal figure hold ball execution area. .. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table for special figure 1, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table for special figure 2. It is a figure which showed the example of the probability change area opening / closing table schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the probability variation area effective table schematically. The operation timing of the big winning opening solenoid, the right probabilistic region solenoid, and the left probabilistic region solenoid in each round of the jackpot type "time saving A" of the first special symbol, and the ball in the big winning opening switch, the right probabilistic region switch, and the left probabilistic region switch. It is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of the above and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag, the left probability variation effective flag, and the probability variation transition flag. The operation timing of the big winning opening solenoid, the right probability changing area solenoid, and the left probability changing area solenoid in the first and second rounds of the jackpot type "time saving A" of the first special symbol, and the big winning opening switch, the right probability changing area switch, and the left It is a timing chart schematically showing each time of the detection timing of a sphere in the probability change area switch and the setting timing of the right probability change effective flag, the left probability change effective flag, and the probability change transition flag. The operation timing of the big winning opening solenoid, the right probability changing area solenoid and the left probability changing area solenoid in each round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" of the first special symbol, and the big winning opening switch, the right probability changing area switch and the left probability changing area switch It is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of the sphere in the above, and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag, the left probability variation effective flag, and the probability variation transition flag. The operation timing of the big winning opening solenoid, the right probability changing area solenoid, and the left probability changing area solenoid in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" of the first special symbol, and the big winning opening switch, the right probability changing area switch. It is a timing chart schematically showing each time of the detection timing of the sphere in the left probability variation region switch and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag, the left probability variation effective flag, and the probability variation transition flag. The operation timing of the big winning opening solenoid, the right probabilistic region solenoid, and the left probabilistic region solenoid in each round of the jackpot type "time saving B" of the first special symbol, and the ball in the big winning opening switch, the right probabilistic region switch, and the left probabilistic region switch. It is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of the above and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag, the left probability variation effective flag, and the probability variation transition flag. The operation timing of the big winning opening solenoid, the right probability changing area solenoid and the left probability changing area solenoid in each round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B" of the first special symbol, and the big winning opening switch, the right probability changing area switch and the left probability changing area switch It is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of the sphere in the above, and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag, the left probability variation effective flag, and the probability variation transition flag. In each round of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" of the first special symbol, the operation timing of the large winning opening solenoid, the right probabilistic region solenoid and the left probabilistic region solenoid, and the large winning opening switch, the right probabilistic region switch and the left probabilistic region switch It is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of a sphere and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag, the left probability variation effective flag, and the probability variation transition flag. The operation timing of the big winning opening solenoid, the right probability changing area solenoid and the left probability changing area solenoid in each round of the jackpot type "time saving C" of the second special symbol, and the ball in the big winning opening switch, the right probability changing area switch and the left probability changing area switch. It is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of the above and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag, the left probability variation effective flag, and the probability variation transition flag. The operation timing of the big winning opening solenoid, the right probability changing area solenoid and the left probability changing area solenoid in each round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C" of the second special symbol, and the big winning opening switch, the right probability changing area switch and the left probability changing area switch It is a timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of the sphere in the above, and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag, the left probability variation effective flag, and the probability variation transition flag. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the fluctuation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the big prize opening opening and closing control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the opening setting process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the processing during opening executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot end processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a schematic sectional view in front view of the variable winning apparatus of 2nd Embodiment and the 2nd variable winning apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the big prize opening opening / closing table of 2nd Embodiment. Operation of the big winning opening solenoid, the second big winning opening solenoid, the right probabilistic region solenoid, and the left probabilistic region solenoid in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C" of the second special symbol of the second embodiment. The timing, the detection timing of the sphere in the large winning opening switch, the second winning opening switch, the right probability variation area switch, and the left probability variation area switch, and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag, the left probability variation effective flag, and the probability variation transition flag. It is a timing chart which shows the time schematically. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot processing executed by MPU in the main control device of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic sectional view in front view of the variable winning apparatus of 3rd Embodiment and the 2nd variable winning apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the big prize opening opening / closing table of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot processing executed by MPU in the main control device of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the opening setting process which is executed by MPU in the main control device of 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening executed by MPU in the main control device of 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic cross-sectional view in a front view of the variable winning device of the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a state in which the probability-changing region opening / closing plate is slid-driven to the downstream side, and the right-side probability-changing region is open. It is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view for explaining the behavior of the sphere flowing down in a guide passage when it is in a state and the left side probability change area is a closed state, and (c) is the probability change area opening / closing plate to the upstream side. It is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view for explaining the behavior of a sphere flowing down in a guide passage in a slide-driven state, when the left probabilistic region is open and the right probabilistic region is closed. It is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view for demonstrating the behavior of the sphere flowing down in a guide passage when the probability variation region opening / closing plate is in the initial state, and both the right side probability variation region and the left side probability variation region are in the closed state. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachinko machine of 4th Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the probability variation area opening / closing table of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the opening setting process which is executed by MPU in the main control device of 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening which is executed by MPU in the main control device of 4th Embodiment. The operation timing of the large winning opening solenoid, the right probability changing region solenoid, and the left probability changing region solenoid in the first and second rounds of the jackpot type "time saving A" of the first special symbol of the fifth embodiment, and the large winning opening switch, right. It is a timing chart which schematically shows each time of the detection timing of the sphere in the probability change area switch and the left probability change area switch, and the setting timing of the right probability change effective flag, the left probability change effective flag, and the probability change transition flag. The operation timing of the large winning opening solenoid, the right probability changing region solenoid, and the left probability changing region solenoid in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" of the first special symbol of the fifth embodiment, and the large winning opening switch. It is a timing chart schematically showing each time of the detection timing of a sphere in the right probability variation region switch and the left probability variation region switch, and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag, the left probability variation effective flag, and the probability variation transition flag. It is a flowchart which showed the opening setting process which is executed by MPU in the main control device of 5th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening which is executed by MPU in the main control device of 5th Embodiment. The operation timing of the large winning opening solenoid, the right probabilistic region solenoid, and the left probabilistic region solenoid in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" of the first special symbol of the sixth embodiment, and the large winning opening switch. It is a timing chart schematically showing each time of the detection timing of a sphere in the right probability variation region switch and the left probability variation region switch, and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag, the left probability variation effective flag, and the probability variation transition flag. It is a figure which shows the structure of the variable winning apparatus of 7th Embodiment, (a) is the schematic sectional view in front view of the variable winning apparatus of 7th Embodiment, (b) is A of (a). It is a schematic cross-sectional view (cross-sectional top view) of the variable winning apparatus in line A.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 36, a first embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having a large number of nails and winning openings (ball entry openings) 63, 64b, 64c, 65a and the like is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 7) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached. The details of the game board 13 will be described later in FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame with the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 7) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later, is changed. Further, the frame button 22 is a variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol used in the first lottery game or the second special symbol used in the second lottery game (hereinafter, the third symbol). It is also used as an operation button for allowing the player to select the effect content in the notice display executed in the variable display of.

The first lottery game is a ball entering the special figure 1 winning opening 64b (see FIG. 3) provided in the alternate distribution unit 64 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later (hereinafter, the ball entering). It is a lottery game caused by (sometimes referred to as "winning"). Further, the second lottery game is a lottery game caused by winning a prize in the special figure 2 winning opening 64c (see FIG. 3) also provided in the alternate distribution unit 64 (see FIG. 3) (hereinafter, the first lottery game). The lottery game and the second lottery game may be collectively referred to as a "lottery game").

Further, the variable effect is an effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later, and as described later, a ball fired in the front area of the game board 13 is a specific winning opening (see FIG. 3). For example, it is executed when a prize is entered in the special figure 1 winning opening 64b or the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c described later. See FIG. 3), and the symbol (the third symbol described later) is changed for a predetermined time and then stopped. It is an effect of presenting to the player the result (whether or not it is a big hit) of the lottery performed for the winning prize by the combination of the displayed symbols. In the first embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is configured so that only one lottery game can be executed, and the first special symbol based on the first lottery game and the second special based on the second lottery game are executed. Based on the first lottery game, the third symbol is used in common with the symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as "special symbol"). It is configured to display either the lottery result or the lottery result based on the second lottery game.

Further, the stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later, are unified. In the pachinko machine 10, the “city stage” and “sky” are used. There are three stages, "Stage" and "Island Stage". The above-mentioned variable effects and various effects such as "reach display" executed during the variable effects are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage.

Further, the "reach display" refers to a display one step before the "big hit display" indicating that a big hit occurs in the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later. .. Specifically, the third symbol of the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 6), which will be described later, stops at the same symbol, and the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6) does not stop yet and continues to fluctuate. It means the state of being.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the "reach display" is roughly divided into one unit element constituting the "normal reach" effect (hereinafter, one unit element constituting the effect is referred to as a "variable element"). It is executed by developing from the variable element of the "normal reach", and is executed by developing from the variable element of "super reach" which has a higher expectation of big hit than the variable element of the "normal reach" and the variable element of the same "normal reach". There is a variable element of "special reach" that has a higher expectation of big hit than the variable element of "super reach".

The change of the stage is performed during the period when the fluctuation effect is not performed (that is, during the demo display), or during the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" in which the third symbol is changed at high speed invisible to the player in the fluctuation effect. This is performed when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player. Then, each time the frame button 22 is operated, the change is repeated in the order of "city stage"-> "sky stage"-> "island stage"-> "city stage"->. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

Further, when the variable element of "normal reach" is started in the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later, the variable element of "normal reach" is changed to the variable element of "super reach". When developing into a variable element of "special reach", a selection screen of a variable element of "super reach" or a variable element of "special reach" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 among the variable elements of "normal reach". It may be configured as follows.

Specifically, on the selection screen, a plurality of candidates that can be selected as the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" are displayed, and while the selection screen is displayed, the frame button 22 is displayed. It is configured so that the selected candidate is changed when the player presses it. Then, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is determined based on the production candidate selected when developing into the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach". As for the variable element of "super reach", the variable element of "special reach" is executed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the determination.

In the first embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed, but instead of the frame button 22, the player directs the pachinko machine 10 in a predetermined direction (for example, with respect to the pachinko machine 10). It may be configured by an operation lever that can be tilted forward, backward, right and left). Then, the effect stage may be selected and changed, or the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" may be determined based on the direction in which the operating lever is tilted.

Further, although the frame button 22 is configured to be arranged on the front side side view of the upper plate 17, the arrangement position of the frame button 22 can be any arrangement position as long as it can be pressed by the player. It may be arranged, for example, on the upper surface side of the upper plate 17, or may be arranged in the vicinity (upper surface or side surface) of the lower plate 50 described later.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined "reach display", and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, lighting portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as a light emitting diode (Light Emitting Diode; hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") are provided. ..

In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and at the time of jackpot or "reach display", the built-in LEDs are lit or blinked to cause the illumination units 29 to 33. Lights up or flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the "reach display" just before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in the front view, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (see FIG. 3). ) Is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (Acrylonitrile Butadiene Style) in which the area around the illuminated portions 29 to 33 is chrome-plated in order to bring out more glitter, hereinafter abbreviated as “ABS”. .) A resin plating member 36 is attached.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit, not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.

A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 7). The touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the operation handle 51, the push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) to detect.

When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

Next, as shown in FIG. 2, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board has a micro-processing unit (hereinafter abbreviated as "MPU") as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, and various lottery. A random number generator used for the above, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 7). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 3, in the game board 13, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, and a ball are awarded to a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view. It has a general winning opening 63, a special drawing 1 winning opening 64b for the first lottery game, a special drawing 2 winning opening 64c for the second lottery game, and an ordinary electric accessory 67a. The alternate distribution unit 64, the variable winning device 65 that is opened when a big hit occurs in the first lottery game or the second lottery game, the normal symbol gate 67 for the drive lottery of the ordinary electric accessory 67a, and the third symbol display. A variable display device unit 80 or the like having the device 81 is assembled and configured, and a peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12.

The general winning opening 63, the alternating distribution unit 64, the variable winning device 65, the ordinary symbol gate 67, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged on the front surface of the game board 13. It is fixed from the side with wood screws or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back, so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 7) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 3) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 3) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center (hereinafter, the act of firing a ball with the force of hitting the return rubber 69 and passing the ball through the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80 is referred to as "right-handed". , The act of passing the fired ball through the left side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80 is referred to as "left-handed"). In the first embodiment, in the left-handed game, the ball can enter the distribution ball opening of the alternate distribution unit 64, while the variable winning device 65 is configured so that the ball is difficult to enter. Further, in a right-handed game, the ball can enter the variable winning device 65, while it is difficult (impossible) for the ball to enter the distribution slot of the alternating distribution unit 64. The specific configuration will be described later.

Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

A special symbol display device 37 provided with a first LED group 37a and a second LED group 37b composed of a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means is arranged on the upper right side of the front view of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 3). Has been done. The special symbol display device 37 is subjected to variable display of each special symbol according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7) described later (hereinafter, the variable display of the special symbol is referred to as “dynamic display”). At the same time, the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

The first LED group 37a is a hold ball which is the number of balls (holding balls) whose fluctuation display has not been executed among the balls that have won (winned) in the special figure 1 winning opening 64b or the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c, which will be described later. The number is indicated by the lighting state. Further, the number of rounds of the jackpot and the error display are also indicated by the lighting state of the first LED group 37a corresponding to the state. The first LED group 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors suggests various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. be able to.

The "round" in the jackpot means from the opening to the closing of the jackpot 65a, which will be described later, in order to divide the number of prize balls in the jackpot. One "round" is executed when "30 seconds" have passed since the opening of the winning opening 65a or when 10 balls are won while the winning opening 65a is open.

The second LED group 37b is composed of a total of 16 LEDs, that is, an upper LED group composed of eight LEDs and a lower LED group composed of eight LEDs. In the upper LED group, the first special symbol (hereinafter, the first special symbol may be abbreviated as "special diagram 1") indicating the determination result of the first lottery game is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in the lower LED group, the second special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol may be abbreviated as "special diagram 2") indicating the determination result of the second lottery game is displayed in a variable manner.

Specifically, the upper LED group fluctuates until a fluctuating time (dynamic display time) determined based on winning a prize in the special figure 1 winning opening 64b provided in the alternate distribution unit 64, which will be described later, elapses. After displaying (in the first embodiment, the leftmost LED in the upper LED group is turned on one by one from the rightmost LED, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), a symbol showing the determination result (in the first embodiment). , One of a total of 256 types of stop symbols) is displayed as a stop depending on the combination of each lighting pattern of the eight LEDs.

Further, the lower LED group has a variable display (No. 3) until a variable time (dynamic display time) determined based on winning a prize in the special figure 2 winning opening 64c provided in the alternate distribution unit 64, which will be described later, elapses. In one embodiment, the leftmost LED in the lower LED group is turned on one by one from the rightmost LED, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), and then a symbol showing the determination result (8 in the first embodiment). Depending on the combination of each lighting pattern of the LED, the stop display is performed with one of a total of 256 types of stop symbols).

In any of the LED groups, if the judgment result is lost, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and if the judgment result is a big hit, each LED group is lit and displayed in a lighting pattern corresponding to the big hit. Will be done. The details of the stop pattern of each LED group will be described later.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, whether or not a ball is hit into the special figure 1 winning opening 64b or the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c is determined as to whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined as a big hit, it is determined. The jackpot type is also determined according to the winning openings 64b and 64c.

As the jackpot type determined here, based on the winning of the special figure 1 winning opening 64b, "15 rounds (hereinafter, the round may be simply expressed as" R ") probability variation jackpot" corresponding to " "Hidden probability fluctuation A" and "latent probability fluctuation B" corresponding to "probability fluctuation A" and "7R latent probability variation jackpot", and "time reduction A" and "time reduction B" corresponding to "7R time reduction jackpot" are prepared. (See FIG. 10 (a)). In addition, based on the winning of the special figure 2 winning opening 64c, "probability fluctuation A" corresponding to "15R probability variation jackpot", "latent probability variation C" corresponding to "15R latent probability variation jackpot", and "15R time reduction" "Time saving C" corresponding to "big hit" is prepared (see FIG. 10B).

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "15R latent probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of 15 rounds. It shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot, but it is a jackpot that does not notify that the "probability fluctuation state" is given, and the "15R time saving jackpot" means that the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds. It is a big hit that shifts to the "time reduction state" after the big hit. Further, the "7R latent probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" after the maximum number of rounds is 7 rounds, but does not notify that the "probability fluctuation state" is given. Yes, the "7R time saving jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot of 7 rounds.

Here, the "normal game state" refers to a low probability state that is not a "probability fluctuation state" or a "time reduction state", and refers to a state in which the jackpot probability of a special symbol and the hit probability of a normal symbol are normal. .. That is, in the "normal game state", the jackpot probability of the special symbol is lower than in the "probability fluctuation state", and the hit probability of the normal symbol is lower than in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state". Therefore, it is not a game state in which the ball is easy to win in the special figure 2 winning opening 64c (hereinafter, a state in which the ball is easy to win in the special figure 2 winning opening 64c is sometimes referred to as a "winning assistance state"). This is the most unfavorable gaming state for the player.

Next, the "time reduction state" is a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is as low as the "normal game state", but the so-called "time saving function" in which the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased is given. Say. That is, in the "time reduction state", the ordinary electric accessory 67a, which will be described later, provided on the right side side of the alternate distribution unit 64, which will be described later, is likely to be in the open state, and as a result, the special figure in the alternate distribution unit 64 is shown. 2 A gaming state in which the ball easily enters the winning opening 64c, that is, a winning assisting state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "time reduction state" is predetermined for each jackpot after the jackpots of the jackpot types "time reduction A", "time reduction B", or "time reduction C" (see FIG. 10), which will be described later. It is maintained until the specified number of times (50 times or 100 times in the first embodiment) of the special symbol variation effect is executed. Then, after the dynamic display of the special symbol of the specified number of times is executed, it is configured to shift from the "time reduction state" to the "normal game state".

Next, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a high-probability state in which the jackpot probability of the subsequent special symbol is increased as an added value after the jackpot ends. That is, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to the time during the so-called probability change, in other words, the state of the game in which it is easy to shift to the special game state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the jackpot of the jackpot type "probability variation A", "latent probability variation A", "latent probability variation B" or "latent probability variation C" (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, special Special until the symbol variation effect is executed 50 or 100 times (so-called special time; hereinafter, the acronym of Special Time may be abbreviated as "ST"). The jackpot probability of the symbol becomes a high probability state.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the "probability fluctuation state", the "probability change state with time reduction" to which the above "time reduction function" is added and the "probability change without time reduction" to which the "time reduction function" is not added are provided. "State" is provided. That is, in the "probability change state with time reduction", the jackpot probability of the special symbol is high, and the ordinary electric accessory 67a, which will be described later, is likely to be in the open state. As a result, the special figure 2 in the alternating distribution unit 64 The winning assist state is such that the ball can easily win the winning opening 64c. On the other hand, in the "probability change state without time reduction", the jackpot probability of the special symbol is high, but since the normal electric accessory 67a is unlikely to be in the open state (it is not easy to become), the special figure is the same as in the "normal game state". 2 The winning opening 64c is not in the winning assistance state but in the non-winning assistance state.

The "probability change state with time reduction" is defined for each jackpot after the jackpot type "probability variation A", "latent probability variation A", "latent probability variation B" or "latent probability variation C" (see FIG. 10), which will be described later. It is maintained until a predetermined number of times (in the first embodiment, 50 times or 100 times) of special symbol variation effects are executed. On the other hand, after the dynamic display of the special symbol of the specified number of times is executed, the "probability change state with time reduction" based on the jackpot of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation B" (see FIG. 10) described later. If it is, it shifts to the "probability change state without time reduction", and it is the "probability change state with time reduction" based on the jackpot of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation C" (see FIG. 10) described later. Is configured to transition to a "normal gaming state".

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as an effect mode of the "probability fluctuation state", a "probability change notification effect mode" for notifying the player that the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased is a high probability state. , A "latent probability variation effect mode" that does not notify the player that the jackpot probability is in a high probability state is provided.

The "probability change notification effect mode" is such that the player is notified by the third symbol display device 81 or the like described later that the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased during the "probability change notification effect mode". It is configured in. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot type “probability variation A” (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, is won, the “probability variation notification effect mode” is executed after the jackpot is completed.

On the other hand, the "latent probability variation effect mode" notifies the player that the "latent probability variation effect mode" is in a high probability state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased during the "latent probability variation effect mode" by the third symbol display device 81 or the like described later. It is configured not to. That is, the "latent probability variation effect mode" performs an effect equivalent to the effect corresponding to the "time saving notification effect mode" or the "normal notification mode" described later, and asks the player whether the player is in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction". It is configured to make it indistinguishable (difficult) whether it is a "state" or a "normal gaming state", and to give a game property that makes it possible to predict which gaming state the player is staying in.

In the first embodiment, when the jackpot type “latent probability variation A”, “latent probability variation B” or “latent probability variation C” (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, is won, the “latent probability variation effect” is produced after the jackpot ends. Aspects ”are executed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as an effect mode of the "time reduction state", a "time reduction notification effect mode" for notifying the player that the above "time reduction function" is given is provided. .. In this "time saving notification effect mode", the player is notified by the third symbol display device 81 or the like, which will be described later, that the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased during the "time saving notification effect mode". It is configured. In the first embodiment, when the jackpot type “time saving A”, “time saving B” or “time saving C” (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, is won, the “time saving notification effect mode” is executed after the jackpot ends. ..

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the "normal game state" effect mode, a "normal effect mode" different from the "time saving notification effect mode (latent probability variation effect mode)" and the "probability variation notification effect mode" is provided. Has been done. This "normal effect mode" is such that the player is notified by the third symbol display device 81 or the like, which will be described later, that the state has not shifted to a state advantageous to the player during the "normal effect mode". It is configured in. In the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, when the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" is completed, or when the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation B" is completed. After the jackpot (see FIG. 10) is completed, the "normal effect mode" is executed when the variation effect of the special symbol is completed 50 times.

That is, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the "latent probability variation effect mode" executes an effect equivalent to the "time saving notification effect mode" or the "normal effect mode". With this configuration, the player can see whether the current gaming state is the "probability fluctuation state", the "time reduction state", the "probability fluctuation state", or the "normal gaming state". It is not possible to clearly recognize which gaming state the player is staying in because it is indistinguishable (difficult). With this configuration, while the "latent probability variation effect mode" is being executed, a game property that allows the player to guess which game state is being created is created, and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

Further, when the change effect of the special symbol is completed 50 times after the jackpot of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation B" (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, is completed, the subsequent gaming state is as follows. Until the special symbol variation effect is executed 50 times, it is internally in a "probability variation state", which is advantageous for the player, but in terms of the effect, the "normal effect mode" is executed. .. On the other hand, when the change effect of the special symbol is completed 50 times after the jackpot of the jackpot type "time reduction A" or "time reduction B" (see FIG. 10) is completed, the subsequent game state is internally "normal game state". Therefore, in terms of production, the "normal production mode" is being executed. Therefore, the player can perform the special symbol variation effect 50 times after the jackpot type "time reduction A" or "time reduction B" is completed, and the jackpot is a jackpot even after the "time reduction state" is completed. It is not possible to distinguish whether it is a jackpot based on the type "time saving A" or "time saving B" or a jackpot based on the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation B".

With this configuration, the player is not made to recognize whether the player is in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "normal game state", so that the "normal effect mode" indicating the "normal game state" is executed. Even so, it is possible to make the player guess the possibility of being in the "probability fluctuation state" internally and to continuously execute the game. Therefore, even after the "time reduction state" is completed, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to continue playing the game and promote the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, a display mode of the second LED group 37b for each jackpot type will be described. As the stop display (lighting display) of the upper LED group for the first special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, 63 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time reduction A", and the jackpot type "time reduction B". There are 63 types of corresponding display patterns, 64 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", 64 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", and the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A". There is one type of corresponding display pattern, for a total of 256 types of display patterns. Then, each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and a random display pattern is associated in advance. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the upper LED group, the stop display of the loss and the stop display of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" can be recognized, while the jackpot types "time reduction A" and "time reduction B" can be recognized. , "Hidden probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation B", whichever is the stop display, is configured to be difficult to identify.

In addition, as the stop display (lighting display) of the lower LED group for the second special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, 127 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving C", and the jackpot type "latent probability". There are 127 types of display patterns corresponding to "variation C" and one type of display pattern corresponding to the jackpot type "probability variation A", for a total of 256 types of display patterns. Then, like the upper LED group, each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and a random display pattern is associated in advance. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the lower LED group, the stop display of the loss and the stop display of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" can be recognized, while the jackpot type "time reduction C" or "latent probability". It is difficult to identify which stop display of "variation C" is.

With this configuration, even if each jackpot type is displayed in the stop display of the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, if all the jackpot types corresponding to each stop display are not grasped. Since it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the winning jackpot type, a game property is created that allows the player to guess which game state the player is in while the "latent probability variation effect mode" is being executed. , The fun of the game can be improved.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. In the game area of the game board 13, one or a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won.

Further, in the lower center of the game area, an alternating distribution unit 64 is arranged so that a ball flowing down the game area can enter the ball. The alternating distribution unit 64 mainly has a distribution ball opening in which a ball flowing down the game area can enter, and a left path in the alternate distribution unit 64 for the ball entering the distribution ball port. Alternatively, the distribution device 64a that is alternately distributed to the right route, the special figure 1 winning opening 64b that allows the balls distributed to the left route by the distribution device 64a to enter, and the distribution device 64a are distributed to the right route. It is composed of a special figure 2 winning opening 64c in which a ball can enter.

When a ball wins a prize in the special figure 1 winning opening 64b provided in the alternating distribution unit 64, the special drawing 1 winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the special drawing 1 winning opening is turned on. Due to the turning on of the mouth switch, the main control device 110 (see FIG. 13) draws a big hit of the first special symbol (that is, the first lottery game). Then, the dynamic display of the special symbol according to the lottery result is indicated by the upper LED group in the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the variation effect of the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Will be executed.

Further, when a ball wins a prize in the special figure 2 winning opening 64c provided in the alternating distribution unit 64, the special drawing 2 winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the special drawing 2 is turned on. Due to the turning on of the winning opening switch, the main control device 110 (see FIG. 13) draws a big hit of the second special symbol (that is, the second lottery game). Then, the dynamic display of the special symbol according to the lottery result is indicated by the lower LED group in the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the variation effect of the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Will be executed.

The special figure 1 winning opening 64b and the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c are also one of the winning openings in which two balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins a prize.

Here, a mode in which the balls entering the alternating distribution unit 64 are alternately distributed to the left side path or the right side path by the distribution device 64a will be described. The ball that has entered the alternating distribution unit 64 and has flowed down from the distribution ball port fits in the space formed by the central plate portion and the right side receiving plate of the distribution device 64a. Then, the distribution device 64a rotates by pushing down the right side receiving plate by the weight of the sphere, and the tip end side of the right side receiving plate comes into contact with the wall portion below the distribution device 64a of the alternating distribution unit 64 to contact the right side receiving plate. The whole is on the lower side of the rotating shaft portion, and the left side receiving plate is on the upper side of the rotating shaft portion. Therefore, the sorting device 64a is in a state where the sphere can flow down to the right path side, and in that state, the sphere rolls on the upper surface of the right receiving plate to be guided to the right path. At this time, the force that pushes down the right side receiving plate (rotates the sorting device 64a) by the weight of the sphere is greater than the repulsive force between the distribution side magnet (not shown) and the unit side magnet (not shown). Is large, so that the sorting device 64a is rotated against the repulsive force of the magnet. Then, again, the repulsive force of the magnet maintains a state in which the left side receiving plate is on the upper side of the rotation shaft portion and the right side receiving plate is on the lower side of the rotation shaft portion, that is, the state of the left side guide position.

Then, the ball that enters the alternating distribution unit 64 and flows down from the distribution ball port fits in the space formed by the central plate portion and the left side receiving plate of the distribution device 64a. Then, by pushing down the left side receiving plate by the weight of the sphere, the distribution device 64a rotates, the tip end side of the left side receiving plate comes into contact with the wall portion of the alternating distribution unit 64, and the entire left side receiving plate is from the rotation shaft portion. On the lower side, the right side receiving plate is on the upper side of the rotation shaft portion. Therefore, the sorting device 64a is in a state where the ball can flow down to the left path side, and in that state, the ball is guided to the left path by rolling on the upper surface of the left receiving plate. Also at this time, the force that pushes down the left side receiving plate (rotates the sorting device 64a) by the weight of the sphere rather than the repulsive force between the sorting side magnet (not shown) and the unit side magnet (not shown). Since the size is larger, the distribution device 64a is rotated against the repulsive force of the magnet. Then, again, the repulsive force of the magnet maintains a state in which the left side receiving plate is on the lower side of the rotation shaft portion and the right side receiving plate is on the upper side of the rotation shaft portion, that is, the state of the right side guide position. By alternately repeating these movements, the balls entering the alternating distribution unit 64 are alternately distributed to the left side path and the right side path.

The left side path of the alternate distribution unit 64 is a path through which the sphere guided to the left side in the alternate distribution unit 64 by the distribution device 64a flows down. A left side exit through which a ball flowing down the left side path flows out is provided on the lower left side of the left side path, and a special figure 1 winning opening 64b is arranged below the left side exit. Therefore, the ball guided to the left route is configured to flow down the left route and then win a prize in the special figure 1 winning opening 64b.

The right path of the alternating distribution unit 64 is a path through which the sphere guided to the right side in the alternating distribution unit 64 by the distribution device 64a flows down. A right exit through which a ball flowing down the right path flows out is provided below the right side of the right path, and a special figure 2 winning opening 64c is provided below the right exit. Therefore, the ball guided to the right route is configured to flow down the right route and then win a prize in the special figure 2 winning opening 64c.

A variable winning device 65 is arranged on the right side of the alternating distribution unit 64 when viewed from the front, and a horizontally long rectangular large winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7) becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, The second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed so as to be a stop symbol of the jackpot, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the opening / closing plate 65b (see FIG. 4) provided in the variable winning device 65 is opened, and the gaming state shifts to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball can easily win a prize in the big winning opening 65a. As this special game state, the large winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until "30 seconds" elapses or until 10 balls are won).

The large winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the large winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the large winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state (big hit state) that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) in a larger amount than usual. Prize balls will be paid out.

Further, in the large winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, a right-side probabilistic region 73 (see FIG. 4) and a left-side probabilistic region 74 (see FIG. 4) in which a ball flowing into the large winning opening 65a can flow down. A discharge passage 75 (see FIG. 4) is provided. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the special gaming state (big hit state), the valid or invalid of the right side probability change area 73 and the left side probability change area 74 is switched and controlled, and the ball flowing into the big winning opening 65a is effectively used. By passing through the set right-side probabilistic region 73 or left-side probabilistic region 74, the "probability fluctuation state" is configured to occur after the special gaming state ends.

Here, the details of the variable winning device 65 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view schematically showing a front view of the variable winning device 65. As shown in FIG. 4, the variable winning device 65 opens and closes and drives a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate 65b that covers the large winning opening 65a and the opening / closing plate 65b on the front side with the lower side of the opening / closing plate 65b as an axis. A large winning opening solenoid 65c (see FIG. 7), a large winning opening switch 71 that detects a ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening 65a, a guide passage 72 through which a ball detected by the large winning opening switch 71 flows down, and the like. The right side probability variation region 73 provided on the downstream side (left side) of the guide passage 72, the left side probability variation region 74 provided on the downstream side (left side) of the right side probability variation region 73, and the downstream side (left side) of the left side probability variation region 74. ) Is provided with a discharge passage 75.

The big winning opening switch 71 is embedded in the passage in the vicinity of the big winning opening 65a, and when the ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71, 15 prize balls are paid out. Further, when 10 balls are detected by the large winning opening switch 71 after the opening / closing plate 65b is opened, the opening / closing plate 65b is closed and one round is completed.

The guide passage 72 is a passage through which a ball flowing into the large winning opening 65a flows down, and a right-side probability variation region 73 and a left-side probability variation region 74, which will be described later, are provided at predetermined positions of the guide passage 72, and the right-side probability variation is provided. A discharge passage 75, which will be described later, is provided on the downstream side of the region 73 and the left side probability variation region 74. Therefore, the ball that flows into the large winning opening 65a and flows down the guide passage 72 passes through the right side probability variation region 73, the left side probability variation region 74, or the discharge passage 75.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the ball flowing into the large winning opening 65a is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, it is about "1" until it reaches above the right side probability variation region 73 described later through the guide passage 72. It is configured to take ".5 seconds", and after the ball flowing into the large winning opening 65a is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, it reaches above the left side probability variation region 74 described later via the guide passage 72. It is configured to take about "1.6 seconds". Therefore, the ball detected by the large winning opening switch 71 is configured to be able to flow into the right side probability variation region 73 or the left side probability variation region 74 within "2 seconds".

The right side probabilistic region 73 is arranged so that its upper surface is flush with the bottom surface (rolling surface of the sphere) of the guide passage 72 in the closed state (protruding state), and changes from the closed state to the open state (immersive state). A right probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73a configured to be displaceable, a right probabilistic region solenoid 73b (see FIG. 7) capable of opening / closing the right probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73a, and a right probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73a provided on the downstream side. It is composed of a right probabilistic region passage 73c through which a ball can flow down, and a right probabilistic region switch 73d embedded in the passage of the right probabilistic region passage 73c and capable of detecting a ball passing through the right probabilistic region passage 73c. ing.

The left probabilistic region 74 is configured so that its upper surface is flush with the bottom surface of the guide passage 72 in the closed state (protruding state) and can be displaced from the closed state to the open state (immersive state). A plate 74a, a left probabilistic region solenoid 74b (see FIG. 7) capable of opening and closing the left probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74a, and a left probabilistic region passage provided on the downstream side of the left probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74a so that a ball can flow down. It is composed of a 74c and a left probabilistic region switch 74d that is embedded in the passage of the left probabilistic region passage 74c and can detect a sphere passing through the left probabilistic region passage 74c.

When the ball that has flowed into the large winning opening 65a does not flow into either the right side probability variation region 73 or the left side probability variation region 74, the discharge passage 75 is outside the variable winning device 65 (on the back side of the game board 13). It is a passage for discharging to.

The right-side probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73a and the left-side probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74a are made of a transparent or substantially transparent resin. Therefore, by configuring the positions (driving modes) of the probabilistic region opening / closing plates 73a, 74a to be difficult for the player to recognize, the probabilistic region opening / closing plates 73a, 74a open or close the probabilistic regions 73, 74. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not. The right side probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a and the left side probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a may be made of colored resin.

Here, with reference to FIG. 5, the inflow pattern of the balls that have flowed into the large winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 will be described. FIG. 5A shows the inside of the large winning opening 65a when the right probability variable region opening / closing plate 73a is in the open state (immersive state) and the left probability variable region opening / closing plate 74a is in the closed state (protruding state). FIG. 5B is a schematic cross-sectional view of a variable winning device 65 for explaining the behavior of the inflowing sphere. FIG. 5B shows a left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a in an open state (immersive state) and a right probability variation. FIG. 5 (c) is a schematic cross-sectional view of a variable winning device 65 for explaining the behavior of a ball flowing into the large winning opening 65a when the region opening / closing plate 73a is in a closed state (protruding state). , Schematic of the variable winning device 65 for explaining the behavior of the ball flowing into the large winning opening 65a when both the right probability changing region opening / closing plate 73a and the left probability changing region opening / closing plate 74a are in the closed state (protruding state). It is a cross-sectional view.

As shown in FIG. 5A, when a big hit is won and a special gaming state occurs, the opening / closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened so that the ball can flow into the big winning opening 65a. Then, when the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a is in the open state (immersive state) and the left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a is in the closed state (protruding state), the ball flowing into the large winning opening 65a is First, it is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, and then it flows down the guide passage 72. Then, since the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a is opened (immersed) by the right probability variation region solenoid 73b (see FIG. 7), the sphere flows into the right probability variation region passage 73c. After that, the sphere is detected by the right probabilistic region switch 73d embedded in the right probabilistic region passage 73c. The ball detected by the right probability variable region switch 73d is discharged to the outside of the variable winning device 65 (on the back side of the game board 13) by a discharge path (not shown).

Next, as shown in FIG. 5B, when the right probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73a is in the closed state (protruding state) and the left probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74a is in the open state (immersive state), it is large. The ball that has flowed into the winning opening 65a is first detected by the large winning opening switch 71, and then flows down the guide passage 72. Then, the upper surface of the right probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73a in the closed state (protruding state) is rolled, and the left probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74a provided on the downstream side of the right probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73a is the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b (FIG. Since it is opened (immersed) by (see 7), the ball flows into the left probabilistic region passage 74c. After that, the sphere is detected by the left probabilistic region switch 74d embedded in the left probabilistic region passage 74c. The ball detected by the left probability variable region switch 74d is discharged to the outside of the variable winning device 65 (on the back side of the game board 13) by a discharge path (not shown).

Next, as shown in FIG. 5C, when both the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a and the left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a are in the closed state (protruding state), the ball flowing into the large winning opening 65a first. , Detected by the big winning opening switch 71, and then flows down the guide passage 72. Then, the upper surface of the right probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73a in the closed state (protruding state) and the upper surface of the left probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74a are rolled, and the variable winning device 65 is outside (game) from the discharge passage 75 provided on the downstream side. It is discharged to the back side of the board 13.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening (not shown) that opens and closes separately from the large winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the second LED group 37b corresponding to the big hit is lit in the special symbol display device 37, the large winning opening 65a is designated. The time is opened, and during the opening of the large winning opening 65a, the large opening provided separately from the large winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the large winning opening 65a. The gaming state may be formed as a special gaming state (see the second and subsequent embodiments).

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. A normal symbol gate 67 is provided above the front view of the variable winning device 65 and on the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80 described later. The ordinary symbol gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) for the ball to pass through in the vertical direction. When the ball passes through the normal symbol gate 67, the normal symbol switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main control device 110 performs a winning lottery for the normal symbol due to the turning on. It should be noted that the ordinary symbol gate 67 only serves as a lottery opportunity for the variable display of the ordinary symbol, and is configured so that the prize balls and the like are not paid out even when the balls pass.

An ordinary electric accessory 67a is arranged on the downstream side of the variable winning device 65 and on the right side of the alternating distribution unit 64. The ordinary electric accessory 67a is mainly composed of a rotating plate and a rotating solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the rotating plate.

The main control device 110 of the first embodiment normally maintains the rotating plate of the ordinary electric accessory 67a in an upright state and covers the right side portion of the alternating distribution unit 64, thereby covering the alternating distribution unit 64. The inflow of balls from the right side of the special figure 2 to the winning opening 64c is prevented. Then, when a hit is won by the variable display of the normal symbol, the rotating solenoid (not shown) is driven for a predetermined time, and the rotating plate of the ordinary electric accessory 67a is moved to the rotating plate for the predetermined time. By driving from the upright state to the open state (tilted state) tilted to the right by a predetermined angle (for example, 45 degrees), it is possible for the ball to flow from the right side of the alternate distribution unit 64 into the special figure 2 winning opening 64c. The ball flowing down the right side of the alternating distribution unit 64 is configured to be in a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c, that is, in a winning assisting state.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning in the variable display of the normal symbol changes according to the game state. Specifically, in the "normal game state" or the "probability change state without time reduction", the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to the low probability state (for example, 1/10), and it is difficult to win in the variable display of the normal symbol. Therefore, the rotating plate of the ordinary electric accessory 67a is made difficult to be in an open state (tilted state) so that it is difficult to win a prize in the special figure 2 winning opening 64c. On the other hand, in the "probability change state with time reduction" or "time reduction state", the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to the high probability state (for example, 9/10), and it is easy to win in the variable display of the normal symbol. The rotating plate of the electric accessory 67a is easily opened (tilted), and the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c can be easily won.

In addition, instead of changing the hit probability of the normal symbol from the "normal game state" or the "probability change state without time reduction" as in the "probability change state with time reduction" or "time reduction state", it depends on the game state of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the time for the rotating plate of the ordinary electric accessory 67a to rotate and the number of times for the rotating plate of the ordinary electric accessory 67a to rotate may be changed at one time. Specifically, in the "probability change state with time reduction" or "time reduction state", the time for the rotating plate of the normal electric accessory 67a to rotate is made longer than in the "normal game state" or "probability change state without time reduction". Alternatively, the number of times the rotating plate of the ordinary electric accessory 67a rotates at one time may be made larger than that in the "normal game state" or the "probability change state without time reduction". In addition, in the "probability change state with time reduction" or "time reduction state", the probability of hitting the normal symbol is increased, the rotation time of the rotating plate of the normal electric accessory 67a is lengthened, and the ordinary electric accessory 67a At least two of the number of rotations of the rotating plate may be increased at the same time.

The variable display device unit 80 is arranged from the central portion of the game area to the right side area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by a ball entering the special figure 1 winning opening 64b or the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c (starting winning), and is synchronized with the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 to form a third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs a variable effect of the above, and an LED that variably displays an ordinary symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of an ordinary symbol gate 67. An ordinary symbol display device 83 is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 17-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 7) described later, for example, left, middle, and right. Three symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6) are displayed.

Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6) is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row Z1 to Z3 to display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is designed to be displayed variably. The third symbol display device 81 of the first embodiment is commonly used in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol, and is used for controlling the main control device 110. While the accompanying game state is displayed on the special symbol display device 37, the decorative display corresponding to the display of the special symbol display device 37 is performed using the third symbol of the third symbol display device 81. It is a thing. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 6A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 6B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which odd numbers ("1", "3", "5", "7", The main design with "9") has a large number added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers ("0", "2", "4", "6", "8") are the characters such as the kimono, the furoshiki, and the helmet that almost fill the front of the wooden box. An attached symbol that imitates is added, and an even number is added so that an even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery result of any of the special symbols by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 7) described later is a big hit, a variable effect in which the same main symbols are aligned is produced. It is configured so that a big hit will occur after the fluctuation production is finished. When the jackpot type of "probability fluctuation A" to be described later is won, a fluctuation effect is performed in which the main symbols with the numbers "7" (corresponding to the "probability variation notification symbol") are aligned. On the other hand, jackpot types other than "probability fluctuation A" described later, that is, "time saving A", "time saving B", "time saving C", "latent probability fluctuation A", "latent probability fluctuation B" or "latent probability fluctuation C" If you win the jackpot type of "", the main symbol with a number other than the number "7", that is, the main symbol with the numbers "1" to "6", "8" or "9" ("" A variation effect is performed in which (corresponding to the "non-probability change notification symbol") is aligned. With this configuration, the player can identify the type of jackpot that occurs by simply checking the main symbols (excluding the main symbols with the number "7") aligned in the variable effect. Can not.

As shown in FIG. 6A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into three in the vertical direction, and the lower two-thirds are reserved with the main display area Dm that fluctuates the third symbol. It is composed of a cockpit display area Db that displays the number of balls and the like, and the other upper 1/3 is a sub-display area Ds that displays a notice effect, a character, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right. The left symbol column Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, and the middle symbol column Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2. The right symbol column Z3 is displayed in the display area Dm3.

In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending order (or descending order) of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variation effect is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3, the arrangement of numbers may be different from each other. For example, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols may be arranged so as to appear in descending order, while in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols may be arranged so as to appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is placed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each variation effect. Stop is displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbols; hereinafter referred to as "big hit display") is arranged on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, while the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing the variation effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the sphere is special. FIG. 1 When a ball is entered into the winning opening 64b, the number of times the ball is entered (the number of reserved balls) is held up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the special figures 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d of the first reserved symbol display area Db1 corresponding to the first special symbol of the cockpit display area Db. Also shown. In the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, one reserved symbol (“○” symbol in the normal display mode) for each reserved ball of the first special symbol (the number of reserved balls is one). White circle symbols)) are displayed, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of reserved symbols displayed in the special figures 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d.

That is, in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, when one reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol. Is one time, and when a total of two reserved symbols are displayed in the special figure 1 first and second reserved symbol display areas Db1a and Db1b, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed. Indicates that is twice, and when a total of three reserved symbols are displayed in each of the special figure 1 first to third reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1c, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed. Is 3 times, and when a total of 4 reserved symbols are displayed in the special figure 1 1st to 4th reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the 1st special symbol is displayed. Indicates that is 4 times. Further, when the reserved symbols are not displayed in the special figure 1 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 0 and there is a holding variable effect. Indicates not to.

In addition, the sphere is special while the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing the variation effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol. FIG. 2 When a ball is entered into the winning opening 64c, the number of times the ball is entered (the number of reserved balls) is held up to 4 times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the special figures 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d of the second reserved symbol display area Db2 corresponding to the second special symbol of the cockpit display area Db. Also shown. In the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, one reserved symbol (“○” symbol in the normal display mode) for each reserved ball of the second special symbol (the number of reserved balls is one). White circle symbols)) are displayed, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of reserved symbols displayed in the special figures 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d.

That is, in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, when one reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. Is one time, and when a total of two reserved symbols are displayed in the special figure 2 first and second reserved symbol display areas Db2a and Db2b, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is displayed. 2 times, and when a total of 3 reserved symbols are displayed in the special figure 2 1st to 3rd reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2c, the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol is displayed. Is 3 times, and when a total of 4 reserved symbols are displayed in the special figure 2 1st to 4th reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol is displayed. Indicates that is 4 times. Further, when the reserved symbols are not displayed in the special figure 2 first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db2a to Db2d, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 0 and there is a holding variable effect. Indicates not to.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol are not executed at the same time, and only one of the lottery games is executed. It is configured in. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when any of the running lottery games is completed and the reserved balls of the first special symbol and the reserved balls of the second special symbol are stored, respectively, The second lottery game of the second special symbol is preferentially executed (so-called special figure 2 priority change) over the first lottery game of the first special symbol. The lottery game may be executed in the order of winning, or the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol may be executed at the same time.

In the central portion of the cockpit display area Db, an execution symbol display area Db0 for displaying an execution symbol indicating that the variation effect is executed in the main display area Dm is provided. The execution symbol display area Db0 is provided in the central portion of the cockpit display area Db, that is, on the right side of the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a and on the left side of the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a. It is configured to display execution symbols larger than each reserved symbol displayed in the reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d and Db2a to Db2d. Further, in the execution symbol display area Db0, the reserved symbol displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a or the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a is moved (shifted) and displayed as an execution symbol. To.

The execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is deleted when the variation effect is completed, and along with the deletion of the execution symbol, the displayed reserved symbol is on the lower side (on the right side if it is the first special symbol, the first). 2 If it is a special symbol, it will be moved and displayed as a reserved symbol (on the left). Specifically, for example, in a situation where the reserved symbol of the second special symbol does not exist and there are four reserved symbols of the first special symbol, the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol ends. When the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is deleted, when the reservation symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a, it is used as the execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0. It is displayed by moving (shifting). Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 1 second reserved symbol display area Db1b. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 1 fourth reserved symbol display area Db1d, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c.

Further, for example, in a situation where there are four reserved symbols of the second special symbol, the execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is deleted with the end of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. When this is done, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 second reserved symbol display area Db2b, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 2 first reserved symbol display area Db2a. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 third reserved symbol display area Db2c, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 2 second reserved symbol display area Db2b. Further, when the reserved symbol is displayed in the special figure 2 fourth reserved symbol display area Db2d, it is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the special figure 2 third reserved symbol display area Db2c.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the execution symbol is continuously displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 while the variation effect is being executed in the main display area Dm (in the variation element of "super reach" or "special reach". Except in the variable elements of). On the other hand, when the variation effect is completed, or when the variation element of "super reach" or the variation element of "special reach" is being executed, the execution symbol is deleted. That is, when the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0, it indicates that the variation effect is being executed (continued) in the main display area Dm, and the execution symbol is displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0. If not, it indicates that the fluctuation effect is not executed (not continued) in the main display area Dm, or that the fluctuation element of "super reach" or the fluctuation element of "special reach" is executed.

Further, in the cockpit display area Db, the "hold change notice" can be executed by using the hold symbol and the execution symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db. This "hold change notice" is to change the display color of the hold symbol and the execution symbol in a plurality of stages from before the execution of the variation effect to during the execution of the jackpot expectation of the variation effect executed in the main display area Dm. It is a notice suggested by.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as a "hold change notice", the display colors of the hold symbol and the execution symbol are displayed from "white", which is a normal display mode, to "blue", which is a blue display mode, and red. It is configured to be changeable to the "red" aspect or the "rainbow color" of the rainbow-colored display aspect. This pachinko machine 10 is configured so that the selection ratio of the display color of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol is different when the "big hit display" occurs in the variable effect or when the "reach display" occurs. By changing the display color of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol from the normal display mode (“white”) to another display mode (for example, “blue”), in the variation effect indicated by the reserved symbol and the executed symbol, “ It is possible to suggest to the player the possibility that "reach display" or "big hit display" may occur for each display color.

Specifically, in the "holding change notice", when the holding symbol and the execution symbol are in the "blue" display mode rather than the normal display mode ("white"), the variation indicated by the hold symbol and the execution symbol. In the production, the ratio of "reach display" and "big hit display" is set high. In addition, when the reserved symbol and the executed symbol have a display mode of "red" rather than "blue", the ratio of "reach display" or "big hit display" is higher in the variation effect indicated by the reserved symbol and the executed symbol. Set. Furthermore, when the reserved symbol and the executed symbol have a display mode of "rainbow color" rather than "red", the ratio of "reach display" or "big hit display" in the variation effect indicated by the reserved symbol and the executed symbol is higher. Set high.

In addition, when the display mode of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol is "red", the mode of the effect mainly "super reach" in the variable effect indicated by the "red" reserved symbol or the executed symbol (mainly). The mode of production may be referred to as "directed mode") or "special reach" directed mode (hereinafter, "super reach" directed mode or "special reach" directed mode may be collectively referred to as "super reach or higher" directed mode. ) Is set to be confirmed. Further, when the display mode of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol is "rainbow color", the appearance of the "big hit display" is set to be confirmed in the variable effect indicated by the reserved symbol or the executed symbol of the "rainbow color". Has been done. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the reserved symbol and the executed symbol is "reach display" or "big hit display" in the order of normal ("white")-> "blue"-> "red"-> "rainbow color". It is set so that the degree of expectation for the appearance of is high.

It should be noted that the display mode of "rainbow color" in the "hold change notice" is set so that it does not appear in the hold symbol but can appear only in the execution symbol. This is because, after the display mode of "rainbow color" in which the occurrence of the jackpot is confirmed in the reserved symbol is displayed, if the reserved symbol is not executed due to some abnormality (for example, power off), the player gains. Dissatisfaction arises because the jackpot that should be done is not obtained. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the above-mentioned dissatisfaction from occurring by configuring the reserved symbol so that the display mode of "rainbow color" in which the occurrence of the jackpot is confirmed does not appear in advance.

In addition, when the reserved symbol shifts due to the execution (digestion) of the variation effect in the state where the displayed mode of the reserved symbol has changed due to this "pending change notice", the displayed mode of the changed reserved symbol shifts. It is configured to be inherited (inherited) and reflected in the previous reserved symbol or executed symbol. That is, when the display mode of the reserved symbol changes, even when the changed reserved symbol shifts to another reserved symbol display area Db1 to Db3 or the executed symbol display area Db0 with the execution of the variation effect, the display before the shift is performed. The mode is configured to be maintained as it is as the display mode of the reserved symbol or the executed symbol after the shift.

Therefore, for example, when the display color of the reserved symbol changes to "red" in the special figure 1 fourth reserved symbol display area Db1d, the reserved symbol changes from the special figure 1 third reserved symbol display area Db1c to the special figure 1 second reserved. When shifting from the symbol display area Db1b → special figure 1 first reserved symbol display area Db1a → execution symbol display area Db0, the “red” reserved symbol or execution symbol is configured to be continuously displayed. To.

In the first embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect based on the entry into the special figure 1 winning opening 64b or the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c is configured to be reserved up to 4 times, respectively. The maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four, and may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight), respectively. Further, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, it is not necessary to display the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81. If the third symbol display device 81 does not display information on the number of reserved balls (reserved symbols, etc.), the "reserved change notice" by the reserved symbols cannot be executed, so other character symbols, etc. are additionally added. It may be configured to execute a look-ahead notice similar to the "pending change notice" by making it appear.

Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls, which are equal to the maximum number of hold lamps of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and hold balls are provided according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state. It may display a number. When the number of reserved balls is displayed by the hold lamp, it is natural that the same look-ahead notice as the "hold change notice" of the first embodiment is executed by providing a plurality of types of display colors of the hold lamp. Is possible.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying a character and a preview effect image, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit as a result of the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm. The cockpit display area Db is a reserved symbol indicating the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) for which the variation effect has not been executed among the balls entered in the special figure 1 winning opening 64b or the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c. This is an area for displaying and the execution symbol related to the fluctuation effect during execution.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 6B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, in the left small area Ds1, a moving image such as the appearance of a notice symbol is displayed, and the variation effect performed in the main display area Dm is in a state where it is easier to transition to a jackpot than usual. Suggested to the player.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, in the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in the first embodiment) normally performs a predetermined operation, and the variation effect is performed in the main display area Dm. Based on this, a special action other than the predetermined action is performed, the color of the boy's hair, which is usually black, or the color of the white headband, which is usually white, changes, or another character appears. Is done.

Further, in the sub-display area Ds, in the right small area Ds3, a level meter (not shown) that gradually suggests whether or not a big hit occurs in the fluctuation effect performed in the main display area Dm appears. Is displayed. This level meter increases (adds) each time the expected occurrence of "reach display" and the expected jackpot in the running fluctuation effect increase based on the appearance of the notice symbol etc. in the variation effect. It is configured to suggest that the jackpot is confirmed when the display limit (MAX display) of the level meter is reached. Therefore, the sub-display area Ds has a function of suggesting the occurrence of "reach display" in the main display area Dm.

Returning to FIG. 3, the description will be continued. The ordinary symbol display device 83 performs variable display in which a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as display symbols (ordinary symbols) are alternately lit each time the sphere passes through the ordinary symbol gate 67. .. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the first embodiment), the ordinary electric accessory 67a is in an operating state according to the gaming state. It is configured so that the rotating plate is rotated.

The number of reserved balls of the normal symbol gate 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is lit and displayed on the normal symbol holding lamp 84. Four ordinary symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps 84, and are arranged above the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of holds is displayed according to the number of lights of the normal symbol hold lamp 84.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the normal symbol display device 83 as in the first embodiment, as well as the special symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. It may be done by using a part of 81. Similarly, the normal symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, but 3 times or less, or 5 times, as in the case of the special figure 1 winning opening 64b or the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c. It may be set to the above number of times (for example, 8 times). Further, when the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol holding lamp 84 may not be used to display the lighting.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings (entrance openings) 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a read-only memory (Read Only Memory; hereinafter abbreviated as “ROM”) 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and controls stored in the ROM 202. Random Access Memory (hereinafter abbreviated as "RAM") 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing a program, and other interrupt circuits and timer circuits. Various circuits such as a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, the main pachinko machines 10 include a jackpot lottery, setting of dynamic display and variation effect in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results of variable display in the normal symbol display device 83. Perform various processes. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Further, the ROM 202 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a hold number table 202c, a stop pattern table 202d, a variation pattern table 202e, a probability variation area opening / closing table 202f, and a probability variation area effective table 202g. The main control device 110 executes the above-mentioned main control by the various counters stored in the RAM 203 and the various tables stored in the ROM 202.

Here, with reference to FIG. 8, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like can be used for jackpot lottery, dynamic display setting of the special symbol display device 37, setting of variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, lottery of variable display display result on the normal symbol display device 83, and the like. To do so, it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. Further, in the description of the various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 will also be described with reference to FIGS. 9 to 12.

For the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display setting of the special symbol display device 37, and the setting of the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the stop type of the jackpot symbol are used. The jackpot type counter C2 used for selection, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting the effect mode of the fluctuation effect, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the fluctuation pattern selection. The variable type counter CS1 used for is used.

Further, the random number counter C4 per normal figure is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to "0".

Each counter is updated, for example, at "4 ms" intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and some counters are irregular in the main process (see FIG. 33). Is updated to, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 includes a first holding ball storage area 203d composed of four holding areas (first holding first to fourth areas) related to the first special symbol, and four holding areas related to the second special symbol. A second reserved ball storage area 203e composed of areas (second reserved first to fourth areas) is provided, and each of these areas has a special figure 1 winning opening 64b or a special drawing 2 winning opening 64c. Each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is stored according to the ball entry timing.

Each counter will be described in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 899") to reach the maximum value (for example, "899" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 899"). After reaching "0", it returns to "0". In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated from the initial value. Will be done.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of "0 to 899", the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of "0 to 899". The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 33).

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the special figure 1 winning opening 64b (starting winning), it is provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special drawing 1 winning opening 64b (first special symbol). It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first hold area of any of the first hold first to fourth areas. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the special figure 2 winning opening 64c (starting winning), it is provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c (second special symbol). It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the second hold area of any of the second hold first to fourth areas.

The value of the random number for which the jackpot random number counter C1 is a jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the jackpot stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1, 203e1 in the hold area. When the value of the random number counter C1 matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined to be a jackpot.

Here, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202. The jackpot random number table 202a is used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state (a period other than the “probability fluctuation state”) of a special symbol that is a “normal gaming state” or a “time shortening state”. For the probability state and for the high probability state used when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the "probability fluctuation state (during probability change)", which is a high probability state of a special symbol with a higher probability of becoming a big hit than the low probability state. It can be divided into two types: Then, the number of big hit random numbers included in each of the low-probability state and the high-probability state is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be a big hit different, the probability of being a big hit is changed between the low probability state and the high probability state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of values (big hit random number value) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that becomes a jackpot in the low probability state is three, and the value "7,307,582" is the jackpot random number. It is stored in the table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the low probability state (that is, the "normal game state" and the "time reduction state") is set to be 3/900 = 1/300.

On the other hand, the number of random numbers (big hit random numbers) that are jackpots in the high probability state is 9, and the values "28,122,298,390,486,567,656,750,866" are It is stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. That is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol in the high probability state (that is, the "probability fluctuation state") is set to be 9/900 = 1/100.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number value for the low-probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high-probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a are each jackpot random number value so as not to be duplicated. Is set. Here, if there is a value that becomes a jackpot random number regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value can be easily predicted from the outside, so that there is a high possibility that the jackpot will be illegally assigned. On the other hand, as in the first embodiment, the jackpot is obtained by changing the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state). Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the value of the random number, it is possible to suppress fraud.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description will be continued. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs, and is added one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99"), and the maximum value (for example, "0 to 99") is added. In the case of a counter that can take the value of "", it is configured to return to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the special figure 1 winning opening 64b (starting winning), it is provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special drawing 1 winning opening 64b (first special symbol). Of the first reserved first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first reserved area as the first reserved area. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the special figure 2 winning opening 64c (starting winning), it is provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c (second special symbol). Of the second reserved first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second reserved area as the second reserved area.

Here, for example, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the hold area 1 in the first hold ball storage area 203d or the second hold ball storage area 203e is not a random number that is a jackpot, that is, it is lost. If it is a random number, the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect and the type of the stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") are the ones at the time of loss. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the 1 hold area in the 1st hold ball storage area 203d or the 2nd hold ball storage area 203e is a random number that becomes a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern or stop in the fluctuation effect. The type is the one at the time of big hit. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined according to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

The value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99". The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM 202. The jackpot type table 202b includes a jackpot type table 202b1 for special figure 1 referred to in the first lottery game of the first special symbol, and a jackpot type for special figure 2 referred to in the second lottery game of the second special symbol. A table 202b2 is provided.

Here, the jackpot type table 202b1 for special figure 1 and the jackpot type table 202b2 for special figure 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 (a) and 10 (b). FIG. 10A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot type table 202b1 for special figure 1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. 10B is also stored in the ROM 202. It is a figure which shows typically an example of the jackpot type table 202b2 for special figure 2 corresponding to the 2nd special symbol. As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the jackpot type table 202b associates the type of the special symbol, the jackpot type according to the type of the special symbol, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. It is a table.

As for the jackpot type, as described above, after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are both high probabilities until the variation effect of the special symbol is executed 100 times. "Probability fluctuation A" which is a "15R probability variation jackpot" that is in a state (so-called ST 100 times and time reduction 100 times) and notifies that it is a "probability fluctuation state", and a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. Later, until the variation effect of the special symbol is executed 100 times, both the jackpot probability of the special symbol and the hit probability of the normal symbol are in a high probability state (so-called ST 100 times and time reduction 100 times). Between "latent probability fluctuation C", which is a "15R latent probability variation jackpot" that does not notify that it is in a "probability fluctuation state", and after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, until the special symbol variation effect is executed 100 times. , The hit probability of a normal symbol is in a high probability state, but the jackpot probability of a special symbol is in a low probability state (so-called time reduction of 100 times). After the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 7 rounds, the jackpot probability of the special symbol becomes a high probability state (so-called ST100 times) until the variation effect of the special symbol is executed 100 times, and the special symbol Until the fluctuation effect of is executed 50 times, the hit probability of the normal symbol is in a high probability state (so-called 50 times in a short time), but the "7R latent probability change jackpot" that does not notify that it is in the "probability fluctuation state" "Hidden probability fluctuation A" and "Hidden probability fluctuation B", and after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 7 rounds, the hit probability of the normal symbol is high until the special symbol variation effect is executed 50 times. Although it becomes a probability state, the "7R time reduction jackpot" that shifts to the "time reduction state" in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol becomes a low probability state (so-called time reduction 50 times) is "time reduction A" and "time reduction B". is there.

In the jackpot type table 202b1 for special figure 1 and the jackpot type table 202b2 for special figure 2, each jackpot type is associated with a possible value of the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type.

In the example of the jackpot type table 202b1 for special figure 1 of FIG. 10A, the value “0 to 19” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the “time saving A” which is the “7R time saving jackpot”, and also “ The value "20 to 39" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the "time saving B" which is the "7R time saving jackpot", and the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the "latent probability fluctuation A" which is the "7R latent probability variation jackpot". The values "40 to 59" are associated with each other, and the value "60 to 79" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the "latent probability fluctuation B" which is also the "7R latent probability variation jackpot", and the "15R probability variation jackpot" is associated with. The value "80 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the "probability fluctuation A".

In the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol in the first embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any one of the first reserved ball storage areas 203d becomes a jackpot. If it is a value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first holding area is determined from the jackpot type table 202b1 for special figure 1.

For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "15", the "time reduction A" corresponding to "7R time reduction jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "35", the jackpot type counter C2 is a jackpot. If "time saving B" corresponding to "7R time saving jackpot" is determined as the type and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "48", the jackpot type is "latent probability fluctuation A" corresponding to "7R latent probability variation jackpot". Is determined, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "77", the "latent probability fluctuation B" corresponding to the "7R latent probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95". If so, the "probability fluctuation A" corresponding to the "15R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

That is, when a big hit is won in the first lottery game of the first special symbol (that is, a lottery based on the entry into the special figure 1 winning opening 64b), "time saving A", "time saving B", and "latent probability". Each jackpot type of "variation A", "latent probability variation B", and "probability variation A" is configured to be evenly selected at a rate of 20%.

Further, in the example of the jackpot type table 202b2 for special figure 2 of FIG. 10B, the value “0 to 39” of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the “time saving C” which is the “15R time saving jackpot”. The value "40 to 59" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the "latent probability variation C" which is the "15R latent probability variation jackpot", and the jackpot type is associated with the "probability variation A" which is the "15R probability variation jackpot". The values "60 to 99" of the counter C2 are associated with each other.

In the winning / failing lottery of the second special symbol in the first embodiment, as in the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol, the jackpot random number stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of any of the holding areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. When the value of the counter C1 is a jackpot value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 in the same holding area is the jackpot type table for special figure 2. Determined from 202b2.

For example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "10", the "time saving C" corresponding to "15R time saving jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "55", the jackpot is hit. If the "latent probability variation C" corresponding to the "15R latent probability variation jackpot" is determined as the type and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "80", the "probability variation A" corresponding to the "15R probability variation jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type. Is decided.

That is, when a jackpot is won in the second lottery game of the second special symbol (that is, a lottery based on the ball entering the special figure 2 winning opening 64c), the jackpot type of "time saving C" is 40%. It is configured so that the jackpot type of "latent probability variation C" is selected at a rate of 20%, and the jackpot type of "probability variation A" is selected at a rate of 40%.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the lottery game with the second special symbol has a greater game value for the player than the lottery game with the first special symbol. A game of receiving a lottery with a special symbol, that is, whether to enter the special figure 2 winning opening 64b rather than entering the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c was born, and variations were provided in the game to enhance the interest of the game. There is.

Here, the open pattern and the effective pattern of the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation region 74 in each jackpot type will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a jackpot of a special symbol is won, each round (1 round to 7 rounds, or 1 round to 15 rounds) at the time of the jackpot is based on the jackpot type of the jackpot. The same applies.) The opening pattern of the right probabilistic region 73 or the left probabilistic region 74 (the drive pattern of the right probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73a and the left probabilistic region switching plate 74a) is set for each round, and the right probabilistic region 73 or the right probabilistic region 73 or It is configured so that the effective pattern of the left probabilistic region 74 is set.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the jackpot, the right side probability variation region 73 or the left side probability variation region 74 (hereinafter, the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation region 74 are collectively referred to as “probability variation region 73”. When the ball passes through (sometimes referred to as ", 74"), a "probability fluctuation state" is given (generated) after the end of the jackpot, and each probability variation region 73, 74 which is set to be invalid is assigned (generated). It is configured so that the "probability fluctuation state" is not given (generated) even when the ball passes through.

Conventionally, a probabilistic region through which a ball can pass is provided in the large winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 that is opened at the time of a big hit, and the probabilistic region is controlled to open and close by an opening / closing lever or the like, and the ball that flows into the large winning opening 65a. There is a pachinko machine that generates (gives) a "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot when the player passes through the probability variation region.

In such a pachinko machine, when a jackpot occurs, the jackpot symbol corresponding to, for example, a "time reduction state" or a "normal gaming state" is not notified to the player whether or not a "probability fluctuation state" occurs. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, etc., and a "latent probability variation effect mode (that is, a" time saving notification effect mode "or a" normal notification effect mode ". The same shall apply hereinafter)" is performed, and the player is in a "probability fluctuation state". ", But an effect as if a" time reduction state "or a" normal game state "is generated is executed. Then, during the jackpot, the opening / closing lever is controlled to open / close at a predetermined timing based on the jackpot type.

Specifically, for example, in the case of a jackpot type that generates a "probability fluctuation state", the opening / closing lever is controlled to open / close so that the ball flowing into the winning opening 65a passes through the probability variation region. It is configured to generate a "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot type that does not generate a "probability fluctuation state", the opening / closing lever is controlled to open / close so that the ball flowing into the jackpot 65a does not pass through the probability variation region, and the "probability" is achieved after the jackpot ends. It is configured to generate a "time reduction state" or a "normal game state" without generating a "variable state".

With this configuration, it is difficult (impossible) for the player to recognize whether the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is the "probability fluctuation state", the "time shortening state", or the "normal gaming state". , It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played. Further, even in the "time shortened state" or the "normal gaming state", the player is made to guess that it may be the "probability fluctuation state" (internally) contrary to the production mode, and the game is continuously executed. As a result, the operating rate of the pachinko machine can be improved.

However, in the above-mentioned pachinko machine, even when the "latent probability variation effect mode" is executed, the "probability fluctuation state" is generated without exception when the ball passes through the probability variation region. The game is that the player keeps paying attention to whether or not the ball passes through the probabilistic region, and when the player visually recognizes that the ball has passed through the probabilistic region, a "probability fluctuation state" occurs. It will be recognized by the person, and the expected playability will collapse. In addition, if the player continuously executes the "latent probability variation effect mode" after the player recognizes the occurrence of the "probability fluctuation state", the player cannot be given the interest of the game, but rather the game. On the other hand, there is a risk of awakening.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, two probability variation regions (right side probability variation region 73 and left side probability variation region 74) are provided in the jackpot 65a, and each probability variation for each round of jackpot according to the jackpot type. The drive is controlled so that one of the opening / closing plates 73a and 74a provided for each of the regions 73 and 74 is opened, and the valid or invalid setting of each probability variation region 73 and 74 cannot be recognized by the player (internal). Control to switch. Then, when the ball passes through the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set during the jackpot, a "probability fluctuation state" is generated after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, even if the sphere passes through the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 that are set to be invalid, the "probability fluctuation state" is not generated after the end of the jackpot.

That is, for example, when the right probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73a is opened and the sphere can flow into the right probabilistic region 73, when the right probabilistic region 73 is effectively set, the sphere has passed through the right probabilistic region 73. Occasionally, it is configured to generate a "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, when the right probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73a is opened and the ball can flow into the right probabilistic region 73, and the right probabilistic region 73 is set to be invalid, even if the ball passes through the right probabilistic region 73. , It is configured so that the "probability fluctuation state" does not occur after the end of the jackpot.

Further, for example, when the left probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74a is opened and the ball can flow into the left probabilistic region 74, when the left probabilistic region 74 is effectively set, the ball passes through the left probabilistic region 74. Occasionally, it is configured to generate a "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, when the left probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74a is opened and the ball can flow into the left probabilistic region 74 and the left probabilistic region 74 is invalidated, even if the ball passes through the left probabilistic region 74. , It is configured so that the "probability fluctuation state" does not occur after the end of the jackpot.

With this configuration, even if the sphere passes through each probability variation region 73,74, if the probability variation region 73,74 is not effectively set internally, a "probability fluctuation state" occurs after the jackpot ends. Therefore, even when the player visually recognizes the passage of the ball through the probabilistic regions 73 and 74, it can be configured so that the occurrence of the "probability fluctuation state" is not confirmed after the end of the jackpot. With this configuration, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, even when the "latent probability variation effect mode" is being executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the opening / closing pattern of each probability variation region 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the opening / closing pattern is set to "X1" in "time saving A", and " In "time saving B", the opening / closing pattern is set to be "X2", and in "latent probability fluctuation A", the opening / closing pattern is set to be "X1" as in "time saving A", and "latent probability fluctuation B". In ", the opening / closing pattern is set to" X2 "as in" time saving B ", and in" probability fluctuation A ", the opening / closing pattern is set to" Y1 "(see FIG. 10A). ). Further, as the opening / closing pattern of each probability variation region 73, 74 corresponding to each jackpot type of the second special symbol, the opening / closing pattern is set to be "Y2" in "time saving C", and in "latent probability fluctuation C", it is set. Similar to "Time saving C", the opening / closing pattern is set to be "Y2", and in "probability variation A", the opening / closing pattern is set to "Y1" (see FIG. 10B).

Here, with reference to FIG. 11, the opening / closing patterns of the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 for each jackpot type will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the probability variation region opening / closing table 202f. In the probability variation area opening / closing table 202f shown in FIG. 11, the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are opened in each round are shown for each jackpot type in each special symbol, and the right side probability variation area 73 is opened in each round. Is expressed as "right", and when the left probability variation region 74 is opened, it is expressed as "left". In the first embodiment, when one probability variation region 73,74 (for example, right side probability variation region 73) is open, the other probability variation region 74, 73 (for example, left side probability variation region 74) is closed. It is configured to be.

As shown in FIG. 11, the opening / closing patterns “X1” of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 corresponding to the jackpot types “time saving A” and “latent probability fluctuation A”, which are jackpots for a maximum of 7 rounds of the first special symbol, are odd numbers. In the rounds (that is, 1st round, 3rd round, 5th round and 7th round), the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a is opened so that the ball can pass through the right probability variation region 73, and the left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a is closed. The ball cannot pass through the left probability variation region 74.

Further, in the opening / closing pattern "X1", in the even-numbered rounds (that is, 2nd round, 4th round and 6th round), the left probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74a is opened so that the ball can pass through the left probabilistic region 74 and the right probabilistic region. The opening / closing plate 73a is closed so that the ball cannot pass through the right side probability variation region 73.

That is, in the opening / closing pattern "X1", the ball can pass through the right side probability variation region 73 in the first round of the jackpot, the ball can pass through the left side probability variation region 74 in the next round (that is, the second round), and then the jackpot Until the end (that is, the end of the 7th round), the ball can alternately pass through the right side probability change area 73 or the left side probability change area 74 for each round. Therefore, the number of passable rounds to the right side probability variation region 73 is "4", and the number of passable rounds to the left side probability variation region 74 is "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 11, the opening / closing patterns “X2” of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 corresponding to the jackpot types “time saving B” and “latent probability fluctuation B”, which are jackpots of a maximum of 7 rounds of the first special symbol, are In odd rounds (ie, 1 round, 3 rounds, 5 rounds and 7 rounds), the left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a is opened so that the ball can pass through the left probability variation region 74, and the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a is closed. Therefore, the ball cannot pass through the right side probability variation region 73.

Further, in the opening / closing pattern "X2", in the even-numbered rounds (that is, 2nd round, 4th round and 6th round), the right probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73a is opened so that the ball can pass through the right probabilistic region 73 and the left probabilistic region. The opening / closing plate 74a is closed so that the ball cannot pass through the left side probability variation region 74.

That is, in the opening / closing pattern "X2", the ball can pass through the left probabilistic region 74 in the first round of the jackpot, the ball can pass through the right probabilistic region 73 in the next round (that is, the second round), and then the jackpot Until the end (that is, the end of the seventh round), the ball can alternately pass through the left probabilistic region 74 or the right probabilistic region 73 for each round. Therefore, the number of passable rounds to the left side probability variation region 74 is "4", and the number of passable rounds to the right side probability variation region 73 is "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 11, the opening / closing pattern "Y1" of each probability variation region 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", which is a jackpot of a maximum of 15 rounds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, is In odd rounds (ie, 1 round, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds, 9 rounds, 11 rounds, 13 rounds and 15 rounds), the left probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74a is opened so that the ball can pass through the left probabilistic region 74. At the same time, the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a is closed, and the ball cannot pass through the right probability variation region 73.

Further, in the opening / closing pattern "Y1", in the even-numbered rounds (that is, 2 rounds, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 12 rounds and 14 rounds), the right probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73a is opened and the right probabilistic region 73a is opened. The ball can pass through the left probabilistic region 74a, and the left probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74a is closed so that the ball cannot pass through the left probabilistic region 74.

That is, in the opening / closing pattern "Y1", the ball can pass through the left probabilistic region 74 in the first round of the jackpot, the ball can pass through the right probabilistic region 73 in the next round (that is, the second round), and then the jackpot Until the end (that is, the end of the 15th round), the ball can alternately pass through the left probabilistic region 74 or the right probabilistic region 73 for each round. Therefore, the number of passable rounds to the left side probability variation region 74 is "8", and the number of passable rounds to the right side probability variation region 73 is "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 11, the opening / closing patterns “Y2” of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 corresponding to the jackpot types “time saving C” and “latent probability fluctuation C”, which are jackpots of a maximum of 15 rounds of the second special symbol, are In odd rounds (ie, 1 round, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds, 9 rounds, 11 rounds, 13 rounds and 15 rounds), the right probability variable region opening / closing plate 73a is opened so that the ball can pass through the right probability variable region 73. At the same time, the left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a is closed, and the ball cannot pass through the left probability variation region 74.

Further, in the opening / closing pattern "Y2", in the even-numbered rounds (that is, 2 rounds, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 12 rounds and 14 rounds), the left probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74a is opened to open the left probabilistic region 74a. The ball can pass through the right probabilistic region 73a, and the right probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73a is closed so that the ball cannot pass through the right probabilistic region 73.

That is, in the opening / closing pattern "Y2", the ball can pass through the right side probability variation region 73 in the first round of the jackpot, the ball can pass through the left side probability variation region 74 in the next round (that is, the second round), and then the jackpot Until the end (that is, the end of the 15th round), the ball can alternately pass through the right side probability change area 73 or the left side probability change area 74 for each round. Therefore, the number of passable rounds to the right side probability variation region 73 is "8", and the number of passable rounds to the left side probability variation region 74 is "7".

In this way, the jackpot types (that is, the jackpot types "time saving A" and "latent probability fluctuation A", the jackpot types "time saving B" and "latent probability fluctuation B", and the jackpot type "time saving C" have the same opening and closing patterns. ”And“ latent probability fluctuation C ”), respectively, so that the jackpot type cannot be determined only by the opening / closing patterns of the respective probability variation regions 73 and 74, so that the player can recognize which jackpot type has been won. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a playability that makes it difficult (impossible) to make the player guess in which game state the game is being played.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the effective pattern of each probability variation region 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type of the first special symbol, the effective pattern is "A" in "time saving A" and "latent probability fluctuation B". In "time saving B" and "latent probability fluctuation A", the effective pattern is set to "B", and in "probability fluctuation A", the effective pattern is set to "C". (See FIG. 10 (a)).

Further, as the effective pattern of each probability variation region 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type of the second special symbol, the effective pattern is set to be "A" in "time saving C", and the effective pattern is set in "latent probability fluctuation C". Is set to be "B", and in "probability variation A", the effective pattern is set to be "C" (see FIG. 10B).

Here, with reference to FIG. 12, the effective patterns of the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 for each jackpot type will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the probability variation region effective table 202g. In the probability variation area effective table 202g shown in FIG. 12, the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are effectively set for each round in each jackpot type in each special symbol are shown, and when the right probability variation area 73 is effectively set. Is expressed as "right", and when the left probability variation area 74 is effectively set, it is expressed as "left".

In each round, when none of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 is effectively set, that is, when both probabilistic regions 73 and 74 are invalidated, the corresponding column is represented by a diagonal ruled line. Further, in the first embodiment, when one probability variation region 73,74 (for example, right side probability variation region 73) is effectively set, the other probability variation region 74,73 (for example, left side probability variation region 74) is invalid. It is configured to be set to.

As shown in FIG. 12, the effective patterns "time saving A" and "latent probability fluctuation B" of the jackpot type of the first special symbol and the effective patterns "time saving C" of the jackpot types 73 and 74 of the second special symbol are "time saving C". In "A", the right side probability variation area 73 is set to be valid and the left side probability variation area 74 is set to be invalid in the second round. Further, in the effective pattern "A", the left probabilistic region 74 is set to be valid and the right probabilistic region 73 is invalidated in the fifth round. In the valid pattern "A", both probability variation regions 73 and 74 are set to be invalid in other rounds (that is, 1 round, 3 rounds, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, and 7 rounds or later).

That is, in the case of the effective pattern "A" of each probability variation region 73, 74, the jackpot is caused by the ball passing through the right probability variation region 73 in the second round or the ball passing through the left probability variation region 74 in the fifth round. After the end, a "probability fluctuation state" is given.

Here, in the opening patterns of the jackpot types "time saving A" and "time saving C", the left side probability variation region 74 is opened in the second round, while the right side probability variation region 73 is closed. Further, in the fifth round, the right probabilistic region 73 is open, while the left probabilistic region 74 is closed. Therefore, the ball does not pass through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set in any of the rounds. Therefore, in the jackpot types "time saving A" and "time saving C", since the ball does not pass through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set during the jackpot, the "probability fluctuation state" does not occur after the jackpot ends. It is configured.

On the other hand, in the opening pattern of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", the right side probability variation region 73 is opened in the second round, while the left side probability variation region 74 is closed. Further, in the fifth round, the left probabilistic region 74 is open, while the right probabilistic region 73 is closed. Therefore, the sphere passes through the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 in a plurality of rounds in which the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 are effectively set. Therefore, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", since the sphere passes through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set during the jackpot, the "probability fluctuation state" is configured to occur after the jackpot ends. There is.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12, each probability variation region 73, 74 in the jackpot type "time saving B" and "latent probability variation A" of the first special symbol and the jackpot type "latent probability variation C" of the second special symbol. In the effective pattern "B" of, the right side probability variation area 73 is set to be valid and the left side probability variation area 74 is set to be invalid in the third round. Further, in the effective pattern "B", the left probabilistic region 74 is set to be valid and the right probabilistic region 73 is invalidated in the sixth round. In the valid pattern "B", both probability variation regions 73 and 74 are invalidated in other rounds (that is, 1 round, 2 rounds, 4 rounds, 5 rounds, and 7 rounds or later).

That is, in the case of the effective pattern "B" of each probability variation region 73, 74, the big hit is caused by the ball passing through the right probability variation region 73 in the third round or the ball passing through the left probability variation region 74 in the sixth round. After the end, a "probability fluctuation state" is given.

Here, in the opening pattern of the jackpot type “time saving B”, the left probability variation region 74 is open in the third round, while the right probability variation region 73 is closed. Further, in the sixth round, the right side probability variation region 73 is open, while the left side probability variation region 74 is closed. Therefore, the ball does not pass through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set in any of the rounds. Therefore, in the jackpot type "time saving B", since the ball does not pass through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set during the jackpot, the "probability fluctuation state" does not occur after the jackpot ends.

On the other hand, in the opening patterns of the jackpot types "latent probability variation A" and "latent probability variation C", the right probabilistic region 73 is open in the third round, while the left probabilistic region 74 is closed. Further, in the sixth round, the left probabilistic region 74 is open, while the right probabilistic region 73 is closed. Therefore, the sphere passes through the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 in a plurality of rounds in which the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 are effectively set. Therefore, in the jackpot types "latent probability fluctuation A" and "latent probability fluctuation C", since the sphere passes through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set during the jackpot, the "probability fluctuation state" is changed after the jackpot ends. It is configured to occur.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12, in the effective pattern "C" of each probability variation region 73, 74 in the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the right probability variation region 73 is in the fourth round. The left side probability variation area 74 is set to be invalid while being set to be valid. Further, in the effective pattern "C", the left probabilistic region 74 is set to be valid and the right probabilistic region 73 is set to be invalid in the ninth round. In the effective pattern "C", both probability variation regions 73 and 74 are set to be invalid in other rounds (that is, 1 to 3 rounds, 5 to 8 rounds, and 10 to 15 rounds).

That is, in the case of the effective pattern "C" of each probability variation region 73, 74, the big hit is caused by the ball passing through the right probability variation region 73 in the fourth round or the ball passing through the left probability variation region 74 in the ninth round. After the end, a "probability fluctuation state" is given.

Here, in the opening pattern of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", the right side probability variation region 73 is opened in the fourth round, while the left side probability variation region 74 is closed. Further, in the ninth round, the left probabilistic region 74 is open, while the right probabilistic region 73 is closed. Therefore, the sphere passes through the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 in a plurality of rounds in which the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 are effectively set. Therefore, in the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", since the sphere passes through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set during the jackpot, the "probability fluctuation state" is configured to occur after the jackpot ends. ..

In this way, in each jackpot type, the probability variation regions 73 and 74 that can be passed in each round are set, and the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are set to be valid or invalid corresponding to the rounds. Then, by making it impossible to determine the jackpot type only by passing the ball through each probability variation region 73, 74, it is difficult (impossible) for the player to recognize which jackpot type is won, and eventually. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a playability that makes the player guess whether or not the game is being played in the game state of.

Further, in the first embodiment, when a jackpot type that generates a "probability fluctuation state" is won after the jackpot ends, the ball passes through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set in a plurality of rounds in the jackpot. It is configured to be possible. Therefore, even if the ball cannot be passed through the probabilistic regions 73 and 74, which are effectively set, in one of the rounds in which the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 are effectively set, the other round. It is possible to pass the ball through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set in the round. Therefore, sudden troubles (for example, game abnormalities such as launch abnormalities, poor physical condition of the player, etc.) hinder the passage of the ball to the probability variation areas 73 and 74 in one of the effectively set rounds. Even in the event of an unforeseen situation, the player will not be able to pass the ball through the probabilistic areas 73 and 74 that are effectively set in the other round that is set to be valid. It is possible to realize a comfortable game without suffering a profit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the first embodiment, when a jackpot type that generates a "probability fluctuation state" is won after the jackpot ends, the ball passes while enabling different probability variation regions 73 and 74 in a plurality of rounds in the jackpot. It is configured to be possible. With this configuration, even if an abnormality occurs in one of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74, if a sphere passes through the other probabilistic region 74 and 73, the “probability fluctuation state” Can be generated. Therefore, it is possible to realize a comfortable game without causing a disadvantage to the player due to an unforeseen situation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The probability that each jackpot type will be selected in the event of a jackpot is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type is defined in the jackpot type table 202b according to the set probability.

Further, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the jackpot type table 202b corresponding to each game state may be prepared, and the number of values of the jackpot type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed in each jackpot type table 202b.

Returning to FIG. 8, the description of various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to, for example, add "1" in order within the range of "0 to 99", reach the maximum value (that is, "99"), and then return to "0".

In the first embodiment, the number of held fluctuation effects and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 determine the rough production mode of the fluctuation effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the time of jackpot and loss. Be selected. Specifically, only the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode or the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode in which the "reach display" does not occur and the variable element of the "normal reach" as the "reach display" are executed. The "normal reach" production mode and the "super reach" production mode in which the variable element of the "normal reach" is executed and the variable element of the "super reach" is executed, and the "special reach" which is also developed from the variable element of the "normal reach". 5 production modes are selected with the "special reach" production mode in which the variable element of "" is executed.

Here, each effect mode will be described in detail. Among the production modes, the "non-reach (shortened)" production mode and the "non-reach (normal)" production mode are described in "non-reach (normal)" production modes in the display areas Dm1 to Dm3 (see FIG. 6A) of the main display area Dm. This is an effect mode in which the same third symbol does not stop in the left display area Dm1 and the right display area Dm3 and the “reach display” does not occur after the fluctuation element of “high-speed fluctuation” is performed.

The fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" is displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6A) in the fluctuation effect performed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6) of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol is a variable element that is scrolled vertically downward on the display screen at high speed. In this "high-speed fluctuation", the third symbol is changed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the display content of the third symbol, and the stop result of the fluctuation effect displayed last time is irregularly mixed (shuffled). Is executed as.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" is performed except for a specific effect mode ("non-reach (shortened)" effect mode). It is configured to be used. The fluctuation element of the "low speed fluctuation" is visually recognized by the player after the fluctuation element of the "high speed fluctuation" in the fluctuation effect performed in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6A) of the third symbol display device 81. A variable element that scrolls the third symbol at a low speed at a possible speed. In the fluctuation element of this "low speed fluctuation", the third symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 6A) while causing the player to recognize the display content of the third symbol. Stop and display the design. When the same third symbol stops in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3, it develops into a variable element of "normal reach" as "reach display" occurs, while in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3. When a different third symbol is stopped, the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, and the variation effect is terminated (except when it develops into a "pseudo-ream" described later).

Therefore, in the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode, the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is performed, and then the "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is performed, and each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6A). ) Stop in turn, and the variation effect of 1 ends. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode, the "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is not performed after the "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, and after the end of the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element, each symbol sequence Z1 to Z1 Z3 stops at the same time, and the variation effect of 1 ends.

Among the effect modes, the "normal reach" effect mode is the same as the left symbol column Z1 and the right symbol column Z3 in the variable effect of each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 6A) in the main display area Dm. Immediately after the third symbol stops, the variable element of "normal reach" is executed, and the variable element of "reach display", that is, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" does not develop. This is one of the production modes. In the variable element of this "normal reach", as described above, the third symbol that is stopped and displayed in the left symbol column Z1 (left display area Dm1) and the right symbol column Z3 (right display area Dm3) of the main display area Dm is It is displayed in a larger size than usual. Further, the third symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 (middle display area Dm2) scrolls downward in the vertical direction of the display screen at a low speed, and the third symbol of the middle display area Dm2 is displayed in a visible state by the player. .. Further, in the variable element of this "normal reach", the sub display area Ds is erased with the enlarged display of the main display area Dm (not shown).

Among the production modes, the "super reach" production mode is one of the "reach display" production modes in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed by developing from the variable element of "normal reach". In this "super reach" effect mode, while the variable element of "super reach" is being executed, the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 6A) is deleted from the display state of the variable element of "normal reach", and this "super reach" is displayed. The reach forming symbol of the third symbol, which was the cause of the "reach display", is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm changes from the variable element of "normal reach", and a plurality of character symbols are displayed to perform "battle effect (for example, kickboxing)" (not shown).

In the first embodiment, it is configured to suggest the propriety of the variable production based on the result (win / loss) of the "battle production". Specifically, for example, in the above "battle effect", when the character symbol on the player side wins over the character symbol on the enemy side, it is suggested that the variable effect is "big hit display", and the player When the character symbol on the side loses to the character symbol on the enemy side, it is configured to suggest that the variation effect is "missing display".

Among the production modes, the "special reach" production mode is one of the "reach display" production modes in which the variable elements of the "special reach" are executed by developing from the variable elements of the "normal reach". In this "special reach" effect mode, while the variable element of "special reach" is being executed, the cockpit display area Db (FIG. 6) is changed from the display state of the variable element of "normal reach" to the variable element of "normal reach" as in the case of the variable element of "super reach". (See (a)) is deleted, and the reach forming symbol of the third symbol, which was the cause of this "reach display", is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area of the display screen. Then, the background display of the main display area Dm (see FIG. 6A) changes from the variable element of "normal reach", and a plurality of characters different from the variable element of "super reach" are made to appear to "competitive effect". (For example, car racing) ”(not shown).

In the first embodiment, it is configured to suggest the propriety of the variable production based on the result (win / loss) of the "competitive production". Specifically, for example, in the above "competition effect", when the character symbol on the player side wins over the character symbol on the enemy side, it is suggested that the variable effect becomes the "big hit display", and the player When the character symbol on the side loses to the character symbol on the enemy side, it is configured to suggest that the variation effect is "missing display".

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the special figure 1 winning opening 64b (starting winning), it is provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special drawing 1 winning opening 64b (first special symbol). Of the first reserved first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first reserved area. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the special figure 2 winning opening 64c (starting winning), it is provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c (second special symbol). Of the second reserved first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second reserved area.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is referred to according to whether or not the variation effect is correct, the current gaming state, and the number of variation effects currently being held (number of reserved balls). The stop pattern table 202d is configured to be different. That is, a plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are provided, and are configured to be selected according to the number of fluctuation effects (number of reserved balls) and the like during standby.

Further, in the first embodiment, when determining the detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, first, based on the hold number table 202c provided in the ROM 202, the appropriateness of the variation effect, the current gaming state, and the current gaming state. Any stop pattern table 202d corresponding to the number of variable effects (number of reserved balls) is selected. Then, a rough effect mode of the variation effect is selected based on the selected stop pattern table 202d and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. After that, a detailed fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation effect is determined based on the selected effect mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1 described later.

The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202d are set so that the range of random values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 in which the effect mode is selected for each stop pattern table 202d is different. A plurality of the stop pattern tables 202d are prepared in order to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the variation effect according to the success or failure of the variation effect, the game state, and the number of reserved balls. That is, (1) a big hit occurs in the fluctuation effect of the acquired third symbol, or (2) the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "probability fluctuation state", "time reduction state", or "normal game state". This is because the selection ratio of the effect mode is changed according to whether or not there is (3) how many balls are reserved for the variable effect.

This is because, as the first reason, the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit is changed for each production mode. That is, the ratio of selecting the "non-reach" production mode, the "normal reach" production mode, the "super reach" production mode, and the "special reach" production mode depending on whether the jackpot lottery is won or lost. By configuring so as to be different, the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit is changed for each production mode. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot lottery is won, the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode are easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the "non-reach" production is performed. It is configured so that the mode and the "normal reach" production mode can be easily selected. With this configuration, the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode can be easily hit, and the "normal reach" production mode and the "non-reach" production mode are difficult to hit. It can be a production or a production that does not make a big hit, and the degree of expectation of a big hit can be differentiated for each production mode. Therefore, when a production that is easy to hit a big hit appears in a variable production, it is suggested to the player that a big hit is likely to occur while the production that is easy to hit is being performed, and the interest of the game is enhanced. There is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the acquired lottery result is a big hit, it is easy to select an effect that is easy to make a big hit, and it is difficult to select an effect that is difficult to make a big hit, based on the stop pattern table 202d. It is configured to select the effect mode of the variable effect. On the other hand, when the acquired lottery result is lost, the stop pattern table 202d is configured so that it is difficult to select an effect that is easy to hit the jackpot and it is easy to select an effect that is difficult to hit the jackpot. As a result, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third symbol in the variable effect, if an effect that is easy to hit is executed, a big hit is likely to occur in the variable effect, and an effect that is difficult to hit is executed. If this is the case, it is difficult for a jackpot to occur in the variable effect, and by providing a difference in the expected value of the jackpot for each effect mode, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the execution of the variable effect.

The second reason is that the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the first special symbol is the number of times of entering the special figure 1 winning opening 64b or the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the second special symbol when the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit. This is to reduce as much as possible wasted balls (so-called no lottery due to overflow winning) based on the entry into the special figure 2 winning opening 64c in the state where the upper limit is reached. Specifically, the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to a maximum of 4 times, respectively, and the variation effect is executed for at least a certain period of time. In the gaming state in which the ball easily enters the special figure 2 winning opening 64c in the "variable state", the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is easily reached. In these gaming states, if a fluctuation effect with a long fluctuation time is selected, balls are frequently entered into the special figure 2 winning opening 64c when the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is reached, and the special figure 2 Despite entering the winning opening 64c, the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol cannot be obtained. In addition, even in the "normal game state", if a variation effect having a long fluctuation time is selected while the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has been reached, the first special symbol is reserved during the execution of the variation effect. Since the number of balls is not digested, even if a ball is entered into the special figure 1 winning opening 64b during that time, the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol cannot be obtained. In such a state, the player determines that the game value cannot be obtained even if the ball is inserted into the special figure 1 winning opening 64b, and the variable effect is digested so that the number of reserved balls can be acquired again. The ball will stop firing until it becomes, and the game will be interrupted. If the game is interrupted, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 will decrease, which will affect the management of the game hall.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the gaming state in which the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or the second special symbol) can be easily reached, or the number of reserved balls is close to (or matches) the maximum number of reserved balls. The number of reserved balls is configured to select the effect mode of the variation effect based on the stop pattern table 202d, which makes it easy to select a relatively short variation time. This prevents balls from entering the special figure 1 winning opening 64b or the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c when the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has been reached. be able to.

Further, the third reason is that the execution time is set to be long and the end of the variation effect is delayed, so that the state in which the variation effect is executed is maintained for a long time. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is small (not present), a ball is newly inserted into either the special figure 1 winning opening 64b or the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c within the variable time of the variable effect being executed. If the ball is not entered, the next variation effect cannot be started, and the demo screen or the like must be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the player does not perform the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 even though the ball is fired and the game is played, the player can obtain the interest related to the jackpot lottery that the player is looking for. Instead, I get excited about the game. Further, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 is difficult for the ball to enter the special figure 1 winning opening 64b or the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c because the variation effect is not performed in the third symbol display device 81. However, there is a risk that the game on the pachinko machine 10 will be stopped because it is determined that it is difficult to obtain the game value.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to select the effect mode of the variation effect based on the stop pattern table 202d, which makes it easy to select a relatively long variation time when the number of reserved balls for the variation effect is small. Has been done. As a result, the situation in which the variation effect is not performed in the third symbol display device 81 is unlikely to occur, and the execution state of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be added by "1" in order within the range of "0 to 199", and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "199"). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main processing (see FIG. 33). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the special figure 1 winning opening 64b (starting winning), it is provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special drawing 1 winning opening 64b (first special symbol). Of the first reserved first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the variable type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reserved area. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the special figure 2 winning opening 64c (starting winning), it is provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c (second special symbol). Of the second reserved first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the variable type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reserved area.

The variation type counter CS1 is used to determine a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is detailed by the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202e stored in the ROM 202 in the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 202d and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Determine the variation pattern. The determination of the variation pattern is specifically the determination of the variation time of the variation effect. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 have a reach type and detailed symbols of the third symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the fluctuation pattern (variation time) determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. The variation mode is determined, and whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the execution mode of the advance notice effect are determined.

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a rough fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect and determines only the fluctuation time. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to control the detailed advance notice lottery or the like necessary for executing the variation effect in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, so that the processing of the MPU 201 related to the variation effect can be reduced. it can. Further, it is not necessary to prepare the command of the total variation pattern of the variation effect in the main control device 110, and the ROM capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the variation effect is performed by determining the detailed variation pattern in the variation effect based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110. You can increase the degree of freedom in choosing. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 whose game state changes from moment to moment, it is possible to select or change the effect content of the variable effect at any time in response to the change, and it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. it can.

Here, each fluctuation element constituting the fluctuation pattern will be described. The variable element constitutes a part of the variable effect of 1, and each variable element is combined to form the variable effect of 1. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the fluctuation elements, the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation", the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation", the fluctuation element of "pseudo-ream", the fluctuation element of "normal reach", and the fluctuation element of "super reach" Variable elements, "special reach" variable elements and "re-variable" variable elements are provided.

The variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is a variable element that scrolls and fluctuates at high speed so that the content of the third symbol cannot be clearly recognized by the player. When the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected, the variable element of this "high-speed fluctuation" is performed for "3 seconds" at the beginning of the variable effect, and the variable element other than "non-reach (shortened)" ( For example, when the "non-reach (normal)") effect mode is selected, "7 seconds" is performed at the beginning of the variable effect. When the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" ends, the fluctuation element of the "low-speed fluctuation" described later is started (executed), or the fluctuation effect ends as it is.

The "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is started after the execution of the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element of "7 seconds", and whether or not the third symbol is visibly scrolled to generate "reach display" is determined. It is a variable factor to show. The variable element of this "low speed fluctuation" is not executed when the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode is selected, and the effect mode other than the "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode (for example, "non-reach (normally)" effect mode is not executed. ) ”Production mode) is selected, it is performed for“ 3 seconds ”after the fluctuation element of“ high-speed fluctuation ”. That is, in the "non-reach (shortening)" effect mode, after the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 of the main display area Dm does not pass through the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation". It is configured to stop rapidly (so-called bitter stop). When the variable element of this "low-speed fluctuation" ends, whether the variable element of the "pseudo-ream" described later is started (executed) or the variable element of the "normal reach" described later is started (executed). Alternatively, it is configured so that the variation effect ends as it is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "non-reach (normal)" effect mode has a "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element of "7 seconds" and a "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element of "3 seconds". The fluctuation effect is composed of the fluctuation pattern including. Further, in the "non-reach (shortening)" effect mode, the variation effect is configured by the variation pattern of only the variation elements of the "high-speed variation" of "3 seconds".

The "pseudo-ream" variable element is a variable element in which the start of the variable effect occurs a plurality of times (pseudo-stop occurs once) in one variable effect. Specifically, the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" is started in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 of the third symbol display device 81 and switched to the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation", and then in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. It is a variable element in which the unit effect is performed such that the variable effect is completed and a predetermined stop result (for example, the pseudo-continuous chance eye “677”) is displayed. The variable element of this "pseudo-ream" is that the variable element of the "high-speed fluctuation" starts again from the stop result when the predetermined stop result is stopped after the variable element of the "low-speed fluctuation", as if once more. The effect is executed as if the variable effect was started.

As for the variable element of this "pseudo-ream", a predetermined stop result (so-called pseudo-ream chance) appears after the execution of the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation", and the variable element of the second "high-speed fluctuation" is executed again. After that, it is a variable element that develops into a variable element of "normal reach". That is, as for the variable element of the "pseudo-ream", a pseudo-variable stop in which the pseudo-ream chance is displayed (hereinafter referred to as "pseudo-stop") is performed once, and then a predetermined stop result is obtained in the pseudo-stop. It is a variable element that appears and starts the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" again. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to always develop into at least a "normal reach" variable element after the end of the "pseudo-ream" variable element. The variable element of this "pseudo-ream" is performed "10 seconds" after the variable element of the "low speed fluctuation".

In the first embodiment, in the variable element of the "pseudo-ream", the number of pseudo-stops is set to 1, but the variable element of the "pseudo-ream" in which the number of pseudo-stops is performed twice or more is executed. It may be configured. Further, before the occurrence of the variable element of the "pseudo-ream", a variable element (so-called "pseudo-gase" variable element) for producing whether or not the pseudo-ream chance eye is stopped may be performed. .. In the variable element of this "pseudo-gase", an effect of whether or not a predetermined stop result appears after the execution of the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" (for example, the symbol forming the predetermined stop result is the effective line L1 (for example). (See FIG. 6A)) The effect of whether or not to stop by reciprocating on the top is performed. Hereinafter, it is referred to as "pseudo-variation"), and the above-mentioned predetermined stop result does not appear in the "pseudo-variation". It may be configured so as not to develop into a variable element of "pseudo-ream". By providing the variable element of this "pseudo-gase", after the end of the variable element of the "pseudo-gase", it develops into the variable element of "normal reach", or "missing display" appears (for example, "687"). ”), And it is possible to give a playability as to whether the variation effect ends as it is.

The variable element of "normal reach" is a general term for the variable element of "low speed fluctuation" or the variable element of "pseudo-ream" (hereinafter, "variable element of" low speed fluctuation "or the variable element of" pseudo-ream "", and "low speed". When the reach forming symbol is stopped and displayed in the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 in (sometimes referred to as a fluctuation factor of "variation, etc."), the fluctuation showing whether or not a big hit occurs depending on the fluctuation result of the middle symbol row Z2. It is an element. This "normal reach" variable element is performed "10 seconds" after the "low speed variation, etc." variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "normal reach" is executed, the pattern of directly displaying "loss display", the pattern of directly displaying "big hit display", and the pattern of "super reach" There are a pattern that develops into a variable element, a pattern that develops into a variable element of "special reach", and a pattern that once makes a temporary "loss display" appear and then executes the variable element of "re-variation". Has been done.

The variable element of "super reach" is developed and executed when the variable element of "normal reach" does not stop the "loss display" and the fluctuation of the middle symbol column Z2 is continued, and the "battle" is executed in the main display area Dm. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur by performing "directing". This "super reach" variable element is performed "10 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "super reach" is executed, a pattern in which the "loss display" is directly displayed and a pattern in which the "big hit display" is directly displayed are temporarily provided. A pattern is prepared in which the variable element of "re-variation" is executed after the "loss display" is displayed.

The variable element of "special reach" is developed and executed when the variable element of "normal reach" does not stop the "loss display" and the fluctuation of the middle symbol column Z2 is continued, and the "competition" is performed in the main display area Dm. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit will occur by performing "directing". This "special reach" variable element is performed "20 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of the "special reach" is executed, a pattern that directly displays the "loss display" and a pattern that directly displays the "big hit display" are temporarily provided. There is a pattern that "re-variates" after the "loss display" appears.

It should be noted that, after the execution of the variable element of "normal reach", it is configured to develop into the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach". When the symbol is stopped, it may be configured to suddenly develop into a "super reach" variable element or a "special reach" variable element without going through the "normal reach" variable element. Further, the variable element of "special reach" may be configured to be executed after the variable element of "super reach" is executed.

The variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that develops and is executed after the "loss display" appears once in any of the "reach display", and the "big hit display" appears. The variable element of this "re-variation" is performed for "10 seconds" after any "reach display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a pattern in which the “big hit display” appears after the execution of the fluctuation element of the “re-variation” is prepared.

In addition, the variable element of this "re-variation" is configured to occur only when the jackpot is won. That is, in the case of "loss display", the variable element of "re-variation" is not executed. This is because the variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that changes the temporarily stopped "loss display" to one of the "big hit displays", so in the case of "loss display" that has not won the jackpot. If you go to, there will be a discrepancy in the production. Therefore, the fluctuation element of this "re-variation" is configured so as to be selected only in the fluctuation pattern table 202e for big hits and not in the fluctuation pattern table 202e for loss.

The random number counter C4 per normal figure is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of "0 to 99", reaches the maximum value (that is, "99"), and then returns to "0". Further, when the random number counter C4 per normal figure makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the random number counter C4 per normal figure (value = "0 to 99"), and is used for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). It is updated once and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 33).

The value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22)), and it is detected that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol gate 67. At the same timing, it is stored in any of the normal map holding areas 1 to 4 provided in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203j of the RAM 203. Then, the data is sequentially shifted to the normal figure holding ball execution area 203k in the order of being stored in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203j, and becomes the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure stored in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203k. On the other hand, a hit judgment is made.

The value of the random number that hits the normal symbol is set by the random number table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 for each game state (for example, "1/10" in the low probability state, It is "9/10" in a high probability state), and the value of the counter C4 per normal figure stored in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203k is the value of the random number that is the hit set by the random number table per normal figure. If it matches, it is judged as a hit. Then, the variable display time table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is referred to according to the game state, and the variable display time of the normal symbol (for example, "3 seconds" or "0.5"). Seconds ”) are set, and after the variable display time elapses on the normal symbol display device 83, a symbol“ ○ ”is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (ordinary symbol). After that, the ordinary electric service control table (not shown) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is referred to according to the game state, and the opening time of the rotating plate of the ordinary electric accessory 67a (for example, "0. "5 seconds" or "5 seconds") is set, and the rotating plate is rotated during the opening time, during which the ball is configured to be able to roll on the upper surface of the rotating plate.

On the other hand, if the value of the normal figure counter C4 stored in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203k does not match the value of the hit random number set by the random number table per normal figure (not shown), It is judged to be a loss. Then, the variable display time (for example, "3 seconds" or "0.5 seconds") is set by referring to the normal figure variation time table (not shown) according to the game state, and the normal symbol display device 83 performs the variable display time. After the lapse of the variable display time, the symbol "x" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (normal symbol).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, variations of the winning / failing probability of the normal symbol, the variable display time of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the rotating plate of the ordinary electric accessory 67a are configured to be different according to each gaming state. To. Specifically, for example, in the "normal game state" which does not have the "time saving function", the probability of winning or failing the normal symbol is low, the variable display time of the normal symbol is long, and the rotating plate The opening time is set to be short. Further, in the "probability fluctuation state" or "time reduction state" having the "time function", the probability of winning or failing the normal symbol is high, the variable display time of the normal symbol is short, and the rotating plate is opened. The time is set to be long.

As described above, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is provided with various counters and the like, and the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 is provided with various tables. In the main control device 110, the values of the counters and the like are provided. A pachinko machine such as a jackpot lottery, setting of dynamic display and variation effect in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the normal symbol display device 83 according to the above-mentioned tables 202a to 202 g. Ten major processes can be performed.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. 8, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and inputs / outputs. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as an output (Input / Output; hereinafter abbreviated as "I / O") are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 33) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 32) when the power is turned on. It should be noted that the non-maskable interrupt (Non-Maskable Interrupt; hereinafter abbreviated as "NMI") terminal of the MPU 201 is designed so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The RAM 203 further includes a first reserved ball number counter 203a, a second reserved ball number counter 203b, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, a reserved ball execution area 203f, a right probability variation effective flag 203g, and a left. It has at least a probability change effective flag 203h and a probability change transition flag 203i.

The first reserved ball number counter 203a enters the special figure 1 first winning opening 64b (see FIG. 22), which is detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) that is periodically executed every “4 milliseconds”. Hereinafter, the entry of a ball into the special figure 1 winning opening 64b or the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c may be referred to as a "starting winning"), and the dynamic of the first special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 37. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (the number of standbys) of the display (the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81) up to four times.

The first reserved ball number counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (S913 in FIG. 32). Then, every time the start winning of the special figure 1 winning opening 64b is detected and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the first special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (Fig. 1). See S203 of 23). On the other hand, the first reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed (see S308 in FIG. 24).

Similar to the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) that is periodically executed every "4 milliseconds". Dynamic display of the second special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 37 based on the start winning to the winning opening 64c (variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81) ) Is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (waiting count) up to 4 times.

Similar to the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (S913 in FIG. 32). Then, every time the start winning of the special figure 2 winning opening 64c is detected and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the second special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (Fig. 2). See S207 of 23). On the other hand, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed (see S305 in FIG. 24).

The value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (that is, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) or the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (that is, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) is the reserved ball number command. Notifies the voice lamp control device 113 (see S210 in FIG. 23). The hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the start winning is detected and the first hold ball number counter 203a or the second hold ball number counter 203b is incremented by 1. Command.

The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of reserved balls itself for the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command. it can. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of times the dynamic display (variation effect) of each special symbol is held without accessing the main control device 110. In addition, each time a start winning prize is detected, the main control device 110 sends a hold ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113 to dynamically display (variate) each special symbol managed by the voice lamp control device 113. Even if the number of reserved balls in the effect) deviates from the actual number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (variable effect) held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the next received hold is received. The deviation can be corrected by the ball count command.

The voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 each time the hold ball number managed internally changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the display reserved ball number command.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits a hold ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113, the first hold ball number counter 203a or the first hold ball number counter 203a is added by 1 in the hold ball number command. 2 Counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 8) due to the above-mentioned start winning that triggered the addition of not only the value of the reserved ball number counter 203b but also the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b. Each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the above is also included.

That is, when there is a start winning, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the main control device 110 is a hold ball. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by several commands.

In the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation effect based on each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 transmitted by the hold ball number command is executed. Before the command is executed, it is determined what will happen to the fluctuation effect (whether it will be a big hit, what will happen to the fluctuation time, etc.). Then, based on the judgment result by the look-ahead, it is possible to decide the execution of various effects, and to determine the effect contents and the execution time (timing) of the "pending change notice".

It should be noted that the hold ball number command indicating the number of hold balls of the fluctuation effect and the command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like may be separately transmitted. As a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like, which is different from the reserved ball number command, the reserved ball number command is generated at the timing of the ball entering the special figure 1 winning opening 64b or the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c. , A command similar to the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command based on the incoming ball (pre-variation pattern command and pre-stop type command) may be generated and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In this case, with respect to the program for generating the pre-variation pattern command and the pre-stop type command, the program can be easily created by diverting the program of the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the stop, which are acquired from the counter buffer 203c when the start winning prize is detected in any of the special drawing 1 winning openings 64b. This is a memory for storing each value of the pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the special figure 1 winning opening 64b (starting winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are obtained from the counter buffer 203c. Is acquired and stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. In the first holding ball storage area 203d, four holdings are made so that the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the start winning of one of the first special symbols can be stored (held) up to four times. It has areas (first reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 8).

As described above, the second reserved ball storage area 203e includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a stop pattern selection counter acquired from the counter buffer 203c in connection with the detection of the start winning prize in the special figure 2 winning opening 64c. It is a memory for storing each value of C3 and the variation type counter CS1 respectively. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won the special figure 2 winning opening 64c (starting winning) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are set from the counter buffer 203c. Is acquired and stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. In the second holding ball storage area 203e, four holdings are made so that the data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) corresponding to the start winning of one of the second special symbols can be stored (held) up to four times. It has an area (second reserved first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 8).

As described above, the reserved ball execution area 203f is used for the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being executed, or the movement of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. It is a memory for storing data (each value of counters C1 to C3 and CS1) to be referred to in processing such as setting of target display and fluctuation effect.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the special symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display Data corresponding to each start winning prize stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e described above in order to execute processing such as dynamic display of the device 81 and setting of fluctuation effect ( When the data corresponding to the start prize related to the second special symbol is stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e among the counters C1 to C3 and CS1), it corresponds to one start prize of the data. The data is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, the data corresponding to the start prize related to the second special symbol is not stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the data corresponding to the start prize related to the first special symbol is stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. If so, the data corresponding to one of the starting prizes of the data is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the dynamic display (variable effect) relating to the second special symbol is preferentially executed, and the dynamic display (variable effect) relating to the first special symbol relates to the second special symbol. It is configured to be executed on the condition that the dynamic display (variable effect) is not held. The shift in the first embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 8 again, the details of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f will be described. The first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f are used for the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol and the movement of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to set the target display and the variation effect.

As described above, the jackpot random number counter used for the jackpot lottery is used for the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the setting of the variation effect. A jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used for determining the effect mode of the variation effect, and a variation type counter CS1 used for determining the variation pattern are used. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the special figure 1 winning opening 64b (starting winning). The second reserved ball storage area 203e stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the special figure 2 winning opening 64c (starting winning). ..

The first reserved ball storage area 203d is composed of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas). In each of the four holding areas (first holding first to fourth areas), the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are stored. 203d2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

Further, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved ball storage areas 1 to 4) like the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Similar to the first hold ball storage area 203d, the four hold areas (second hold first to fourth areas) have a jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter C2. A jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 for storing the value of, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203e4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. Has been done.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage areas 203d1, 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage areas 203d2, 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage areas 203d3, 203e3, and the variable type counter storage areas 203d4, 203e4 are set to 1. Although they are collectively provided in each of the reserved ball storage areas 203d and 203e, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided for each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1.

As described above, in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, data acquired at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) in any of the special figure 1 winning openings 64b (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1). Is stored up to 4 times, but in that case, among the vacant areas of the 4 hold areas (1st hold 1st to 4th areas), from the area with the smaller area number (1st to 4th) Data is stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the start winning to the special figure 1 winning opening 64b, which is older in time, is stored, and in the first reserved first area, the oldest special drawing 1 winning opening in time is stored. The data corresponding to the starting prize for 64b will be stored.

Further, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the special figure 2 winning opening 64c can be stored up to four times. Data is stored, but in that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 holding areas (2nd holding 1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the older the data corresponding to the start winning to the special figure 2 winning opening 64c is stored, and the second reserved first area stores the oldest special drawing 2 winning opening in terms of time. The data corresponding to the starting prize for 64c will be stored.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203f is composed of only one area. Similar to the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the reserved ball execution area 203f includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter C2. A jackpot type counter storage area 203f2 for storing values, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203f4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided. There is.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) is stored in the second hold first area of the second hold ball storage area 203e. In this case, the data stored in the second reserved first area is shifted to the respective areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, in the MPU 201, when the execution start timing of the variation effect is reached, the data is not stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the first of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. When the data is stored in the hold first area, the data stored in the first hold first area is shifted to the respective areas 203f1 to 203f4 of the hold ball execution area 203f.

Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f is referred to in the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 25), the jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data and the game state, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the lottery result is performed. And determine the stop type. In the special symbol display device 37, dynamic display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of the data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect has come, it determines whether or not the data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. As a result of the judgment, when it is determined that the data is stored in the second reserved first area, the random number value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 in the second reserved first area is used as the jackpot random number in the reserved ball execution area 203f. Shift to the counter storage area 203f1. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 in the second hold first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 in the second hold first area is changed. The stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 is shifted, and the random value of the variation type counter storage area 203e4 in the second hold first area is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the data shift to the hold ball execution area 203f is completed, the second hold ball first area becomes vacant, so that the data is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the second hold ball storage area 203e. ) Is packed into the area (1st to 3rd) that is one smaller than the area number. In the first embodiment, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the data is shifted only in the second reserved area (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (held).

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the second holding ball storage area 203e will be described. For example, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when the start determination of the fluctuation effect is made is "4", and the data is stored in all the areas (first to fourth) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. It is assumed that it has been done. In this state, when the data in the second hold first area is shifted to the hold ball execution area 203f and the second hold first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 has data in other areas (second to fourth). Is shifted to the area (1st to 3rd) which is one smaller than the area number. That is, the data in the second hold second area is shifted to the second hold first area, the data in the second hold third area is shifted to the second hold second area, and the data in the second hold fourth area is shifted. To the second hold third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when the start determination of the fluctuation effect is made is "2", the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the second reserved second area to the second reserved second area. Shifts to one area and ends the data shift. As described above, in the first embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed in the second hold area (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the second reserved area (second to fourth) may be configured to shift to an area in which the area number is one smaller. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the second holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the data is not stored in the second hold first area of the second hold ball storage area 203e when the execution start timing of the variation effect is reached, the MPU 201 then holds the first hold. It is determined whether or not data is stored in the first reserved first area of the sphere storage area 203d. As a result of the determination, if the data is stored in the first reserved first area, the random number value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved first area is used as the jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. Shift to. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the first hold first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first hold first area is changed. The stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 is shifted, and the random value of the variation type counter storage area 203d4 in the first hold first area is shifted to the variation type counter storage area 203f4.

Then, when the data shift to the hold ball execution area 203f is completed, the first hold ball first area becomes empty, so that the data is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the first hold ball storage area 203d. ) Is packed into the area (1st to 3rd) that is one smaller than the area number. In the first embodiment, in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the data is shifted only in the first reserved area (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (held).

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the first holding ball storage area 203d will be described. For example, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the fluctuation effect is made is "4", and the data is stored in all the areas (first to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. It is assumed that it has been done. In this state, when the data in the first hold first area is shifted to the hold ball execution area 203f and the first hold first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 has data in other areas (second to fourth). Is shifted to the area (1st to 3rd) which is one smaller than the area number. That is, the data in the first hold second area is shifted to the first hold first area, the data in the first hold third area is shifted to the first hold second area, and the data in the first hold fourth area is shifted. To the first hold third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a at the time when the start determination of the fluctuation effect is made is "2", the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the first reserved second area to the first reserved ball number. Shifts to one area and ends the data shift. As described above, in the first embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed for the first hold area (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first reserved area (second to fourth) may be configured to shift to an area having an area number smaller by one. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the first holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

Here, the details of the normal figure holding ball storage area 203j and the normal figure holding ball execution area 203k will be described. The normal figure holding ball storage area 203j and the normal figure holding ball execution area 203k are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a winning lottery for the normal symbol, a variable display setting of the normal symbol display device 83, and the like.

The normal figure holding ball storage area 203j is a memory for storing the counter C4 per normal figure acquired from the counter buffer 203c when the passage of the ball to the normal symbol gate 67 is detected. When the MPU 201 detects that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol gate 67 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), it acquires the value of the counter C4 per normal figure from the counter buffer 203c, and the normal figure hold ball. It is stored in the storage area 203j. The normal figure holding ball storage area 203j has four holding areas (normal figure) so that data (value of counter C4 per normal figure) corresponding to one holding ball of a normal symbol can be stored (held) up to four times. It has 1st to 4th areas on hold) (see FIG. 8).

The normal figure holding ball execution area 203k is a memory for storing data (value of random number counter C4 per normal figure) to be referred to in the process of winning lottery or variable display of a normal symbol being executed or starting execution. Is.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display of the normal symbol, the above-mentioned normal symbol holding ball is executed in order to execute processing such as a winning lottery of the normal symbol and a setting of the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. One of the data (value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure) stored in the storage area 203j is shifted to the normal figure holding ball execution area 203k. The shift in the first embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

As described above, the random number counter C4 per normal symbol used for the winning lottery of the ordinary symbol is used for setting the winning lottery of the ordinary symbol and the variable display of the ordinary symbol display device 83. The normal figure holding ball storage area 203j stores the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball passes through the normal symbol gate 67.

Further, as described above, the data (value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure) acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the normal symbol gate 67 is stored in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203j up to four times. In that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 holding areas (the first to fourth areas for holding the normal figure). That is, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the passage of the sphere to the old normal symbol gate 67 in time is stored, and in the first area for holding the normal symbol, the oldest normal symbol gate 67 in time is stored. The data corresponding to the passage of the sphere will be stored.

On the other hand, the normal figure holding ball execution area 203k is composed of only one area. Similar to the normal figure holding ball storage area 203j, the normal figure holding ball execution area 203k is provided with a random number counter storage area (not shown) for storing the value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure. ..

When the MPU 201 determines that the execution timing of the variable display of the normal symbol has come, the data stored in the normal figure hold ball storage area 203j of the normal figure hold ball storage area 203j is transferred to the normal figure hold ball execution area 203k. shift.

Then, the data shifted to the normal figure holding ball execution area 203k is referred to in the normal figure variation processing (see S111 in FIG. 22), and based on the reference data and the game state, a winning lottery is performed and a variable display is performed. Determine the content of. In the ordinary symbol display device 83, variable display is performed based on the determined content under the control of the main control device 110.

The details of the data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variable display of the normal symbol has come, the random number value of the random number counter storage area (not shown) of the normal figure hold first area of the normal figure hold ball storage area 203j. Is shifted to the random number counter storage area (not shown) per normal figure in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203k.

Then, when the data shift to the normal figure reservation ball execution area 203k is completed, the normal figure reservation first area becomes empty, so that the data is stored in each area (second to fourth) of the normal figure reservation ball storage area 203j. Shift processing is performed to pack the (held) data into the areas (first to third) where the area number is one smaller. In the first embodiment, the data is shifted only in the normal map holding area (1st to 4th) in which the data is stored (held) in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203j.

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the normal drawing holding ball storage area 203j will be described. For example, when the start determination of the variable display of the normal symbol is made, the number of reserved normal symbols is 4, and the data is stored in all the areas (1st to 4th) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203j. Suppose you are. In this state, when the data in the first area for holding the normal figure is shifted to the execution area 203k for holding the normal figure and the first area for holding the normal figure becomes empty, the MPU 201 moves to another area (second to fourth). Each of the data of is shifted to the area (1st to 3rd) which is one smaller than the area number. That is, the data in the second area for holding the normal figure is shifted to the first area for holding the normal figure, the data in the third area for holding the normal figure is shifted to the second area for holding the normal figure, and the data in the fourth area for holding the normal figure is shifted. Is shifted to the third area where the data is reserved.

Further, for example, if the number of hold of the normal symbol is 2 when the start determination of the variable display of the normal symbol is made, the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the normal symbol hold 2 area to the normal symbol hold 1 area. Shift and end the data shift. As described above, in the first embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed for the normal map holding areas (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the normal drawing holding area (second to fourth) may be configured to shift to an area in which the area number is one smaller. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the normal drawing holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description will be continued. The right probability variation effective flag 203g provided in the RAM 203 is a flag for indicating that the right probability variation area 73 is effectively set in the ON state. In the first embodiment, in a situation where the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to on, when a sphere is detected by the right probability variation area switch 73d, the probability variation transition flag 203i, which will be described later, is set to on, and after the jackpot ends. It is configured to generate a "probability fluctuation state".

The right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to off as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the probability variation area effective table 202 g (see FIG. 12) is set based on the jackpot type of the jackpot (see S410 in FIG. 26), and each round during the jackpot starts. Based on the probability variation region effective table 202g set by the jackpot, the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set on or off (see S435 in FIG. 28).

Specifically, the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to be on in the two rounds of the jackpot type "time saving A", "latent probability fluctuation B" and "time saving C", and the jackpot type "time saving B" and "latent probability fluctuation". It is set to on in the three rounds of "A" and "latent probability variation C", is set to on in the four rounds of the jackpot type "probability variation A", and is set to off in all rounds other than the above-mentioned rounds.

The left probability variation effective flag 203h is a flag for indicating that the left probability variation region 74 is effectively set in the on state. In the first embodiment, in a situation where the left probability change effective flag 203h is set to on, when a sphere is detected by the left probability change area switch 74d, the probability change transition flag 203i described later is set to on, and after the jackpot ends. It is configured to generate a "probability fluctuation state".

The left probability variation effective flag 203h is set to off as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the probability variation area effective table 202 g (see FIG. 12) is set based on the jackpot type of the jackpot (see S410 in FIG. 26), and each round during the jackpot starts. Based on the probability variation region effective table 202g set by the jackpot, the left probability variation effective flag 203h is set on or off (see S435 in FIG. 28).

Specifically, the left probability variation effective flag 203h is set to be on in the five rounds of the jackpot types "time saving A", "latent probability fluctuation B", and "time saving C", and the jackpot types "time saving B" and "latent probability fluctuation". It is set to on in the 6 rounds of "A" and "latent probability variation C", is set to on in the 9 rounds of the jackpot type "probability variation A", and is set to off in all rounds other than the above-mentioned rounds.

The probability change transition flag 203i is a flag for indicating that a “probability fluctuation state” occurs in the on state. The probability variation transition flag 203i is set to off as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, during the jackpot, if the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to ON, is the ball detected by the right probability variation area switch 73d (see S441: Yes → S442: Yes in FIG. 28), or the left probability variation. When the valid flag 203h is set to ON, the ball is detected by the left probability variation area switch 74d (see S444: Yes → S445: Yes in FIG. 28), so that the probability variation transition flag 203i in the off state is set to ON. (See S443 in FIG. 29). After that, in the jackpot end processing (see FIG. 30), when the "probability fluctuation state" is set by turning on the probability variation transition flag 203i, that is, when "100" is set in the value of the ST counter described later. (See S472 in FIG. 30), the probability variation transition flag 203i is set to off (see S473 in FIG. 30).

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is provided with a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a special symbol display device 37, a normal symbol display device 83, a normal symbol hold lamp 84, and a variable winning device 65. A large winning opening solenoid 65c for driving the opening and closing of the winning opening 65a to the front side with the lower side of the opening and closing plate 65b as an axis, and a right probability changing region solenoid 73b for opening and closing the right probability changing region opening and closing plate 73a of the right probability changing region 73. The left probabilistic region solenoid 74b for opening and closing the left probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74a of the left probabilistic region 74 and the other solenoid 209 for driving other driving devices (not shown) are connected, and the MPU 201 Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, the input / output port 205 is provided in the large winning opening 65a and is provided in the large winning opening switch 71 for detecting a ball winning in the large winning opening 65a, and is provided in the right side probability variation region 73 and is provided on the right side. A right probabilistic region switch 73d that detects a sphere passing through the probabilistic region 73, a left probabilistic region switch 74d provided in the left probabilistic region 74 and detecting a sphere passing through the left probabilistic region 74, and a group of switches (not shown). The other switch 208 including the sensor group and the other switch 208 and the RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later, are connected, and the MPU 201 is output from signals output from various switches 208 and from the RAM erase switch circuit 253. Various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 13 to 21, the detection mode of the sphere in each round of each jackpot type and the opening or closing status of each probability variation region 73, 74 (that is, the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a and the left probability variation) Opening or closing of the area opening / closing plate 74a, on / off of the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b, and the valid or invalid setting status of each probabilistic region 73,74 (that is, the right probabilistic valid flag 203g). And the left probability variation effective flag 203h on or off) and the transition status to the “probability fluctuation state” (that is, the probability variation transition flag 203i on or off) will be described.

First, with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14, a ball detection mode and the like in each round of the jackpot type “time saving A” will be described. FIG. 13 shows the operation timings of the large winning opening solenoid 65c, the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b, and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b in each round of the jackpot type “time saving A” of the first special symbol, and the large winning opening switch 71 and the right probabilistic variation region. It is a timing chart which shows typically the detection timing of the sphere by the switch 73d and the left probability change area switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right probability change effective flag 203g, the left probability change effective flag 203h, and the probability change transition flag 203i. Further, FIG. 14 shows the operation timings of the large winning opening solenoid 65c, the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b, and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b in the first and second rounds of the jackpot type “time saving A”, and the large winning opening switch 71, right. It is a timing chart schematically showing each time of the detection timing of the sphere in the probability variation region switch 73d and the left probability variation region switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag 203g, the left probability variation effective flag 203h, and the probability variation transition flag 203i. .. Hereinafter, while explaining each timing in FIG. 13, a detailed time will be described with reference to FIG. 14 as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the jackpot type “time saving A”, a jackpot game of a total of 7 rounds is executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening / closing plate 65b is opened. Then, a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, a maximum of "30 seconds" has elapsed from the opening (see Max t1 in FIG. 14. Max t1 <"30000 milliseconds (hereinafter, milliseconds may be abbreviated as" ms "). ”) Or, when one of the events of 10 balls detected by the big winning opening switch 71) is established, the big winning opening solenoid 65c is turned off, the opening / closing plate 65b is closed, and one round. Is finished.

Further, in the jackpot type "time saving A", the opening / closing pattern of the right side probability change area 73 and the left side probability change area 74 is "X1". Therefore, in the first round, when the ball of the first count is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, both the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are turned on by "60 ms" (see t2 in FIG. 14). . T2 = "60 ms".), It is configured so that it can be recognized whether or not the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, even when the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms", the right probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73a and the left probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74a The opening time is extremely short, and the ball is configured to be difficult to flow into the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation region 74 (hereinafter, the same applies to the first count ball in each round).

Further, when it is determined that the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a or the left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a is not normally driven when the first count ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, the right probability variation region 73 or the left side is determined. Since the probability variation area 74 may not be opened normally and an appropriate game value may not be given to the player, a predetermined error notification (for example, display of an error message such as "variable winning device 65 drive abnormality occurrence") is performed. It is configured as follows. Further, it is configured to stop the progress of the game while backing up the current game state according to a predetermined error notification. In this way, by stopping the progress of the game due to the error, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player suffers a disadvantage such that the "probability fluctuation state" is not given.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, only the right probability variation region solenoid 73b is turned on by "2000 ms" (see t3 in FIG. 14, t3 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required to reach the right side probability variation region 73 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1. 5 seconds ”. See t4 in FIG. 14. t4 <“2000 ms ”.). Therefore, the ball at the third count can flow into the open right probability variation region 73, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “time saving A” is “A”, and the right probability variation region 73 in the second round and the left probability variation region 74 in the fifth round are effectively set. To. Therefore, in the first round, all the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probabilistic variation effective flag 203g and the left probabilistic variation effective flag 203h are set to off. Therefore, even if the sphere passes through the right probabilistic region 73 and the sphere is detected by the right probabilistic region switch 73d in the first round, the right probabilistic region 73 is not effectively set, so that the probabilistic transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In the odd-numbered rounds of the jackpot type "time saving A" (that is, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, and 7 rounds), the driving modes of the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are the same as those in the first round.

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "time saving A", when the ball of the first count is detected by the big winning opening switch 71, the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are generated as in the first round. Both are turned on for "60 ms" (see t5 in FIG. 14, t5 = "60 ms"), and are configured to be recognizable as to whether or not the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, only the left probability variation region solenoid 74b is turned on by "2000 ms" (see t6 in FIG. 14, t6 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, it takes "2 seconds" or less (that is, "1.6 seconds") to reach the left side probability variation region 74 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71. See t7 in FIG. 14; t7 <“2000 ms”.). Therefore, the sphere of the third count can flow into the open left probability variation region 74, and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "time reduction A" is "A", only the right probability variation region 73 is valid in the second round, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to on. At the same time, the left probability change effective flag 203h is set to off. Therefore, in the second round, even if the ball passes through the left probability variation region 74 and the ball is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d, the left probability variation region 74 is not effectively set, so that the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In the even-numbered rounds (that is, the 4th round and the 6th round) of the jackpot type "time saving A", the driving modes of the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are the same as those in the second round.

Then, in the third and subsequent rounds of the jackpot type "time saving A", the open probability variation areas 73 and 74 are invalid, and the probability variation effective flags 203g and 203h corresponding to the probability variation area switches 73d and 74d in which the ball is detected are set. It is set to off. In particular, in the fifth round of the jackpot type "time saving A", only the left probability variation region 74 is valid, the left probability variation effective flag 203h is set to on, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to off. However, the ball is configured to flow into the right side probability variation region 73. Therefore, in the fifth round, even if the sphere passes through the right probabilistic region 73 and the sphere is detected by the right probabilistic region switch 73d, the right probabilistic region 73 is not effectively set, so the probabilistic transition flag. 203i is not turned on and remains off.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "time saving A", even if the sphere passes through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 and the sphere is detected by the probability variation region switches 73d and 74d, the probability variation region switches 73d and 74d that detect the sphere are used. Since the corresponding probabilistic regions 73 and 74 are not effectively set, the probabilistic transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 15 and 16, a ball detection mode and the like in each round of the jackpot type “latent probability variation A” will be described. FIG. 15 shows the operation timings of the large winning opening solenoid 65c, the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b, and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b in each round of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation A” of the first special symbol, and the large winning opening switch 71, right. It is a timing chart which schematically shows the detection timing of the sphere by the probability variation region switch 73d and the left probability variation region switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag 203g, the left probability variation effective flag 203h and the probability variation transition flag 203i. Further, FIG. 16 shows the operation timings of the large winning opening solenoid 65c, the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b, and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation A”, and the large winning opening switch 71. , A timing chart schematically showing each time of the detection timing of the sphere in the right probability variation region switch 73d and the left probability variation region switch 74d and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag 203g, the left probability variation effective flag 203h, and the probability variation transition flag 203i. Is. Hereinafter, the detailed time will be described with reference to FIG. 16 while explaining each timing in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation A”, a jackpot game of a total of 7 rounds is executed, and the jackpot solenoid 65c is turned on at the start of each round to open the opening / closing plate 65b. Then, 10 balls are detected by a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, a maximum of "30 seconds" has elapsed from the opening (see Max t1 in FIG. 16, Max t1 <"30000 ms"), or by the large winning opening switch 71. , One of the events) is established, the large winning opening solenoid 65c is turned off, the opening / closing plate 65b is closed, and one round is completed.

Further, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the opening / closing pattern of the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation region 74 is "X1" as in the jackpot type "time reduction A". Therefore, in the first round, when the ball of the first count is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, both the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t2 in FIG. 16). . T2 = "60 ms".), It is configured so that it can be recognized whether or not the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, only the right probability variation region solenoid 73b is turned on by "2000 ms" (see t3 in FIG. 16, t3 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required to reach the right side probability variation region 73 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1. 5 seconds ”. See t4 in FIG. 16 t4 <“2000 ms ”.). Therefore, the ball at the third count can flow into the open right probability variation region 73, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation A” is “B”, and the right probability variation region 73 in the third round and the left probability variation region 74 in the sixth round are valid. Set. Therefore, in the first round, all the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probabilistic variation effective flag 203g and the left probabilistic variation effective flag 203h are set to off. Therefore, even if the sphere passes through the right probabilistic region 73 and the sphere is detected by the right probabilistic region switch 73d in the first round, the right probabilistic region 73 is not effectively set, so that the probabilistic transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In the odd rounds (that is, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, and 7 rounds) of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the driving modes of the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are the same as those in the first round. ..

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", when the first count ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71, the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid are the same as in the first round. Both 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t5 in FIG. 16, t5 = "60 ms"), and the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are configured to be recognizable as to whether or not they can be driven normally. There is.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, only the left probability variation region solenoid 74b is turned on by "2000 ms" (see t6 in FIG. 16, t6 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, it takes "2 seconds" or less (that is, "1.6 seconds") to reach the left side probability variation region 74 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71. See t7 in FIG. 16; t7 <“2000 ms”.). Therefore, the sphere of the third count can flow into the open left probability variation region 74, and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation A” is “B”, and in the second round, all the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g and the right probability variation effective flag 203g and The left probability change effective flag 203h is set to off. Therefore, in the second round, even if the ball passes through the left probability variation region 74 and the ball is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d, the left probability variation region 74 is not effectively set, so that the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In the even-numbered rounds (that is, the 4th round and the 6th round) of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the driving modes of the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are the same as those in the second round.

Next, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot switch 71, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the same as in the first and second rounds. Both the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t8 in FIG. 16, t8 = "60 ms"), and it is possible to recognize whether or not the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. It is configured in.

Then, in the third round, when the ball of the third count is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, only the right probability variation region solenoid 73b is turned on by "2000 ms" (see t9 in FIG. 16, t9 = "2000 ms". .). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required to reach the right side probability variation region 73 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (that is, "1.5 seconds". See t10 in FIG. 16; t10 <“2000 ms”.). Therefore, the ball at the third count can flow into the open right probability variation region 73, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation A” is “B”, and in the third round, only the right probability variation region 73 is valid, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g is turned on. At the same time, the left probability change effective flag 203h is set to off. Therefore, in the third round, when the ball passes through the right probability variation region 73 and the ball is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d, the right probability variation region 73 is effectively set, so that the probability variation transition flag 203i is turned on. Is set to.

Further, in the sixth round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", only the left probability variation region 74 is valid, the left probability variation effective flag 203h is set to on, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to off. ing. Therefore, even if the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on in the third round, the ball passes through the left probability variation region 74 located on the downstream side of the right probability variation region 73 in the sixth round, and the left probability variation region switch 74d. When the sphere is detected by, the probability variation transition flag 203i is set to on.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the probability variation regions 73 and 74 corresponding to the probability variation region switches 73d and 74d that detected the ball in the third and sixth rounds are effectively set, so that the probability variation transition Flag 203i is set to on. Then, at the end of the jackpot, the "probability fluctuation state" is set with reference to the probability variation transition flag 203i.

With this configuration, even if the sphere passes through each probability variation region 73,74, if the probability variation region 73,74 is not effectively set internally, a "probability fluctuation state" occurs after the jackpot ends. Therefore, even when the player visually recognizes the passage of the ball through the probabilistic regions 73 and 74, it can be configured so that the occurrence of the "probability fluctuation state" is not confirmed after the end of the jackpot. In addition, the "latent probability variation effect mode" and the "time saving notification effect mode" or the "normal notification mode" are configured to have the same effect. With this configuration, even when the "latent probability variation effect mode" is executed, it is possible to determine whether the game is in the "probability fluctuation state", the "time reduction state", or the "normal game state". It is possible to create a game property that makes it difficult for a person to recognize and makes the player guess in which game state the game is being played, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a jackpot type that generates a "probability fluctuation state" is won after the jackpot ends, the ball can pass through the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set in a plurality of rounds in the jackpot. Has been done. Therefore, even if the ball cannot be passed through the probabilistic regions 73 and 74, which are effectively set, in one of the rounds in which the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 are effectively set, the other round. It is possible to pass the ball through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set in the round. Therefore, sudden troubles (for example, game abnormalities such as launch abnormalities, poor physical condition of the player, etc.) hinder the passage of the ball to the probability variation areas 73 and 74 in one of the effectively set rounds. Even in the event of an unforeseen situation, the player will not be able to pass the ball through the probabilistic areas 73 and 74 that are effectively set in the other round that is set to be valid. It is possible to realize a comfortable game without suffering a profit.

Further, whether or not the right probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73a and the left probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74a can be opened by driving the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b to the extent that the ball does not flow in the first count of each round. Therefore, it is possible to grasp at an early stage the situation in which the probable change areas 73 and 74 are not opened due to an abnormality or the like.

In addition, regarding a plurality of rounds in which the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are effectively set when the jackpot type that generates the "probability fluctuation state" is won after the jackpot ends, the round to which the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are effectively set. In the above, the right side probability variation region 73 located on the upstream side in the large winning opening 65a is configured to be effectively set. With this configuration, if an abnormality such as ball clogging occurs in the large winning opening 65a, in particular, a ball clogging or the like occurs on the downstream side of the right side probability variation region 73 and on the upstream side of the left side probability variation region 74. Even if an abnormality occurs, the right-side probabilistic region 73 located on the upstream side of the large winning opening 65a can be effectively set first, and the ball can flow into the right-side probabilistic region 73. It is possible to easily grant the right to the player.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, a ball detection mode and the like in each round of the jackpot type “time saving B” will be described. FIG. 17 shows the operation timings of the large winning opening solenoid 65c, the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b, and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b in each round of the jackpot type “time saving B” of the first special symbol, and the large winning opening switch 71 and the right probabilistic variation region. It is a timing chart which shows typically the detection timing of the sphere by the switch 73d and the left probability change area switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right probability change effective flag 203g, the left probability change effective flag 203h, and the probability change transition flag 203i.

As shown in FIG. 17, in the jackpot type “time saving B”, a jackpot game of a total of 7 rounds is executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening / closing plate 65b is opened. Then, when a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, either "30 seconds" has passed since the opening or 10 balls are detected by the large winning opening switch 71) is satisfied, the large winning opening solenoid is satisfied. The 65c is turned off, the opening / closing plate 65b is closed, and one round ends.

Further, in the jackpot type "time saving B", since the opening / closing pattern of the right side probability variation area 73 and the left side probability variation area 74 is "X2", the first count ball was detected by the large winning opening switch 71 in the first round. In this case, both the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms", and it is possible to recognize whether or not the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. ..

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, only the left probability variation region solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required to reach the left side probability variation region 74 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1. 6 seconds "). Therefore, the sphere of the third count can flow into the open left probability variation region 74, and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “time saving B” is “B”, and the right probability variation region 73 in the third round and the left probability variation region 74 in the sixth round are effectively set. To. Therefore, in the first round, all the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probabilistic variation effective flag 203g and the left probabilistic variation effective flag 203h are set to off. Therefore, even if the sphere passes through the left probability variation region 74 and the sphere is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d in the first round, the left probability variation region 74 is not effectively set, so that the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In the odd-numbered rounds of the jackpot type "time saving B" (that is, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, and 7 rounds), the driving modes of the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are the same as those in the first round.

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "time saving B", when the ball of the first count is detected by the big winning opening switch 71, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are generated as in the first round. Both are turned on for "60 ms", and it is configured so that it can be recognized whether or not the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, only the right probability variation region solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required to reach the right side probability variation region 73 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1. 5 seconds "). Therefore, the ball at the third count can flow into the open right probability variation region 73, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "time reduction B" is "B", and in the second round, all the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g and the left probability variation are invalid. The valid flag 203h is set to off. Therefore, in the second round, even if the sphere passes through the right probabilistic region 73 and the sphere is detected by the right probabilistic region switch 73d, the right probabilistic region 73 is not effectively set, so that the probabilistic transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In the even-numbered rounds (that is, 4 rounds and 6 rounds) of the jackpot type "time saving B", the driving modes of the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are the same as those in the second round.

Next, in the third round of the jackpot type "time saving B", when the ball of the first count is detected by the big winning opening switch 71, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation are the same as in the first and second rounds. Both of the region solenoids 74b are turned on for "60 ms", and it is possible to recognize whether or not the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, only the left probability variation region solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required to reach the left side probability variation region 74 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (that is, "1.6 seconds"). Is. Therefore, the sphere of the third count can flow into the open left probability variation region 74, and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "time reduction B" is "B", only the right probability variation region 73 is valid in the third round, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to on. At the same time, the left probability change effective flag 203h is set to off. Therefore, in the third round, even if the ball passes through the left probability variation region 74 and the ball is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d, the left probability variation region 74 is not effectively set, so the probability variation transition flag. 203i is not turned on and remains off.

Then, in the fourth and subsequent rounds of the jackpot type "time saving B", the open probability variation regions 73 and 74 are invalid, and the probability variation effective flags 203g and 203h corresponding to the probability variation region switches 73d and 74d in which the ball is detected are set. It is set to off. In particular, in the sixth round of the jackpot type "time saving B", only the left probability variation region 74 is valid, the left probability variation effective flag 203h is set to on, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to off. However, the ball is configured to flow into the right side probability variation region 73. Therefore, in the sixth round, even if the sphere passes through the right probabilistic region 73 and the sphere is detected by the right probabilistic region switch 73d, the right probabilistic region 73 is not effectively set, so that the probabilistic transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "time saving B", even if the sphere passes through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 and the sphere is detected by the probability variation region switches 73d and 74d, the probability variation region switches 73d and 74d that detect the sphere are used. Since the corresponding probability variation areas 73 and 74 are not effectively set, the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off as in the jackpot type “time saving A”.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, a ball detection mode and the like in each round of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation B” will be described. FIG. 18 shows the operation timings of the large winning opening solenoid 65c, the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b, and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b in each round of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation B” of the first special symbol, and the large winning opening switch 71, right. It is a timing chart which schematically shows the detection timing of the sphere by the probability variation region switch 73d and the left probability variation region switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag 203g, the left probability variation effective flag 203h and the probability variation transition flag 203i.

As shown in FIG. 18, in the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation B”, a jackpot game of a total of 7 rounds is executed, and the jackpot solenoid 65c is turned on at the start of each round to open the opening / closing plate 65b. Then, when a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, either "30 seconds" has passed since the opening or 10 balls are detected by the large winning opening switch 71) is satisfied, the large winning opening solenoid is satisfied. The 65c is turned off, the opening / closing plate 65b is closed, and one round ends.

Further, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", since the opening / closing pattern of the right side probability variation area 73 and the left side probability variation area 74 is "X2", the first count ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71 in the first round. When this is done, both the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms", and it is possible to recognize whether or not the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. ing.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, only the left probability variation region solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required to reach the left side probability variation region 74 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1. 6 seconds "). Therefore, the sphere of the third count can flow into the open left probability variation region 74, and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation B” is “A”, and the right probability variation region 73 in the second round and the left probability variation region 74 in the fifth round are valid. Set. Therefore, in the first round, all the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probabilistic variation effective flag 203g and the left probabilistic variation effective flag 203h are set to off. Therefore, even if the sphere passes through the left probability variation region 74 and the sphere is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d in the first round, the left probability variation region 74 is not effectively set, so that the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In the odd rounds (that is, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, and 7 rounds) of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", the driving modes of the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are the same as those in the first round. ..

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", when the first count ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71, the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid are the same as in the first round. Both 74b are turned on for "60 ms", and it is possible to recognize whether or not the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, only the right probability variation region solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required to reach the right side probability variation region 73 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1. 5 seconds "). Therefore, the ball at the third count can flow into the open right probability variation region 73, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation B” is “A”, and in the second round, only the right probability variation region 73 is valid, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g is turned on. At the same time, the left probability change effective flag 203h is set to off. Therefore, in the second round, when the ball passes through the right probability variation region 73 and the ball is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d, the right probability variation region 73 is effectively set, so that the probability variation transition flag 203i is turned on. Is set to.

Further, in the fifth round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", only the left probability variation region 74 is valid, the left probability variation effective flag 203h is set to on, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to off. ing. Therefore, even if the probability change transition flag 203i is not turned on in the second round, the ball passes through the left probability change area 74 in the fifth round and the ball is detected by the left probability change area switch 74d, so that the probability change The transition flag 203i is set to on.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation B", when the ball passes through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 and the ball is detected by the probability variation region switches 73d and 74d, the ball is detected in the second and fifth rounds. Since the probability variation regions 73 and 74 corresponding to the probability variation region switches 73d and 74d are effectively set, the probability variation transition flag 203i is set to on as in the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation A”. Then, at the end of the jackpot, the "probability fluctuation state" is set with reference to the probability variation transition flag 203i.

Next, with reference to FIG. 19, a ball detection mode and the like in each round of the jackpot type “probability variation A” will be described. FIG. 19 shows the operation timings of the large winning opening solenoid 65c, the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b, and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b in each round of the jackpot type “probability fluctuation A” of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the large winning opening. A timing chart schematically showing the detection timing of the sphere in the switch 71, the right probability variation region switch 73d and the left probability variation region switch 74d, and the setting timings of the right probability variation effective flag 203g, the left probability variation effective flag 203h and the probability variation transition flag 203i. is there.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the jackpot type “probability fluctuation A”, a jackpot game of a total of 15 rounds is executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening / closing plate 65b is opened. Then, when a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, either "30 seconds" has passed since the opening or 10 balls are detected by the large winning opening switch 71) is satisfied, the large winning opening solenoid is satisfied. The 65c is turned off, the opening / closing plate 65b is closed, and one round ends.

Further, in the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", since the opening / closing pattern of the right side probability variation area 73 and the left side probability variation area 74 is "Y1", the first count ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71 in the first round. In this case, both the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms", and it is possible to recognize whether or not the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. There is.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, only the left probability variation region solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required to reach the left side probability variation region 74 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1. 6 seconds "). Therefore, the sphere of the third count can flow into the open left probability variation region 74, and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" is "C", and the right probability variation region 73 in the fourth round and the left probability variation region 74 in the ninth round are effectively set. Will be done. Therefore, in the first round, all the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probabilistic variation effective flag 203g and the left probabilistic variation effective flag 203h are set to off. Therefore, even if the sphere passes through the left probability variation region 74 and the sphere is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d in the first round, the left probability variation region 74 is not effectively set, so that the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In the odd rounds of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" (that is, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds, 9 rounds, 11 rounds, 13 rounds, and 15 rounds), the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b The driving mode is the same as that of the first round.

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", when the ball of the first count is detected by the big winning opening switch 71, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are the same as in the first round. Are both turned on for "60 ms" so that it can be recognized whether or not the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, only the right probability variation region solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required to reach the right side probability variation region 73 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (that is, "1.5 seconds"). Is. Therefore, the ball at the third count can flow into the open right probability variation region 73, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" is "C", and in the second round, all the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g and the left The probability variation valid flag 203h is set to off. Therefore, in the second round, even if the sphere passes through the right probabilistic region 73 and the sphere is detected by the right probabilistic region switch 73d, the right probabilistic region 73 is not effectively set, so that the probabilistic transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In the even-numbered rounds of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" (that is, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 12 rounds, and 14 rounds), the driving modes of the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are It is equivalent to the second round.

Next, in the third round of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", when the ball of the first count is detected by the jackpot switch 71, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left as in the first and second rounds. Both the probabilistic region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms", and it is possible to recognize whether or not the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, only the left probability variation region solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, it takes "2 seconds" or less (that is, "1.6 seconds") to reach the left side probability variation region 74 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71. ). Therefore, the sphere of the third count can flow into the open left probability variation region 74, and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" is "C", and in the third round, all the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g and the left The probability variation valid flag 203h is set to off. Therefore, in the third round, even if the ball passes through the left probability variation region 74 and the ball is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d, the left probability variation region 74 is not effectively set, so the probability variation transition flag. 203i is not turned on and remains off.

Next, in the 4th round of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", when the ball of the 1st count is detected by the big winning opening switch 71, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left as in the 1st to 3rd rounds. Both the probabilistic region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms", and it is possible to recognize whether or not the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, in the fourth round, when the ball of the third count is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, only the right probability variation region solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required to reach the right side probability variation region 73 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (that is, "1.6 seconds"). Is. Therefore, the ball at the third count can flow into the open right probability variation region 73, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" is "C", only the right probability variation region 73 is valid in the fourth round, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to ON. At the same time, the left probability variation effective flag 203h is set to off. Therefore, in the fourth round, when the ball passes through the right probability variation region 73 and the ball is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d, the right probability variation region 73 is effectively set, so that the probability variation transition flag 203i is turned on. Is set to.

Further, in the ninth round of the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", only the left probability variation region 74 is valid, the left probability variation effective flag 203h is set to on, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to off. There is. Therefore, even if the probability change transition flag 203i is not turned on in the 4th round, the ball passes through the left probability change area 74 in the 9th round and the ball is detected by the left probability change area switch 74d, so that the probability change The migration flag 203i is set to on.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", when the ball passes through the probability variation areas 73 and 74 and the ball is detected by the probability variation area switches 73d and 74d, the ball is detected in the 4th and 9th rounds. Since the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 corresponding to the probabilistic region switches 73d and 74d are effectively set, the probabilistic transition flag 203i is set to on. Then, at the end of the jackpot, the "probability fluctuation state" is set with reference to the probability variation transition flag 203i.

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, a ball detection mode and the like in each round of the jackpot type “time saving C” will be described. FIG. 20 shows the operation timings of the large winning opening solenoid 65c, the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b, and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b in each round of the jackpot type “time saving C” of the second special symbol, and the large winning opening switch 71 and the right probabilistic variation region. It is a timing chart which shows typically the detection timing of the sphere by the switch 73d and the left probability change area switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right probability change effective flag 203g, the left probability change effective flag 203h, and the probability change transition flag 203i.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the jackpot type “time saving C”, a jackpot game of a total of 15 rounds is executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening / closing plate 65b is opened. Then, when a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, either "30 seconds" has passed since the opening or 10 balls are detected by the large winning opening switch 71) is satisfied, the large winning opening solenoid is satisfied. The 65c is turned off, the opening / closing plate 65b is closed, and one round ends.

Further, in the jackpot type "time saving C", since the opening / closing pattern of the right side probability variation area 73 and the left side probability variation area 74 is "Y2", the ball of the first count was detected by the big winning opening switch 71 in the first round. In this case, both the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms", and it is possible to recognize whether or not the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. ..

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, only the right probability variation region solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required to reach the right side probability variation region 73 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1. 5 seconds "). Therefore, the ball at the third count can flow into the open right probability variation region 73, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “time saving C” is “A”, and the right probability variation region 73 in the second round and the left probability variation region 74 in the fifth round are effectively set. To. Therefore, in the first round, all the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probabilistic variation effective flag 203g and the left probabilistic variation effective flag 203h are set to off. Therefore, even if the sphere passes through the right probabilistic region 73 and the sphere is detected by the right probabilistic region switch 73d in the first round, the right probabilistic region 73 is not effectively set, so that the probabilistic transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In addition, in the odd number rounds of the jackpot type "time saving C" (that is, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds, 9 rounds, 11 rounds, 13 rounds and 15 rounds), the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are driven. The aspect is the same as that of the first round.

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "time saving C", when the ball of the first count is detected by the big winning opening switch 71, the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are generated as in the first round. Both are turned on for "60 ms", and it is configured so that it can be recognized whether or not the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, only the left probability variation region solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required to reach the left side probability variation region 74 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (that is, "1.6 seconds"). Is. Therefore, the sphere of the third count can flow into the open left probability variation region 74, and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “time saving C” is “A”, only the right probability variation region 73 is valid in the second round, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to on. At the same time, the left probability change effective flag 203h is set to off. Therefore, in the second round, even if the ball passes through the left probability variation region 74 and the ball is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d, the left probability variation region 74 is not effectively set, so that the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In the even-numbered rounds of the jackpot type "time saving C" (that is, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 12 rounds, and 14 rounds), the driving modes of the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are different. Equivalent to the second round.

Then, in the third and subsequent rounds of the jackpot type "time saving C", the open probability variation regions 73 and 74 are invalid, and the probability variation effective flags 203g and 203h corresponding to the probability variation region switches 73d and 74d in which the ball is detected are set. It is set to off. In particular, in the fifth round of the jackpot type "time saving C", only the left probability variation region 74 is valid, the left probability variation effective flag 203h is set to on, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to off. However, the ball is configured to flow into the right side probability variation region 73. Therefore, in the fifth round, even if the sphere passes through the right probabilistic region 73 and the sphere is detected by the right probabilistic region switch 73d, the right probabilistic region 73 is not effectively set, so the probabilistic transition flag. 203i is not turned on and remains off.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "time saving C", even when the sphere passes through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 and the sphere is detected by the probability variation region switches 73d and 74d, the probability variation region switches 73d and 74d that detect the sphere are used. Since the corresponding probability change areas 73 and 74 are not effectively set, the probability change transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off as in the jackpot types “time saving A” and “time saving B”.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a ball detection mode and the like in each round of the jackpot type “latent probability variation C” will be described. FIG. 21 shows the operation timings of the large winning opening solenoid 65c, the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b, and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b in each round of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation C” of the second special symbol, and the large winning opening switch 71, right. It is a timing chart which schematically shows the detection timing of the sphere by the probability variation region switch 73d and the left probability variation region switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag 203g, the left probability variation effective flag 203h and the probability variation transition flag 203i.

As shown in FIG. 21, in the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation C”, a jackpot game of a total of 15 rounds is executed, and at the start of each round, the jackpot solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening / closing plate 65b is opened. Then, when a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, either "30 seconds" has passed since the opening or 10 balls are detected by the large winning opening switch 71) is satisfied, the large winning opening solenoid is satisfied. The 65c is turned off, the opening / closing plate 65b is closed, and one round ends.

Further, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", the opening / closing pattern of the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation region 74 is "Y2" as in the jackpot type "time reduction C", so that the jackpot in the first round When the first count ball is detected by the switch 71, both the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms", and the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are normally driven. It is configured so that it can be recognized whether it is possible or not.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, only the right probability variation region solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required to reach the right side probability variation region 73 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the first embodiment, "1. 5 seconds "). Therefore, the ball at the third count can flow into the open right probability variation region 73, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation C” is “B”, and the right probability variation region 73 in the third round and the left probability variation region 74 in the sixth round are valid. Set. Therefore, in the first round, all the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probabilistic variation effective flag 203g and the left probabilistic variation effective flag 203h are set to off. Therefore, even if the sphere passes through the right probabilistic region 73 and the sphere is detected by the right probabilistic region switch 73d in the first round, the right probabilistic region 73 is not effectively set, so that the probabilistic transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In the odd rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C" (that is, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds, 9 rounds, 11 rounds, 13 rounds, and 15 rounds), the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b The driving mode of the above is the same as that of the first round.

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", when the first count ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71, the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid are the same as in the first round. Both 74b are turned on for "60 ms", and it is possible to recognize whether or not the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, only the left probability variation region solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required to reach the left side probability variation region 74 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (that is, "1.6 seconds"). Is. Therefore, the sphere of the third count can flow into the open left probability variation region 74, and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latent probability variation C” is “B”, and in the second round, all the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g and the right probability variation effective flag 203g and The left probability change effective flag 203h is set to off. Therefore, in the second round, even if the ball passes through the left probability variation region 74 and the ball is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d, the left probability variation region 74 is not effectively set, so that the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In the even-numbered rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C" (that is, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 12 rounds, and 14 rounds), the driving modes of the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b. Is equivalent to the second round.

Next, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot switch 71, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the same as in the first and second rounds. Both the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms", and it is possible to recognize whether or not the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, in the third round, when the ball of the third count is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, only the right probability variation region solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time required to reach the right side probability variation region 73 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (that is, "1.5 seconds"). Is. Therefore, the ball at the third count can flow into the open right probability variation region 73, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation C” is “B”, and in the third round, only the right probability variation region 73 is valid, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g is turned on. At the same time, the left probability change effective flag 203h is set to off. Therefore, in the third round, when the ball passes through the right probability variation region 73 and the ball is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d, the right probability variation region 73 is effectively set, so that the probability variation transition flag 203i is turned on. Is set to.

Further, in the sixth round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", only the left probability variation region 74 is valid, the left probability variation effective flag 203h is set to on, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to off. ing. Therefore, even if the probability change transition flag 203i is not turned on in the third round, the ball passes through the left probability change area 74 in the sixth round and the ball is detected by the left probability change area switch 74d, so that the probability change The migration flag 203i is set to on.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", when the ball passes through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 and the ball is detected by the probability variation region switches 73d and 74d, the ball is detected in the third and sixth rounds. Since the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 corresponding to the probabilistic region switches 73d and 74d are effectively set, the probabilistic transition flag 203i is set to ON. Then, at the end of the jackpot, the "probability fluctuation state" is set with reference to the probability variation transition flag 203i.

In this way, the jackpot types (that is, the jackpot types "time saving A" and "latent probability fluctuation A", the jackpot types "time saving B" and "latent probability fluctuation B", and the jackpot type "time saving C" have the same opening and closing patterns. ”And“ latent probability fluctuation C ”), respectively, so that the jackpot type cannot be determined only by the opening / closing patterns of the respective probability variation regions 73 and 74, so that the player can recognize which jackpot type has been won. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a playability that makes it difficult (impossible) to make the player guess in which game state the game is being played.

On the other hand, the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" that notifies that it is in the "probability fluctuation state" has a unique opening / closing pattern (that is, "Y1") different from other jackpot types, and the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation region 73. The opening and closing of 74 is controlled. Therefore, the player can recognize that the "probability fluctuation state" is given by recognizing the opening / closing patterns of the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation region 74.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting the paid out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. The prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. is there. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, a variation effect, and continuous operation. It controls the setting of the display mode of the effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 such as the advance notice effect.

The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. In the first embodiment, the command is configured to be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in only one direction, and the command cannot be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device 110. ing. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured so that commands can be transmitted and received to each other.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be changed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the rear image such as the "super reach" effect mode, and the display control device 114 is displayed on the display control device 114 based on the pressing of the frame button 22. Instruct the display device 81 to display.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 2). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31). The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 22 to 33. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process (see FIG. 32) that is started when the power is turned on, a main process (see FIG. 33) that is executed after the start-up process, and a periodic (first embodiment). Then, there are a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) that is activated in a “4 ms” cycle) and an NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31) that is activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) and the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31) are first described, and then the start-up process (see FIG. 32) and the main process (see FIG. 33) are described. Will be explained.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process that is repeatedly executed every "4 milliseconds". When the MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt process, various processes to be executed periodically are performed.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In the timer interrupt process and the main process, commands and the like to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, and the like are generated based on various processes and temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. .. In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side.

For example, the hold ball number command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 23), which will be described later, is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, confirmation command, etc. set in the special figure fluctuation processing (see FIG. 24) and the fluctuation start processing (FIG. 25), which is one of the special figure fluctuation processing, are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Send. In addition, a ball launch signal set when launching a ball in the launch control process of S112, which will be described later, is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the jackpot process for executing the process at the time of the jackpot based on the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed (S102). S103). The details of this jackpot process (S103) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the ordinary electric service control process for executing the drive control process for the rotating plate of the ordinary electric accessory 67a is executed (S104). Briefly, the normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display of the normal symbol on the condition that the sphere has passed through the normal symbol gate 67, and as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol, the winning symbol of the normal symbol (for example, When the "○" symbol) appears and the hit state is reached, the rotating plate of the ordinary electric accessory 67a is openly driven for a predetermined time.

Next, the reading process of various winning switches is executed (S105). That is, the state of the large winning opening switch 71, the right probability change area switch 73d, the left probability change area switch 74d, and various switches 208 connected to the main control device 110 is read, and the state of the switch 208 is determined and detected. Save information (winning detection information). Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the prize detection information is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S106). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“899” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0”. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“99” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0” and the second initial value is cleared. The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

Further, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the normal figure per random number counter C4 are updated (S107). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the random number counter C4 per normal figure are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (first implementation). In the form, when it reaches "899", "99", "99", "199", "99"), respectively, it is cleared to "0", respectively. When the jackpot random number counter C1 or the random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the jackpot random number counter C1 or the random number per normal figure. It is read as the initial value of the counter C4, and the initial value is set in the jackpot random number counter C1 or the random number counter C4 per normal figure. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

Next, the start winning process accompanying the winning of the special figure 1 winning opening 64b or the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c is executed (S108), and then the success or failure of the ordinary symbol and the success or failure of the ordinary symbol as the ball passes through the ordinary symbol gate 67 are executed. The gate passing process for determining the content of the variable display and the like is executed (S109). The details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG. 23.

After the gate passage process (S109) is executed, the process for dynamically displaying the special symbol by the special symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 based on the process content of the start winning process (S108) is performed. The special figure variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol is executed (S110). The details of the special figure variation processing (S110) will be described later with reference to FIG. 24.

Next, a normal symbol variation process is executed (S111), which executes a process for variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 83 based on the processing content of the gate passage process (S109). In the normal figure variation processing (S111), the lottery probability of the ordinary symbol is performed with either a high probability (for example, 9/10) or a low probability (1/10) according to the value of the time reduction counter described later.

After executing the normal figure variation processing (S111), the firing control processing is executed (S112), and other processing to be executed periodically is executed (S113) to end the timer interrupt processing. The launch control process (S112) is provided on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining whether to turn on / off the firing of a ball. Then, when the ball launch is on, the information of the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the process of S101 of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Next, the start winning process (S108), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S108). In the start winning process, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the special figure 1 second winning opening 64b or the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c, and if there is a winning, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are won. The process of storing (holding) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e corresponding to the winning openings 64b and 64c is executed. In addition, a process for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

In this start winning process (S108), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the special figure 1 winning opening 64b (S201). Here, the output signal of the special figure 1 entry port switch (not shown) for detecting the entry (winning) into the special figure 1 first winning opening 64b, which is read in the switch reading process (see S105 in FIG. 22). Based on the above, the ball entering the special figure 1 winning opening 64b is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 22).

When it is determined that the ball has won the special figure 1 winning opening 64b (there was a starting prize) (S201: Yes), then the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (held in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the operation-holding ball number N1) of the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the first embodiment) (S202). Then, even if there is a prize in the special figure 1 winning opening 64b, if the number of operation pending balls N1 <4 (S202: No), this start winning process (S108) is terminated and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). ) Return.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls N1 <4 (S202: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (number of pending balls N1) is added by 1 (S203). Then, since this time, the prize is won in the special figure 1 winning opening 64b corresponding to the first special symbol, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination of each random number values C1 to C3 and CS1 (S204). The process shifts to S209.

In the process of S201, when it is determined that the ball has not won the special figure 1 winning opening 64b (S201: No), then whether or not the ball has won the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c (starting winning) is determined. Determine (S205). Here, as in the case of the special figure 1 winning opening 64b, the special drawing 2 entry opening switch (winning) for detecting the entry (winning) into the special figure 2 winning opening 64c read in the switch reading process (see S105 in FIG. 22). Based on the output signal (not shown), the ball entering the special figure 2 winning opening 64c is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 22).

When it is determined that the ball has won the special figure 2 winning opening 64c (there was a starting prize) (S205: Yes), then the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (held in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the operation holding ball number N2) of the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the first embodiment) (S206). Then, whether or not there is a prize in the special figure 2 winning opening 64c (S205: No), or even if there is a winning in the special figure 2 winning opening 64c, the number of pending balls N2 <4 (S206: No). , The start winning process (S108) is completed, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls N2 <4 (S206: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (number of reserved balls N2) is added by 1 (S207). Then, since the prize is entered in the special figure 2 winning opening 64c corresponding to the second special symbol this time, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination of each random number values C1 to C3 and CS1 (S208). The process shifts to S209.

In the processing of S209, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 8) and set as the storage destination in S204 or S208. Of the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the first reserved ball storage area 203e provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e, or the second reserved ball storage area 203d, the first reserved ball storage area 203d When specified as the storage destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3, and the variation type counter in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved ball counter 203a. Each is held (stored) in the storage area 203d4 (S209). When the second reserved ball storage area 203e is designated as the storage destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 and the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved ball counter 203b are stopped. It is held (stored) in the pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 and the variation type counter storage area 203e4, respectively (S209).

Specifically, for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination in the processing of S204 based on the winning of the special figure 1 winning opening 64b, and the first reserved ball after addition by the processing of S203. If the value of the number counter 203a is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in each storage area of the first holding first area. If the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "2", the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "3" in each storage area of the first reserved second area. If there is, counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the first reserved third area, and if the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "4", counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the first reserved fourth area. , The value of CS1 is reserved.

Further, for example, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination in the processing of S208 based on the winning of the special figure 2 winning opening 64c, and the second reserved ball number counter 203b after the addition by the processing of S207. If the value of is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are held in each storage area of the second hold first area. If the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "2", the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "3" in each storage area of the second reserved second area. If there is, counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the second reserved third area, and if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "4", counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the second reserved fourth area. , The value of CS1 is reserved.

Next, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of operating reserved balls N1 or the number of operating reserved balls N2) after the addition by the processing of S203 or S207, and the first by the processing of S209. Voice the hold ball number command including each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 stored (held) in the hold ball storage area 203d or the second hold ball storage area 203e. In order to transmit to the lamp control device 113, the hold ball number command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S210). As a result, the hold ball number command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) to be executed next. When the processing of S210 is completed, the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22).

As the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the hold ball number command in the processing of S210, the values themselves read from the counter buffer 203c in the processing of S209 may be used, or the first hold in the processing of S209. The value stored (held) in the ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e may be read out and used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24, a special figure variation process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing this special figure variation processing (S110). This special symbol variation processing (S110) controls the dynamic display in the special symbol display device 37 and the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81.

In this special figure variation processing (S110), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit (S301). The jackpot includes during the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, and during a predetermined time after the jackpot game ends. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S301: Yes), the special figure variation process (S110) is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

If it is not a big hit (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is in the dynamic display (S302), and the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is in the dynamic display. If not (S302: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 is stopped (S303). As a result, if a predetermined time has not elapsed after the dynamic display is stopped (S303: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). As a result, the stop symbol in the dynamic display (variation effect) is displayed on the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol. ..

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S303, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display is stopped (S303: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b (the second special reserved in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the operation-holding ball number N2) of the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the symbol is larger than "0" (S304). As a result, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operating reserved ball number N2) is not "0" (S304: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the second special symbol. First, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operating reserved ball number N2) is subtracted by 1 (S305). This is because the variable start processing (S310), which will be described later, starts the execution of the dynamic display (variable effect) of one of the reserved dynamic displays (variable effect) related to the second special symbol. This is because the number of reserved balls related to the special symbol is reduced by one.

Next, the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e is shifted (S306). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e toward the reserved ball execution area 203f, and is the second reserved ball storage area 203e. 1 area → Hold ball execution area 203f, 2nd hold 2nd area → 2nd hold 1st area, 2nd hold 3rd area → 2nd hold 2nd area, 2nd hold 4th area → 2nd hold 3rd area The data in each area is shifted, and so on.

On the other hand, in the process of S304, when it is determined that the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operating reserved ball number N2) is "0" (S304: No), then the first reserved ball number counter 203a It is determined whether or not the value of (the number of operation-holding balls N1 of the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the first special symbol held in the main control device 110) is larger than "0" (S307). As a result, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operating reserved ball number N1) is not "0" (S307: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the first special symbol. First, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operating reserved ball number N1) is subtracted by 1 (S308). This is because the variable start processing (S310), which will be described later, starts the execution of the dynamic display (variable effect) of one of the reserved dynamic displays (variable effect) related to the first special symbol. This is because the number is reduced by one.

Next, the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S309). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first hold first to fourth areas of the first hold ball storage area 203d toward the hold ball execution area 203f, and is the first hold first. 1 area → Hold ball execution area 203f, 1st hold 2nd area → 1st hold 1st area, 1st hold 3rd area → 1st hold 2nd area, 1st hold 4th area → 1st hold 3rd area The data in each area is shifted, and so on.

After the data shift processing of S306 or S309, the fluctuation start processing for the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the hold ball execution area 203f by the data shift processing. Then, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). The fluctuation start processing (S310) will be described later with reference to FIG. 25.

In the process of S307, when it is determined that the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operating reserved ball number N1) is "0" (S307: No), a demonstration effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. It is determined whether or not it is in the state of being in the state, that is, whether or not it is in the demonstration (S311). In this determination process, after transmitting a demo command to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operation holding ball number N1 or operation). It is determined that the demonstration is in progress until it is determined that any value of the number of reserved balls N2) is larger than "0".

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S311: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S312), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). On the other hand, if it is determined that the demo is in progress (S311: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22) as it is. The demo command set in the process of S312 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 22). It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 demos to the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demo command. Control to display the effect.

Here, the demo command is set when, as described above, there is no reserved ball when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, if the fluctuation effect is not started even after a lapse of a predetermined time after the fluctuation is stopped, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined in the process of S311 that the demo is not in progress (S311: No), a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped is further performed. After the execution and the fluctuation stop, the process of S312 may be executed and the demo command may be set when the second predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, when there is no reserved ball after the fluctuation is stopped, the player can be shown the stopped symbol of the stopped fluctuation effect for a relatively long time without starting the demonstration effect immediately.

In the process of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is being dynamically displayed (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the dynamic display time (variation time) has elapsed (S313). ). The display time during dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this dynamic display time. If (variation time) has not elapsed (S313: No), the display of the special symbol display device 37 is updated (S314), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

In the first embodiment, in the second LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, for example, the display mode of the second LED group 37b is set from the start of the dynamic display until the fluctuation time elapses.

On the other hand, if the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display in the special symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S313: Yes), the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol. (S315). The stop symbol is preset by the fluctuation start process (S310) described later with reference to FIG. 25. In the fluctuation start processing, whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined according to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f by the processing of S306 or S309, and if it is a jackpot, the value of the jackpot type counter C2. Therefore, the number of rounds at the time of the big hit and the game state after the big hit are determined.

When the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S315, the stop symbol of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with the display of the second LED group 37b in the special symbol display device 37. In order to synchronize and display the confirmation, a confirmation command is set (S316), and the process shifts to S317. The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect being executed by the third symbol display device 81. Upon receiving this confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits a display confirmation command to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 is configured to stop the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and display the stopped symbol in a finalized manner by receiving the display confirmation command.

In the process of S317, in order to determine whether or not it is in the “probability fluctuation state”, it is determined whether or not the value of the ST counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is larger than “0” (S317). This ST counter is set to "100" when the "probability fluctuation state" is started because the probability variation transition flag 203i is set to on in the jackpot end processing (see S415 in FIG. 26) in the jackpot processing described later. Is configured to be set (see S472 in FIG. 30).

In the processing of S317, if the value of the ST counter is not "0" (S317: Yes), it is a "probability fluctuation state", and the dynamic display (variation effect) of any of the special symbols has been completed once. The value of the ST counter is subtracted by 1 (S318), and the process shifts to S319. On the other hand, in the process of S317, if the value of the ST counter is "0" (S317: No), it means that the game is in the "normal game state" or the "time shortened state", so the process of S318 is skipped and the process is performed in S319. Move to.

In the process of S319, in order to determine whether or not the game state has the "time saving function" added, whether or not the value of the time saving counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is larger than "0" is determined. Determine (S319). This time saving counter is set to "100" when the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", "time saving C" or "latent probability fluctuation C" is determined in the jackpot end processing (see S415 in FIG. 26) in the jackpot processing described later. (See S475 in FIG. 30), and when it is determined that the jackpot type is "time reduction A", "time reduction B", "latent probability fluctuation A", or "latent probability fluctuation B", "50" is set. (See S476 in FIG. 30).

In the process of S319, if the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (S319: Yes), it is a game state in which the "time reduction function" is added, and the dynamic display (variation effect) of any special symbol is displayed. Since it has finished once, the value of the time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 (S320), the special figure variation process (S110) is finished, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17). On the other hand, in the processing of S319, if the value of the time saving counter is "0" (S319: No), the "time saving function" is not added, so the processing of S320 is skipped and this special figure variation processing (S110). ) Is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17).

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, a variation start process (S310), which is a process of the special figure variation process (S110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start processing (S310). This fluctuation start processing (S310) performs a big hit or loss lottery (big hit lottery) based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f according to the game state, and also performs the special symbol display device 37 and the first 3 The dynamic pattern (variation pattern and stop type) of the dynamic display and the variation effect performed by the symbol display device 81 is determined.

In the fluctuation start processing (S310), first, in order to determine the gaming state, it is determined whether or not the value of the ST counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 is larger than "0" (S321). As a result of the determination, if the value of the ST counter is "0" (S321: No), the gaming state is the "normal gaming state" or the "time shortened state", and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is the low probability state. , The jackpot random number table 202a for the low probability state is set (S322), and the process shifts to S324. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the ST counter is larger than "0" (S323: Yes), the gaming state is the "probability fluctuation state", and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is the high probability state. Therefore, the jackpot random number table 202a for the high probability state is set (S323), and the processing is shifted to S324.

In the process of S324, whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 9A) set in S322 or S323. A jackpot lottery (win / fail determination) process for determining is performed (S324).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the gaming state (mode) at that time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the normal low probability state (“normal game state” or “time reduction state”), “7,307”. , 582 ”is defined as a jackpot random number value. In addition, when the gaming state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in a high probability state (“probability fluctuation state”), “28,122,298,390,486,567,656,750,866” is a big hit. It is defined as a random value.

In the process of S324, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and when they match, the jackpot is hit. It is determined that. When it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot as a result of the processing of S324 (S324: Yes), the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot for special figure 1 corresponding to the first special symbol. The display mode at the time of jackpot is set based on the type table 202b1 (see FIG. 10A) or the jackpot type table 202b2 for special figure 2 (see FIG. 10B) corresponding to the second special symbol (S325). ).

In this process, according to the jackpot type table 202b, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, that is, the “probability fluctuation state” after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds. "Probability fluctuation A" corresponding to "15R probability variation jackpot" that shifts to, or "latent probability fluctuation C" that corresponds to "15R latent probability variation jackpot" that shifts to "probability fluctuation state" after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds. Or, the maximum number of rounds shifts to the "time reduction state" after the jackpot of 15 rounds. "Time saving C" corresponding to the "15R time reduction jackpot", or the maximum number of rounds shifts to the "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot of 7 rounds. "Hidden probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation B" corresponding to "7R latent probability variation jackpot", or "7R time saving jackpot" corresponding to "7R time saving jackpot" in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to "time reduction state" after a jackpot of 7 rounds. Whether it is "time saving A" or "time saving B" is determined. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of jackpot in the special symbol display device 37 (display mode of the second LED group 37b) is set.

Specifically, when the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is the data shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. And the jackpot type table 202b1 for special figure 1 (see FIG. 10A), the jackpot type is determined. Further, when the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is the data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the special feature. The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type table 202b2 for FIG. 2 (see FIG. 10B).

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S326), and the process proceeds to S329. Specifically, a rough production mode is selected based on the jackpot type (display mode) determined in S325 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, and the rough production mode is selected. The dynamic time (variation time) of the specific dynamic display (variation effect) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the rough effect mode. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202d to be used is selected according to the jackpot type (display mode).

Specifically, when "probability variation A" corresponding to "15R probability variation jackpot" is set as the jackpot type in the processing of S325, the stop pattern table 202d provided for "probability variation A" (for example, probability). In the stop pattern table for variation A), the effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the hold ball execution area 203f is selected. When the "latent probability variation C" corresponding to the "15R latent probability variation jackpot" is set as the jackpot type, the stop pattern table 202d provided for the "latent probability variation C" (for example, for the latent probability variation C) In the stop pattern table), the effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the hold ball execution area 203f is selected. Further, when "time reduction C" corresponding to "15R time reduction jackpot" is set as the jackpot type, it is held in the stop pattern table 202d provided for "time reduction C" (for example, the stop pattern table for time reduction C). The effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the ball execution area 203f is selected. Further, when "latent probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation B" corresponding to "7R latent probability variation jackpot" is set as the jackpot type, a stop pattern table provided for "latent probability variation A / B" is provided. In 202d (for example, the stop pattern table for latent probability fluctuations A and B), the effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the hold ball execution area 203f is selected. When "time reduction A" or "time reduction B" corresponding to "7R time reduction jackpot" is set as the jackpot type, the stop pattern table 202d provided for "time reduction A / B" (for example, time reduction A / B) is set. In the stop pattern table for B), the effect mode associated with the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the hold ball execution area 203f is selected.

Then, in the group of the variation pattern table 202e provided for each effect mode set in the process of S326, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. .. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit is not a big hit in the process of S324 (S324: No), the display mode at the time of loss is set (S327). In the process of S327, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the hold ball execution area 203f and the first hold ball number counter. Based on the value of 203a or (and) the second reserved ball number counter 203b and the current gaming state, as the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a "non-reach (shortened)" effect mode and a "non-reach" effect mode are used. One of the "(normal)" effect mode, the "normal reach" effect mode, the "super reach" effect mode, and the "special reach" effect mode is set. In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is stopped corresponding to each effect mode depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a “probability fluctuation state”, a “time shortening state”, or a “normal gaming state”. The stop pattern table 202d is set so that the range of values of the pattern selection counter C3 is different.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S328), and the process proceeds to S329. In the process of S328, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 determine the fluctuation time until the stop display is performed with the lost symbol. Specifically, in the group of the fluctuation pattern table 202e provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of loss determined in the processing of S327, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. Select the variation pattern associated with. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance.

In this way, the effect mode and fluctuation pattern setting process at the time of big hit and the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the time of loss are determined and determined by the same determination program using the same random number values C3 and CS1. Therefore, the program can be standardized and the development man-hours at the time of development can be reduced.

In the process of S329, the variation that notifies the display control device 114 of the variation time according to the variation pattern via the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the processes of S326 and S328. Set the pattern command (S329). Specifically, for example, a jackpot lottery is won, the jackpot is "probability fluctuation A" corresponding to "15R probability variation jackpot", and a fluctuation pattern of "super reach" of "25 seconds" is selected. If so, a fluctuation pattern command indicating a jackpot, "probability fluctuation A", and "25 seconds" "super reach" is set. In addition, if the jackpot lottery is lost and a fluctuation pattern of "super reach" of "25 seconds" is selected, a fluctuation pattern command indicating loss and "super reach" of "25 seconds" is set. .. In this way, even if the variation effect has the same variation time, by setting the variation pattern command together with the propriety of the variation effect and the content of the rough variation pattern, the voice lamp control device 113 can perform the effect mode including the result. It is possible to grasp the content and the fluctuation time of the above, and to determine the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect in detail based on the information.

Further, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S325 or S327 via the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S330), and the special figure variation processing (see FIG. 24). ) Return. Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is "probability fluctuation A" which is "15R probability variation jackpot", a specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "7" symbol, etc.) ) Is not specified, and a stop type command indicating that it is "probability fluctuation A" is set. Further, if the jackpot is won and the content of the jackpot is "latent probability fluctuation A" which is "7R latent probability variation jackpot", the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "3" symbol, etc.) is specified. Instead, set a stop type command indicating that it is "latent probability fluctuation A".

On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won and the "super reach" production mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "787") is not specified, and the "super reach" effect mode is not specified. Set a stop type command that indicates that it is a "super reach" effect mode. Further, if the jackpot is not won and the "normal reach" production mode is selected, the "normal reach" at the time of loss is not specified without specifying the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "737"). "Set a stop type command indicating that it is an effect mode. Further, if the jackpot is not won and the "non-reach" effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "258") is not specified, and the "non-reach" effect mode is not specified. Set a stop type command indicating that it is a "non-reach" effect mode.

In this way, by setting a rough stop type based on the success or failure of the variation effect in the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) grasps the stop type based on the success or failure and makes them. It is possible to determine the stop result of the variation effect in detail based on the information of.

These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are executed in the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) to be executed next. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the fluctuation pattern command or the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display fluctuation pattern command or a display type command based on the fluctuation pattern command, and transmits the display type command to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, a jackpot process (S103), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the jackpot process (S103).

In this jackpot process (S103), as described above, when a jackpot of a special symbol occurs, the number of times the jackpot 65a is opened (the number of rounds) is set according to the type of jackpot, and the jackpot 65a Set the opening time. Further, based on the jackpot type, the probability change area open / close table 202f (see FIG. 11) is set to set the right side probability change area 73 and the left side probability change area 74 that are opened or closed in each round, and is effective for each round. Alternatively, the probability variation region valid table 202g (see FIG. 12) is set to set the right probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region 74 to be invalidated.

Further, in the jackpot process (S103), in the case of a jackpot state, a jackpot opening / closing control process (see FIG. 27) for opening or closing the jackpot 65a is executed. That is, the big winning opening 65a is opened for each round in the big hit state, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening 65a (“30 seconds” in the first embodiment) has elapsed, or a ball is placed in the big winning opening 65a. The closing condition of whether or not a specified number (10 in the first embodiment) has been won is determined. Then, when any of these closing conditions is satisfied, the large winning opening 65a is closed. The control regarding the opening and the control regarding the closing of the large winning opening 65a are repeatedly executed for a predetermined number of rounds.

Further, in the large winning opening opening / closing process, a process for opening or closing the right side probability change area 73 and the left side probability change area 74 is executed and set based on the set probability change area opening / closing table 202f (see FIG. 11). Based on the obtained probability variation region effective table 202g (see FIG. 12), the validity or invalidity of each of the right probability variation region 73 or the left probability variation region 74 is set. That is, for each round of the jackpot state, the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a of the right probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region opening / closing of the left probability variation region 74 according to the set probability variation region opening / closing table 202f (see FIG. 11). The plate 74a is driven and controlled. Further, for each round of the jackpot state, according to the set probability variation area effective table 202g (see FIG. 12), the right probability variation effective flag 203g corresponding to the right probability variation region 73 and the left corresponding to the left probability variation region 74. Set the probability variation valid flag 203h on or off.

In this jackpot process (S103), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (S401). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is not hit (S401: No), then it is determined whether or not the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol is completed (S402).

As a result of the determination in S402, if the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol is not completed (S402: No), this jackpot process (S103) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). On the other hand, if the dynamic display (variable effect) of the special symbol is completed (S402: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot is won in the dynamic display (variable effect) (S403).

As a result of the determination in S403, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the dynamic display (variation effect) (S403: No), the jackpot process (S103) is terminated and the timer interrupt process (FIG. 22). See). On the other hand, if it is determined in the dynamic display (variable effect) that the jackpot has been won (S403: Yes), in order to execute the control regarding the winning jackpot, first, is the number of rounds of the winning jackpot 15R? Whether or not, that is, "probability fluctuation A" corresponding to "15R probability variation jackpot", "latent probability variation C" corresponding to "15R latent probability variation jackpot", or "time reduction C" corresponding to "15R time reduction jackpot" It is determined whether or not the player has won (S404).

As a result of the determination in S404, if the number of rounds of the winning jackpot is 15R (S404: Yes), "15" is set in the round counter in order to control the opening of the jackpot 65a 15 times in this jackpot (S404: Yes). S405), the process shifts to S407. On the other hand, when the number of rounds of the winning jackpot is not 15R, that is, "latent probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation B" corresponding to "7R latent probability variation jackpot", or "time saving" corresponding to "7R time saving jackpot" If you have won "A" or "Time saving B" (S404: No), set "7" to the round counter to control the opening of the big winning opening 65a 7 times in this big hit (S406). The process shifts to S407. The MPU 201 confirms the value of the round counter, and when the value is set in the round counter (that is, “1” or more), the value of the round counter is set to 1 while controlling the opening of the large winning opening 65a. Subtract. Then, when the value of the round counter becomes "0", the jackpot being executed is terminated.

In the process of S407, in order to transmit the opening command to the voice lamp control device 113, the opening command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S407). Next, the opening time of the jackpot (for example, "10 seconds") is set (S408), and the process shifts to S409. The opening command set in the process of S407 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S101 of FIG. 22) of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice indicating that the jackpot has started, controls the lamp, and transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 controls to display the opening effect (for example, notification of the total number of rounds) on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display opening command.

In the process of S409, the probability variation area opening / closing table 202f (see FIG. 11) is set according to the type of jackpot (big hit type) (see S409), and the process shifts to S410. Specifically, if the jackpot type is "time reduction A" and "latent probability fluctuation A", the opening / closing pattern of the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation region 74 is set to "X1", and the jackpot types "time reduction B" and "latent". If it is "probability variation B", the opening / closing pattern of the right side probability variation area 73 and the left side probability variation area 74 is set to "X2", and if it is the jackpot type "probability variation A", the opening / closing pattern of the right side probability variation area 73 and the left side probability variation area 74 is set. If it is set to "Y1" and the jackpot type is "time saving C" and "latent probability fluctuation C", the opening / closing pattern of the right side probability change area 73 and the left side probability change area 74 is set to "Y2".

In the processing of S410, the probability variation area effective table 202g (see FIG. 12) is set according to the type of jackpot (big hit type) (see S410), and the processing shifts to S411. Specifically, if the jackpot type is "time reduction A", "time reduction C", and "latent probability fluctuation B", the effective pattern of the right side probability variation area 73 and the left side probability variation area 74 is set to "A", and the jackpot type "time reduction" is set. For "B", "latent probability variation A" and "latent probability variation C", the effective pattern of the right side probability variation area 73 and the left side probability variation area 74 is set to "B", and for the jackpot type "probability variation A", the right side. The effective pattern of the probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region 74 is set to "C".

In the process of S411, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type in this jackpot is "probability fluctuation A" (S411). As a result of the determination, if it is determined to be "probability variation A" (S411: Yes), a probability variation notification command is set to notify the player that the "probability variation state" is present (S412). , The jackpot process (S103) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

The probability change notification command set in the process of S412 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 22). , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the probability change notification command, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to execute the “probability change notification effect mode” in order to notify the player that the player is in the “probability fluctuation state”.

On the other hand, in the process of S411, if it is determined that the game is not "probability variation A" (S411: No), the game state is not clearly notified, so the process of S412 is skipped so as not to set the probability change notification command. , This jackpot process (S103) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

In the pachinko machine of the first embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 does not receive the above-mentioned probability change notification command and the running jackpot ends, the "time saving notification effect mode" is executed without exception after the jackpot. It is configured so that it is difficult (or impossible) for the player to recognize whether the player is in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state".

If it is determined in the process of S401 that the jackpot has already been hit (S401: Yes), the big winning opening opening / closing control process (S413) for executing the opening / closing control of the big winning opening 65a is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 27, a big winning opening opening / closing control process (S413), which is one process of the big hit process (S103) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the large winning opening opening / closing control process (S413). As described above, in this big winning opening opening / closing control process (S413), based on the number of times the big winning opening 65a is opened set in the big hit processing (S103), the opening / closing control of the big winning opening 65a and the right side probability variation region 73 And the opening / closing control of the left side probability change area 74, and the valid setting process or the invalid setting process of the right side probability change area 73 and the left side probability change area 74 are also executed.

In this big winning opening opening / closing control process (S413), first, it is determined whether or not the opening time at the time of this big hit or the interval time between each round (for example, "1 second") has elapsed (S421). .. As a result of the determination, if the opening time or the interval time has not elapsed (S421: No), the opening condition of the large winning opening 65a has not been satisfied yet, so the processing of S422 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S423. .. On the other hand, if the opening time or the interval time has elapsed (S421: Yes), the opening condition of the large winning opening 65a is satisfied, so the opening setting process of the large winning opening 65a is performed (S422), and the process is shifted to S4223. To do.

Here, the open setting process (S422) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the open setting process (S422). As described above, in this opening setting process (S422), various setting processes and the like for opening the large winning opening 65a are executed.

In this opening setting process (S422), first, since it is the timing to open the large winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, the large winning opening opening setting for opening the large winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is performed ( S431), the process shifts to S432. By setting the large winning opening opening, the large winning opening solenoid 65c is driven to open the opening / closing plate 65b, and the ball can flow into the large winning opening 65a.

Next, in the process of S432, in order to count the balls that have won the open large winning opening 65a, "10" is set in the winning counter (S432), and the process shifts to S433. In the first embodiment, the value of the winning counter is configured to be subtracted by 1 each time a ball enters the large winning opening 65a, and the MPU 201 is opened at a predetermined value after the large winning opening 65a is opened. It is configured to close the large winning opening 65a when the time has passed or when the value of the winning counter becomes "0".

Next, in the process of S433, the maximum opening time (for example, "30 seconds") of the large winning opening 65a is set (S433), and the large winning opening 65a is being opened to the voice lamp control device 113. The indicated release command is set (S434), and the process shifts to S435. The release command set in the process of S434 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 17). It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the release command, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice indicating that the round has started, controls the lamp, and transmits the display release command to the display control device 114. Based on the reception of the display release command, the third symbol display device 81 is controlled to display the round effect (for example, round number notification).

Next, in the processing of S435, the right probability variation effective flag 203g or the left probability variation effective flag 203h in the round is set based on the probability variation area effective table 202g set according to the jackpot type in the jackpot processing (see FIG. 26). (S435), this open setting process (S422) is terminated. After the completion of the opening setting process (S422), the process proceeds to S423 of the large winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 27).

In the processing of S435, specifically, regarding the right probability variation effective flag 203g, if the jackpot types are "time saving A", "latent probability fluctuation B", and "time saving C", and the jackpot starts two rounds. Since the probability variation region effective pattern is "A", the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to on.

Further, in the processing of S435, if the jackpot type is "time saving B", "latent probability variation A", and "latent probability variation C", and the jackpot starts in 3 rounds, the probability variation region effective pattern is "B". Therefore, the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to on.

Further, in the processing of S435, if the jackpot type is "probability variation A" and the jackpot starts 4 rounds, the probability variation region effective pattern is "C", so the right probability variation effective flag 203g is turned on. Set. In all rounds other than the above-mentioned rounds of each jackpot type, the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to off.

Further, regarding the left probability variation effective flag 203h, if the jackpot types are "time reduction A", "latent probability fluctuation B", and "time reduction C" and the jackpot starts 5 rounds, the left probability variation effective flag 203h is turned on. Is set to. Further, if the jackpot types are "time reduction B", "latent probability variation A", and "latent probability variation C", and the jackpot starts 6 rounds, the left probability variation effective flag 203h is set to ON. Further, if the jackpot type is "probability variation A" and the jackpot starts in 9 rounds, the left probability variation effective flag 203h is set to ON. In addition, the left probability variation effective flag 203h is set to off in all rounds other than the above-mentioned rounds of each jackpot type.

Returning to FIG. 27, the description will be continued. In the process of S423, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 65a is open (S423). As a result of the determination, if the large winning opening 65a is not open (S423: No), the large winning opening 65a is not open, but is in the opening time, the interval time, or the ending time. , S424 is skipped, the big winning opening opening / closing control process (S413) is finished, and the game returns to the big hit process (see FIG. 26). On the other hand, if the large winning opening 65a is open (S423: Yes), an opening process for executing various processes associated with the opening of the large winning opening 65a is performed (S424), and this large winning opening opening / closing control process (S413) is performed. Is finished, and the process returns to the jackpot process (see FIG. 26).

Here, the opening process (S424) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the processing during opening (S424). As described above, in this opening processing (S424), the winning detection processing of the ball accompanying the opening of the large winning opening 65a, the opening / closing control of the right side probability change area 73 and the left side probability change area 74, or the opened right side probability change area Control such as detection of passage of a sphere to 73 or the left probabilistic region 74 is executed.

In this opening process (S424), first, it is determined whether or not the right probability variation region switch 73d is turned on (S441). As a result of the determination, if the right probability variation region switch 73d is turned on (S441: Yes), the sphere has flowed into the right probability variation region 73, and then it is determined whether or not the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to ON. (S442). As a result of the determination, if the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to ON (S442: Yes), it means that the sphere is flowing into the right probability variation region 73 in the situation where the right probability variation region 73 is effectively set. In order to generate the "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot, the probability variation transition flag 203i is set to ON (S443), and the process is shifted to S446. On the other hand, in the processing of S442, unless the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to ON (S442: No), the inflow of balls into the right probability variation region 73 in the situation where the right probability variation region 73 is not effectively set. Therefore, the process of S443 is skipped and the process is shifted to S446.

Further, if the right probabilistic region switch 73d is not turned on in the process in S441 (S441: No), then it is determined whether or not the left probabilistic region switch 74d is turned on (S444). As a result of the determination, if the left probability variation region switch 74d is turned on (S444: Yes), the ball has flowed into the left probability variation region 74, and then it is determined whether or not the left probability variation effective flag 203h is set to ON. (S445). As a result of the determination, if the left probability variation effective flag 203h is set to ON (S445: Yes), the ball is flowing into the left probability variation region 74 in the situation where the left probability variation region 74 is effectively set. The process shifts to S443, the probability variation shift flag 203i is set to ON (S443), and the process shifts to S446.

On the other hand, in the processing of S445, if the left probability variation effective flag 203h is not set to ON (S442: No), the inflow of the ball into the left probability variation region 74 in the situation where the left probability variation region 74 is not effectively set. Therefore, the process of S443 is skipped and the process is shifted to S446. If the left probabilistic region switch 74d is not turned on (S444: No) in the processing of S444, the probabilistic region switches 73d and 74d do not detect the sphere, so the processing shifts to S446.

In the process of S446, it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which one opening time of the large winning opening 65a set in the above-mentioned opening time setting process (see S433 of FIG. 28) has elapsed (S446). In the processing of S446, if the opening time of the large winning opening 65a has elapsed (S446: Yes), the closing condition of the large winning opening 65a is satisfied, and the closing timing of the large winning opening 65a in that round is satisfied. The value of the winning counter is cleared to "0" (S447), and the process shifts to S455 in order to close the large winning opening 65a. The closing process of the large winning opening 65a from S445 will be described later. On the other hand, in the processing of S446, if the opening time of the large winning opening 65a has not elapsed (S446: No), then the ball has won the large winning opening 65a and whether or not the large winning opening switch 71 has been turned on. (S448).

In the process of S448, if the large winning opening switch 71 is turned on (S448: Yes), the ball has won the large winning opening 65a, so the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 1 (S449), and then, It is determined whether or not the ON detection of the large winning opening switch 71 this time is the first count, that is, whether or not the value of the winning counter is "9" (S450).

In the processing of S450, when it is determined that the ON detection of the large winning opening switch 71 this time is not the first count (S450: No), the processing is shifted to S452, while it is determined to be the first count. (S450: Yes), the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are set on for "60 ms" (S451), and a ball flows into the right probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73a and the left probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74a. Open it for a moment to the extent that it does not.

In this way, is it possible to open the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a and the left probability variation region opening / closing plate 74a by driving the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b to the extent that the ball does not flow in at the first count of each round? Since it is possible to confirm whether or not it is possible, it is possible to grasp at an early stage the situation in which the probable change areas 73 and 74 are not opened due to an abnormality or the like.

Next, in the process of S452, it is determined whether or not the ON detection of the large winning opening switch 71 this time is the third count, that is, whether or not the value of the winning counter is "7" (S452). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the ON detection of the jackpot switch 71 this time is the third count (S452: Yes), the probability change set according to the jackpot type in the jackpot processing (see FIG. 26). Based on the region opening / closing table 202f (see FIG. 11), the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b or the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b is set to ON for “2000 ms” (S453), and the right probabilistic region switching plate 73a or the left probabilistic region opening / closing One of the plates 74a is opened so that the ball can flow into the open probability variation regions 73 and 74. With this configuration, in each round, the ball can pass through one of the preset probabilistic regions 73 and 74. After executing S451 and S453, the opening process (S424) is terminated, and the process returns to the large winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 27).

On the other hand, in the processing of S452, if it is determined that the ON detection of the large winning opening switch 71 this time is not the third count (S452: No), then the value of the winning counter subtracted by 1 is larger than "0". Whether or not it is determined (S454). If the value of the winning counter is not greater than "0" (S454: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter is "0" or less, 10 balls are won in the large winning opening 65a and the large winning opening Since the closing condition of 65a is satisfied, the process shifts to S455 in order to close the large winning opening 65a.

In addition, in the processing of S448, when the large winning opening switch 71 is not turned on (S448: No), or in the processing of S454, when it is determined that the value of the winning counter is larger than "0". (S454: Yes), the closing condition of the large winning opening 65a is not satisfied, and in order to continue opening the large winning opening 65a, the processing of S449 to S453 is skipped, and this opening processing (S424) is performed. finish. After the completion of the opening processing (S424), the process returns to the large winning opening opening / closing control processing (see FIG. 27).

In the closing process of the large winning opening 65a from S455, first, the closing setting of the large winning opening 65a is set (S455), the large winning opening solenoid 65c is turned off, and the opening / closing plate 65b is closed. Next, a closing command indicating that the large winning opening 65a has been closed is set for the voice lamp control device 113 (S456), and the process shifts to S457. The closing command set in the process of S456 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 22) to be executed next. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Upon receiving the closing command, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice indicating that one round has been completed, controls the lamp, and transmits the display closing command to the display control device 114. Then, based on the reception of the display closing command, the display control device 114 ends the round effect (for example, round number notification) being executed by the third symbol display device 81, and when the jackpot continues, the interval time Control is performed so as to switch to the interval effect indicating that the jackpot is displayed, and when the jackpot ends, control is performed to end the jackpot.

Next, in the processing of S457, with the closure of the large winning opening 65a, that is, with the end of one round, the right probability variation effective flag 203g and the left probability variation effective flag 203h, and the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b. In order to initialize the setting status once, the right probability variation effective flag 203g and the left probability variation effective flag 203h are set to off (S457), and the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b are set to off (S458). , The process shifts to S459.

Next, in the processing of S459, since one round of the large winning opening 65a was digested, the value of the round counter was subtracted by 1 (S459), and whether or not the value of the round counter subtracted by 1 was larger than "0". (S460). When the value of the round counter is larger than "0" (S460: Yes), the number of rounds in the jackpot (the number of remaining open times of the big winning opening 65a) remains, so the next big winning opening An interval time (for example, "2 seconds") until the 65a is released is set (S461), the opening process (S424) is ended, and the process returns to the jackpot process (see FIG. 26).

On the other hand, in the processing of S460, when the value of the round counter is not larger than "0" (S460: No), that is, when the value of the round counter is "0" or less, the jackpot 65a in this jackpot Since all the opening operations have been completed, in order to end the jackpot state, the opening process (S424) is terminated, and the jackpot process (see FIG. 26) S414 is performed.

Returning to FIG. 26, the description will be continued. After executing the process of the large winning opening opening control process (S413), it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter is larger than "0" (S414). In the opening process (see FIG. 29) of the above-mentioned large winning opening opening / closing control process, the value of the round counter is subtracted as the large winning opening 65a is closed (see S459 of FIG. 29). If the value of the round counter is larger than "0" (S510: Yes), the processing of S415 is skipped and the jackpot processing (S103) is terminated in order to continuously execute the jackpot. The process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

On the other hand, if the value of the round counter is not greater than "0", that is, if the value of the round counter is "0" or less (S414: No), the jackpot end condition is satisfied. In order to end it, the jackpot end process is executed (S415), the jackpot process (S103) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

Here, with reference to FIG. 30, the jackpot end process (S415), which is one of the jackpot processes executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end processing (S415). As described above, in this jackpot end processing (S415), the jackpot end setting control such as the setting of the ending time (for example, “5 seconds”) and the ball to the right side probability variation region 73 or the left side probability variation region 74 during the jackpot It executes the setting control of the game state after the big hit based on the inflow of.

In this jackpot end process (S415), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variation transition flag 203i is turned on (S471). As a result of the determination, if the probability change transition flag 203i is turned on (S471: Yes), the sphere passes through the right side probability change area 73 or the left side probability change area 74 that are effectively set during this jackpot, and the “probability fluctuation state” Since the transition condition to is satisfied, the game state at the end of the jackpot is set to the value of the ST counter in order to make it a "probability fluctuation state" until the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol is executed 100 times. “100” is set (S472), the probability variation transition flag 203i is set to off (S473), and the process is shifted to S474.

On the other hand, in the process of S471, if the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on (s471: No), the sphere did not pass through the right probability variation region 73 or the left probability variation region 74 that was effectively set during this jackpot. Since the condition for shifting to the "probability fluctuation state" is not satisfied, the processing of S472 and S473 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S474.

In the process of S474, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type this time is "probability fluctuation A", "latent probability fluctuation C", or "time saving C" (S474). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the jackpot type this time is either "probability fluctuation A", "latent probability fluctuation C", or "time saving C" (S474: Yes), the gaming state after the jackpot ends is determined. , In order to add the "time saving function" until the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol is executed 100 times, "100" is set to the value of the time saving counter (S475), and the processing is shifted to S477.

On the other hand, in the processing of S474, when it is determined that the current jackpot type is not "probability fluctuation A", "latent probability fluctuation C", or "time reduction C" (S474: Yes), that is, the current jackpot type is "time reduction". When it is determined that the game is "A", "time saving B", "latent probability fluctuation A" or "latent probability fluctuation B", the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol indicates the game state after the jackpot ends. In order to add the "time saving function" until the time is executed, "50" is set in the value of the time saving counter (S476), and the processing is shifted to S477.

Next, in the process of S477, an ending command indicating the start of the jackpot ending effect is set for the voice lamp control device 113 (S477). Then, the jackpot end setting process for setting the ending time and the like is performed (S478), the jackpot end process (S415) is terminated, and the process returns to the jackpot process (see FIG. 26). The ending command set in the process of S477 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S101 in FIG. 22) to be executed next. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice indicating that the jackpot ends, controls the lamp, and transmits the display ending command to the display control device 114. Based on the reception of the display ending command, control is performed so that the ending effect (for example, suggestion of the game state after the end of the big hit) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the opening / closing control of the big winning opening 65a is performed in the jackpot processing (see FIG. 26), the opening / closing control of the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation region 74, and the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation region 74 are also controlled. When the valid setting process or the invalid setting process is executed and the sphere passes through the probabilistic variation areas 73 and 74 that are set to be valid, the "probability fluctuation state" is generated after the jackpot ends. With this configuration, even if the sphere passes through each probability variation region 73,74, if the probability variation region 73,74 is not effectively set internally, a "probability fluctuation state" occurs after the jackpot ends. Therefore, even when the player visually recognizes the passage of the ball through the probabilistic regions 73 and 74, it can be configured so that the occurrence of the "probability fluctuation state" is not confirmed after the end of the jackpot. Therefore, even when the "latent probability variation effect mode" is executed, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the NMI interrupt process executed in the main control device 110 when a power failure or the like occurs will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.

By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The MPU 201 in which the power failure signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, and stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power failure occurrence information (S801). ), Ends the NMI interrupt process.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as voice lamp control device 113, payout control device 111, etc.) to become operable, weight processing (“1 second” in the first embodiment). ) Is executed (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 2) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S911. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is shifted to S911 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S911 even in such a case.

As will be described in S926 of FIG. 33, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S911, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S911). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S912, S913) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM 203 initialization process (S912, S913) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S912, S913) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the initialization process of the RAM 203 (S912, S913), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to “0” (S912), and then the initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S913). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S90: No). S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Then, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. When the payout control device 111 receives the payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, interrupts are permitted (S910). Then, the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 33) described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the counter update process and the power off process are roughly classified.

In the main process, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S921). If the information on the occurrence of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S921: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S922, S923).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S922). Specifically, when the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and the counter value reaches the maximum value (“899”, “99” in the first embodiment). , Clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S107 (see FIG. 22) (S923), and the process shifts to the process of S921.

Here, while this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 22 is started and executed at predetermined time intervals (“4 milliseconds” in the first embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the state of the game. For example, during the big hit, the opening and closing of the big winning opening 65a is controlled, and if the ball passes through the normal symbol gate 67, the display control regarding the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display device 83 is performed. Be told. Further, in the jackpot lottery executed when the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether it is in the high probability state or the low probability state. Come on. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant and changes according to the state of the game at that time.

The above-mentioned processes S922 and S923, which are one process of the main process, are executed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. That is, since the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is repeatedly executed using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number are used. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the initial value of the random number counter C4 per normal figure) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the jackpot random number counter C1 and the normal value random number counter C4 that use these as the initial value of the update can be updated. It can have randomness.

Further, in the processing of S921, if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S921: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 31 is executed, the process at the time of power cutoff after S924 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S924), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S925). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S926), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S927), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S921 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S922 and S923, which is performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), ends. As a result, in the main processing of the main control device 110, various settings by the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) are completed, and at the timing when the update of each counter CINI1, CINI2, CS1 is completed, the power failure occurrence information is completed. Is confirmed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut-off state, the process can be started from the process of S921 after the start-up process (see FIG. 32) is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S921 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process.

Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S921 can be started. As a result, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

In the first embodiment, the process to be executed periodically is executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22), and in the main process (see FIG. 33), each counter is set to the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22). Although the case of executing the update of CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 has been described, a part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) is predetermined in the main processing (see FIG. 33). It may be configured to run every hour (eg, "4 milliseconds"). For example, the prize ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal reading processing (S102), the jackpot processing (S103), and the ordinary electric service control processing (S104) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 22) in the first embodiment. And a part or all of the switch reading process (S105), the start winning process (S108), the gate passing process (S109), the special figure variation process (S110), the normal figure variation process (S111), and the launch control process (S112). , It may be configured to be executed every "4 milliseconds" in the main process (see FIG. 33) instead of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 22).

In this case, a step is provided in the main process (see FIG. 33) to determine whether or not a predetermined time (“4 milliseconds”) has elapsed, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, it is executed every predetermined time. The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is updated during the remaining time of the process to be executed at predetermined time intervals, but the process to be executed at predetermined time intervals is executed according to the state of the game. Since the time required for the operation changes, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated at random even in such a configuration.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process (see FIG. 34) that is started when the power is turned on and a main process (see FIG. 35) that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1115 (see FIG. 35) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 35, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power off command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power off process of S1115. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1115 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S1115 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1115 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1115, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to "0".

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1116 is executed (see S1115 of FIG. 35). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1116 is executed, the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1116 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1011) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S1008 is performed via the processes of S1004 to S1006. This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1011), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1009 is that when the processing of S1008 is reached via the processing of S1004 to S1006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 35, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this main process.

When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not "1 millisecond" or more has elapsed since the previous process of S1101 was executed (S1101), and if "1 millisecond" or more has not elapsed (S1101). S1101: No), the process proceeds to S1110 without performing the processes of S1102 to S1109. In the processing of S1101, it is not necessary to process in a short cycle (within "1 millisecond") in S1102 to S1109 to determine whether or not "1 millisecond" has elapsed, whereas in S1110. This is because it is preferable to execute the variation effect processing of S1111 and the command determination processing of S1111 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S1110 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

In the process of S1101, if it is determined that "1 millisecond" or more has passed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1102. When the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 34, the process proceeds to the process of S1102 as it is.

In the process of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1103 to S1112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S1107 described later (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). .. The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, "30 seconds") when the power is turned on, and the notification is a voice output device 226 or a lamp display device. It is done by 227. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S1105 without being notified by the power on notification process.

Next, in the process of S1105, the jackpot effect process for executing the effect related to the jackpot set by the command determination process of S1111 described later is performed (S1105), and the process proceeds to the process of S1106.

Next, in the process of S1106, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1106). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, during the valid period of the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed is monitored, and the input is monitored during the valid period. This is a process for setting the effect corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1106) is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S1107), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1108, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1109), and the process proceeds to the process of S1110. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1107 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing / output process of S1108 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. Runs in time.

In the process of S1110, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, the variation effect process is a process for starting the variation effect based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main control device 110. To execute. Then, after the variation effect processing, a command determination process for performing processing according to the command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1111), and the process proceeds to the process of S1112. Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36.

In S1112, a counter update process for updating various counters provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S1112). For example, the counter that determines the detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect is updated in this counter update process. The counter is updated by sequentially adding 1 within a predetermined range (“0 to 99” in this embodiment), reaching the maximum value (“99”), and then returning to “0”.

When the processing of S1112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S1115), and the power-off process is executed (S1116). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1114: No), the process returns to the process of S1101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1111). This command determination process (S1111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 35) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is received from the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 as described above. Judge the command that was executed.

In the command determination process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not a command from the main control device 110 is received in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 (S1201). As a result of the determination, if a command has not been received from the main control device 110 (S1201: No), this command determination process (S1111) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35).

On the other hand, in the processing of S1201, if a command is received from the main control device 110 (S1201: Yes), the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and the main control device is used. It is determined whether or not the probability change notification command has been received from 110 (S1202). Then, when it is determined that the probability change notification command has been received (S1202: Yes), the “probability change notification effect mode” is set in order to notify the player that the player is in the “probability fluctuation state” (S1203).

Here, the "probability variation notification effect mode" is a third symbol display device that indicates a notification mode (for example, character display of "SUPER LUCKY!") In which a "probability fluctuation state" occurs after the jackpot if it is a jackpot. If it is displayed on 81 and a fluctuation effect is being produced, the occurrence of a "probability fluctuation state" can be displayed in character display on the third symbol display device 81, or the background color of the third symbol display device 81 can be changed to normal. By changing to a different background color (for example, from blue to red), the player is made to recognize that the player is in the "probability fluctuation state". After that, the command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the voice lamp control device 113 does not receive the probability change notification command at the end of the jackpot, the “time reduction notification effect” indicating the “time reduction state” is shown as the effect after the jackpot ends. It is configured to carry out all aspects. That is, even if the jackpot is a jackpot with the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", "latent probability fluctuation B", or "latent probability fluctuation C", the player is not notified that the jackpot is in the "probability fluctuation state", and the jackpot is hit. An effect equivalent to the type "time saving A", "time saving B" or "time saving C" is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S1202, if the probability change notification command is not received from the main control device 110 (S1202: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S1204), and this command determination process (S1111) is terminated. Then, the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 35).

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, two probabilistic regions (right probabilistic region 73 and left probabilistic region 74) are provided in the grand prize opening 65a, and a jackpot is provided according to the jackpot type. The player controls the drive so as to open one of the opening / closing plates 73a and 74a provided for each probability variation region 73 and 74 for each round, and enables or disables each probability variation region 73 and 74. Control to switch (internally) in a state where it cannot be recognized. Then, when the ball passes through the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set during the jackpot, a "probability fluctuation state" is generated after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, even if the sphere passes through the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 that are set to be invalid, the "probability fluctuation state" is not generated after the end of the jackpot.

With this configuration, even if the sphere passes through each probability variation region 73,74, if the probability variation region 73,74 is not effectively set internally, a "probability fluctuation state" occurs after the jackpot ends. Therefore, even when the player visually recognizes the passage of the ball through the probabilistic regions 73 and 74, it can be configured so that the occurrence of the "probability fluctuation state" is not confirmed after the end of the jackpot. In addition, the "latent probability variation effect mode" and the "time saving notification effect mode" or the "normal notification mode" are configured to have the same effect. With this configuration, even when the "latent probability variation effect mode" is executed, it is possible to determine whether the game is in the "probability fluctuation state", the "time reduction state", or the "normal game state". It is possible to create a game property that makes it difficult for a person to recognize and makes the player guess in which game state the game is being played, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a jackpot type that generates a "probability fluctuation state" is won after the jackpot ends, the ball can pass through the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set in a plurality of rounds in the jackpot. Has been done. Therefore, even if the ball cannot be passed through the probabilistic regions 73 and 74, which are effectively set, in one of the rounds in which the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 are effectively set, the other round. It is possible to pass the ball through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set in the round. Therefore, sudden troubles (for example, game abnormalities such as launch abnormalities, poor physical condition of the player, etc.) hinder the passage of the ball to the probability variation areas 73 and 74 in one of the effectively set rounds. Even in the event of an unforeseen situation, the player will not be able to pass the ball through the probabilistic areas 73 and 74 that are effectively set in the other round that is set to be valid. It is possible to realize a comfortable game without suffering a profit.

Further, different probability variation regions 73 and 74 are effectively set in a plurality of rounds during the jackpot. With this configuration, even if one of the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74, which is effectively set in one round, cannot normally detect the passage of the ball due to an abnormality such as a failure, the other probabilistic regions 73 and 74 cannot be detected normally. It is possible to generate a "probability fluctuation state" by a sphere that has passed through the other probability variation regions 74 and 73 that are effectively set in the round. Therefore, even if a sudden trouble (for example, a failure) causes a problem in passing the ball to the probability variation regions 73 and 74 in one of the validly set rounds, the effective setting is made. By providing the possibility of passing the ball through the probability variation areas 73 and 74, which are effectively set in the other round, the player realizes a comfortable game without suffering a disadvantage due to an unforeseen situation. be able to.

Whether or not the right probability changing region opening / closing plate 73a and the left probability changing region opening / closing plate 74a can be opened by driving the right probability changing region solenoid 73b and the left probability changing region solenoid 74b to the extent that the ball does not flow in at the first count of each round. Therefore, it is possible to grasp at an early stage the situation in which the probable change areas 73 and 74 are not opened due to an abnormality or the like.

Further, regarding a plurality of rounds in which the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are effectively set when the jackpot type that generates the "probability fluctuation state" is won after the jackpot ends, the round to which the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are effectively set. In the above, the right side probability variation region 73 located on the upstream side in the large winning opening 65a is configured to be effectively set. With this configuration, if an abnormality such as ball clogging occurs in the large winning opening 65a, in particular, a ball clogging or the like occurs on the downstream side of the right side probability variation region 73 and on the upstream side of the left side probability variation region 74. Even if an abnormality occurs, the right-side probabilistic region 73 located on the upstream side of the large winning opening 65a can be effectively set first, and the ball can flow into the right-side probabilistic region 73. It is possible to easily grant the right to the player.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the right-side probabilistic region 73 and the left-side probabilistic region 74 are provided in the large winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, and the ball to the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set is provided. Based on the passage, it is configured to give a "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot ends.

However, since the jackpot game is digested by opening or closing the jackpot 65a of the variable winning device 65, it is necessary to provide an interval time associated with the closing of the jackpot 65a, and it takes time to digest the jackpot game. There is a risk that the jackpot game will be delayed and the player will be awakened. In particular, in a situation where a jackpot is continuously won within a predetermined period (so-called during a consecutive villa), the player desires a quick game, and in such a situation, at the interval time of the jackpot game. If it takes time, it becomes easier for the player to get excited about the game.

Further, the assignment of the "probability fluctuation state" is determined by the combination of two elements, that is, the opening or closing of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 in the variable winning device 65 and the validity or invalidity of the probability variation regions 73 and 74. Therefore, even when the "latent probability variation effect mode" is executed, the player recognizes (estimates) the opening / closing pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 and the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74. , There is a possibility that it can be foreseen that a "probability fluctuation state" will be given.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, in addition to the variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device 76 is provided, and predetermined jackpot games (“probability fluctuation A”, “time saving C”, and “latent probability” are provided. In each round of "Variable C"), the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are alternately opened, and one of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 is continuously opened during a predetermined jackpot game. To do. With this configuration, the interval time during the predetermined jackpot game can be eliminated, the jackpot game can be quickly digested, and the game is not delayed, so that the player is awakened. Can be prevented.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the inside of the variable winning device 65 and the inside of the second variable winning device 76 are communicated by a communication passage 77, and the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation are connected to the communication destination flow path. Region 74 is arranged. With this configuration, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 (hereinafter, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are collectively referred to as "variable winning devices 65, 76". Since it is not necessary to provide a plurality of probability variation regions 73 and 74 for each of the above), the number of parts in the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, in addition to the two elements of opening or closing the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 and enabling or invalidating the probabilistic regions 73 and 74, the variable winning devices 65 and 76 are opened or closed. Since the granting of the "probability fluctuation state" is determined by the combination of a total of three elements of one element, it is possible to make it difficult to predict that the "probability fluctuation state" will be granted. Therefore, even when the "latent probability variation effect mode" is executed, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a variable winning device is used for a jackpot type (that is, a jackpot type “probability fluctuation A”, “time saving C”, and “latent probability fluctuation C”) that can be won in a so-called consecutive villa. The 65 and the second variable winning device 76 can be opened alternately without interruption to realize the quick game desired by the player in the so-called consecutive villa, prevent the game from being awakened, and play the game. Can improve the interest of.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 of the second embodiment in a front view.

As shown in FIG. 37, the second variable winning device 76 is provided at a position above the variable winning device 65, and has a horizontally long rectangular second opening / closing plate 76b that covers the second large winning opening 76a and a second opening / closing plate thereof. A second large winning opening solenoid 76c (see FIG. 38) for driving the opening and closing of the lower side of the 76b to the front side, a second large winning opening switch 71a for detecting a ball winning in the second large winning opening 76a, and a second large winning opening switch 71a. A communication passage 77 through which the ball detected by the second special winning opening switch 71a flows down is provided.

The second prize opening switch 71a is embedded in the passage in the vicinity of the second prize opening 76a, and when the ball is detected by the second prize opening switch 71a, 15 prize balls are paid out. Further, when 10 balls are detected by the second big winning opening switch 71a after the second opening / closing plate 76b is opened, the second opening / closing plate 76b is closed and one round ends. It is configured.

The communication passage 77 is a passage through which the ball flowing into the second large winning opening 76a flows down, and is communicated with the guide passage 72 of the variable winning device 65 via the merging portion 77a. A right side probability variation region 73 and a left side probability variation region 74 are provided on the downstream side of the confluence portion 77a between the guide passage 72 of the variable winning device 65 and the communication passage 77 of the second variable winning device 76, and the right side thereof. A discharge passage 75 is provided on the downstream side of the probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation region 74. Therefore, the ball that flows into the second large winning opening 76a and flows down the communication passage 77 passes through the right side probability variation region 73 or the left side probability variation region 74, like the ball that has flowed into the large winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65. Will pass through, or will pass through the discharge passage 75.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, after the ball flowing into the second special winning opening 76a is detected by the second special winning opening switch 71a, it is about until it reaches the upper part of the right side probability variation region 73 through the communication passage 77. It is configured to take "1.7 seconds", and after the ball flowing into the second prize opening 76a is detected by the second prize opening switch 71a, it passes through the communication passage 77 and is located in the left side probability variation region 74. It is configured to take about "1.8" seconds to reach the top. Therefore, the ball detected by the second special winning opening switch 71a is configured to be able to flow into the right side probability variation region 73 or the left side probability variation region 74 within "2 seconds".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the inside of the variable winning device 65 and the inside of the second variable winning device 76 are communicated by the communication passage 77, and the right side probability variation region 73 and the flow path of the communication destination are communicated with each other. The left side probability variation region 74 is arranged. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of probability variation regions 73 and 74 for each of the variable winning devices 65 and 76, so that the number of parts in the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment.

The large winning opening opening / closing table 202h is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the second embodiment.

Here, the large winning opening opening / closing table 202h will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the large winning opening opening / closing table 202h. The large winning opening opening / closing table 202h shown in FIG. 39 shows a variable winning device 65 or a second variable winning device 76 that is opened in each round for each jackpot type in each special symbol, and the variable winning device 76 is shown in each round. When the device 65 is opened, it is expressed as "lower", and when the second variable winning device 76 is opened, it is expressed as "upper". In the second embodiment, when one variable winning device 65,76 (for example, the variable winning device 65) is open, the other variable winning device 65,76 (for example, the second variable winning device 76) is open. Is configured to be closed.

As shown in FIG. 39, the opening / closing patterns “upper only” of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 corresponding to the jackpot types “time saving A” and “latent probability fluctuation A” of the first special symbol are all rounds (that is, that is). Only the second variable winning device 76 is opened in (1st to 7th rounds), and the variable winning device 65 is continuously closed during the jackpot game.

Therefore, in the jackpot types "time reduction A" and "latent probability fluctuation A", the opening and closing of the second jackpot 76a of the second variable winning device 76 is repeated during the jackpot game, and the interval time during the closing is repeated. It is configured to occur.

Further, since the jackpot types "time saving A" and "latent probability fluctuation A" have the same opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65 and 76, the jackpot type cannot be determined only by the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65 and 76. By doing so, it is difficult (impossible) to make it difficult for the player to recognize which jackpot type is won, and to create a playability that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the opening / closing patterns “bottom only” of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 corresponding to the jackpot types “time saving B” and “latent probability fluctuation B” of the first special symbol are all rounds (only below). That is, only the variable winning device 65 is opened in (1st to 7th rounds), and the second variable winning device 76 is configured to continue to be closed during the jackpot game.

Therefore, in the jackpot types "time reduction B" and "latent probability fluctuation B", the jackpot 65a of the variable winning device 65 is repeatedly opened and closed during the jackpot game, so that an interval time occurs during the closing. It is configured.

Further, since the jackpot types "time saving B" and "latent probability fluctuation B" have the same opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65 and 76, the jackpot type cannot be determined only by the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65 and 76. By doing so, it is difficult (impossible) to make it difficult for the player to recognize which jackpot type is won, and to create a playability that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the opening / closing patterns "upper and lower alternating" of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 corresponding to the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are odd rounds ( That is, only the second variable winning device 76 is opened in 1 round, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds, 9 rounds, 11 rounds, 13 rounds and 15 rounds), and the variable winning device 65 is closed during the odd rounds. It is configured to.

Further, in the opening / closing pattern "alternate up and down", only the variable winning device 65 is opened in even rounds (that is, 2 rounds, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 12 rounds and 14 rounds), and during the even rounds. Is configured so that the second variable winning device 76 is closed.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", one of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 is configured to be open without interruption. With such a configuration, the interval time during the jackpot game can be eliminated, the jackpot game can be quickly digested, and the game is not delayed, so that the player is prevented from being awakened. can do. In particular, the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A" notifies the player that the "probability fluctuation state" is given after the jackpot game, and the player quickly changes the "probability fluctuation state" toward the next jackpot. I hope it will arrive. In such a state, by quickly digesting the jackpot game, it is possible to realize the game as expected by the player.

Next, as shown in FIG. 39, the opening / closing patterns “lower and upper alternating” of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 corresponding to the jackpot types “time saving C” and “latent probability fluctuation C” of the second special symbol are odd numbers. Only the variable winning device 65 is open in the rounds (ie, 1 round, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds, 9 rounds, 11 rounds, 13 rounds and 15 rounds), and during the odd rounds the second variable winning device 76 It is configured to be closed.

Further, in the opening / closing pattern "lower and upper alternating", only the second variable winning device 76 is opened in even rounds (that is, 2 rounds, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 12 rounds and 14 rounds). The variable winning device 65 is configured to be closed during even rounds.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "time saving C" and "latent probability fluctuation C", as in the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", one of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 is configured to be open without interruption. With such a configuration, the interval time during the jackpot game can be eliminated, the jackpot game can be quickly digested, and the game is not delayed, so that the player is prevented from being awakened. can do.

Further, since the jackpot types "time saving C" and "latent probability fluctuation C" have the same opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65 and 76, the jackpot type cannot be determined only by the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65 and 76. By doing so, it is difficult (impossible) to make it difficult for the player to recognize which jackpot type is won, and to create a playability that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 38, the description will be continued. The input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 of the second embodiment is provided in the second variable winning device 76 and is driven to open and close forward with the lower side of the second opening / closing plate 76b of the second large winning opening 76a as an axis. The second prize opening solenoid 76c for the purpose is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits a control signal via the input / output port 205.

Further, the input / output port 205 of the second embodiment is connected to a second large winning opening switch 71a provided in the second large winning opening 76a and detecting a ball that has won a prize in the second large winning opening 76a. , MPU201 executes various processes based on the signal output from the second special winning port switch 71a.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, a ball detection mode and the like in each round of the jackpot type “latent probability variation C” of the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 40 shows a large winning opening solenoid 65c, a second winning opening solenoid 76c, a right probability changing region solenoid 73b, and a left probability changing region solenoid in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation C” of the second embodiment. The operation timing of 74b, the detection timing of the sphere in the large winning opening switch 71, the second winning opening switch 71a, the right probabilistic region switch 73d and the left probabilistic region switch 74d, the right probabilistic variation effective flag 203g, the left probabilistic variation effective flag 203h and It is a timing chart which shows each time typically with the setting timing of the probability change transition flag 203i.

As described above, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", a total of 15 rounds of jackpot games are executed, and at the start of odd-numbered rounds, the jackpot solenoid 65c is turned on, the opening / closing plate 65b is opened, and even-numbered rounds are started. Occasionally, the second winning opening solenoid 76c is turned on and the second opening / closing plate 76b is opened. Then, a predetermined condition (in the second embodiment, a maximum of "30 seconds" has elapsed since the opening / closing plates 65b and 76b were opened (see Max t1 in FIG. 40. Max t1 <"30000 ms"), or the large winning opening switch 71. Alternatively, when the second major winning opening switch 71a detects 10 balls each, whichever event) is established, the open large winning opening solenoid 65c or the second major winning opening solenoid 76c is turned off. The opening / closing plate 65b or the second opening / closing plate 76b is closed, and one round ends.

Then, when the jackpot continues when one round is completed, the other variable winning devices 76, 65, which are not the one variable winning devices 65, 76 that were released in the previous round, are released first. It is configured to be opened immediately after the variable winning devices 65 and 76 have been closed. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce (eliminate) the interval time at the time of big hit.

Further, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", the opening / closing pattern of the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation region 74 is "Y2" as in the jackpot type "time saving C". Therefore, in the first round, when the ball of the first count is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, both the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t2 in FIG. 40). t2 = "60 ms"), and it is configured so that it can be recognized whether or not the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, only the right probability variation region solenoid 73b is turned on for 2000 ms (see t3 in FIG. 40. T3 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the time required to reach the right side probability variation region 73 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the second embodiment, "1. 5 seconds ”. See t4 in FIG. 40. T4 <“2000 ms ”.). Therefore, the ball at the third count can flow into the open right probability variation region 73, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation C” is “B”, and the right probability variation region 73 in the third round and the left probability variation region 74 in the sixth round are valid. Set. Therefore, in the first round, all the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probabilistic variation effective flag 203g and the left probabilistic variation effective flag 203h are set to off. Therefore, even if the sphere passes through the right probabilistic region 73 and the sphere is detected by the right probabilistic region switch 73d in the first round, the right probabilistic region 73 is not effectively set, so that the probabilistic transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In the odd rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C" (that is, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds, 9 rounds, 11 rounds, 13 rounds, and 15 rounds), the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b The driving mode of the above is the same as that of the first round (not shown).

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", when the ball of the first count is detected by the second winning opening switch 71a, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation are the same as in the first round. Both the region solenoids 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t5 in FIG. 40. T5 = "60 ms"), and it is possible to recognize whether or not the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. Has been done.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the second winning opening switch 71a, only the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b is turned on by "2000 ms" (see t6 in FIG. 40. T6 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the time required to reach the left side probability variation region 74 after the ball is detected by the second large winning opening switch 71a is within "2 seconds" (that is, "1.8 seconds"). See t7 in FIG. 40. T7 <“2000 ms”.). Therefore, the sphere of the third count can flow into the open left probability variation region 74, and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latent probability variation C” is “B”, and in the second round, all the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g and the right probability variation effective flag 203g and The left probability change effective flag 203h is set to off. Therefore, in the second round, even if the ball passes through the left probability variation region 74 and the ball is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d, the left probability variation region 74 is not effectively set, so that the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In the even-numbered rounds of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C" (that is, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 12 rounds, and 14 rounds), the driving modes of the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b. Is equivalent to the second round (not shown).

Next, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot switch 71, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the same as in the first and second rounds. Both the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t8 in FIG. 40; t8 = "60 ms"), and it is possible to recognize whether or not the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. It is configured in.

Then, in the third round, when the ball of the third count is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, only the right probability variation region solenoid 73b is turned on by "2000 ms" (see t9 in FIG. 40. T9 = "2000 ms". .). In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the time required to reach the right side probability variation region 73 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (that is, "1.5 seconds". See t10 in FIG. 40. T10 <“2000 ms”.). Therefore, the ball at the third count can flow into the open right probability variation region 73, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation C” is “B”, and in the third round, only the right probability variation region 73 is valid, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g is turned on. At the same time, the left probability change effective flag 203h is set to off. Therefore, in the third round, when the ball passes through the right probability variation region 73 and the ball is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d, the right probability variation region 73 is effectively set, so that the probability variation transition flag 203i is turned on. Is set to.

Although not shown, in the sixth round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", only the left probability variation region 74 is valid, the left probability variation effective flag 203h is set to on, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set. It is set to off. Therefore, even if the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on in the third round, the ball can flow into the left probability variation region 74 located on the downstream side of the right probability variation region 73 in the sixth round, and the left probability variation region 74. When the sphere passes through the region 74 and the sphere is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d, the probability variation transition flag 203i is set to ON.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation C", when the ball passes through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 and the ball is detected by the probability variation region switches 73d and 74d, the ball is detected in the third and sixth rounds. Since the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 corresponding to the probabilistic region switches 73d and 74d are effectively set, the probabilistic transition flag 203i is set to ON. Then, at the end of the jackpot, the "probability fluctuation state" is set with reference to the probability variation transition flag 203i.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are alternately used in each round of the predetermined jackpot game (“probability fluctuation A”, “time saving C”, and “latent probability fluctuation C”). And are opened, and one of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 is continuously opened during a predetermined jackpot game. With this configuration, the interval time during the predetermined jackpot game can be eliminated, the jackpot game can be quickly digested, and the game is not delayed, so that the player is awakened. Can be prevented.

In particular, regarding the jackpot types that can be won during the so-called consecutive villas (that is, the jackpot types "probability fluctuation A", "time saving C", and "latent probability fluctuation C"), the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are interrupted. It is possible to realize a quick game desired by a player in a so-called consecutive villa, prevent the game from being awakened, and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, in addition to the two elements of opening or closing the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 and enabling or invalidating the probabilistic regions 73 and 74, the variable winning devices 65 and 76 are opened or closed. Since the granting of the "probability fluctuation state" is determined by the combination of a total of three elements of one element, it is possible to make it difficult to predict that the "probability fluctuation state" will be granted. Therefore, even when the "latent probability variation effect mode" is executed, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

Furthermore, while shortening the interval time of the variable winning devices 65 and 76, the open pattern and the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are different between the "time reduction C" and the "latent probability fluctuation C", so that the player can be made. A "probability fluctuation state" is given by shortening the examination time as to which of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 is open and which of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 is effective. It can be difficult to predict what will be done. Therefore, even when the "latent probability variation effect mode" is executed, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

Next, the jackpot process (S103) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a jackpot process (S103) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the second embodiment. In the jackpot processing (S103) of the second embodiment, the probability variation area opening / closing table 202f (see FIG. 11) and the probability variation region effective table 202g (see FIG. 12) are set according to the jackpot type at the start of the jackpot. In addition, a large winning opening opening / closing table 202h (see FIG. 39) is set.

In the jackpot process (S103) of the second embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot has been won (S403: Yes), the processes of S404 to S410 are executed as in the jackpot process of the first embodiment (see FIG. 26). Then, the round counter setting (S404 to S406), the opening command setting (S407), the opening time setting (S408), the probability change area open / close table 202f (see FIG. 11) setting (S409), and the probability change area valid table. The setting (S410) of 202 g (see FIG. 12) is performed.

Next, the big winning opening opening / closing table 202h (see FIG. 39) is set according to the type of big hit (big hit type) (S501), and the process shifts to S411. Specifically, as described above, if the jackpot type is "time reduction A" and "latent probability fluctuation A", the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 is set to "upper only", and the jackpot type "time reduction B". And, if it is "latent probability fluctuation B", the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 65,76 is set to "bottom only", and if it is the jackpot type "probability fluctuation A", the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 65,76 is set to "up and down". If it is set to "alternate" and the jackpot type is "time saving C" and "latent probability fluctuation C", the opening / closing pattern of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 is set to "lower and upper alternating".

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the second variable winning device 76 is provided in addition to the variable winning device 65, and a predetermined jackpot game (“probability fluctuation A”, “time saving C”” is provided. And, in each round of "latent probability fluctuation C"), the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are alternately opened, and one of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 is continuously opened during a predetermined jackpot game. Configure to do. With this configuration, it is possible to eliminate the interval time during a predetermined jackpot game. Therefore, the jackpot game can be quickly digested, and the game is not delayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from awakening.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the inside of the variable winning device 65 and the inside of the second variable winning device 76 are communicated by a communication passage 77, and the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation are connected to the communication destination flow path. Region 74 is arranged. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of probability variation regions 73 and 74 for each of the variable winning devices 65 and 76, so that the number of parts in the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. ..

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, in addition to the two elements of opening or closing the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 and enabling or invalidating the probabilistic regions 73 and 74, the variable winning devices 65 and 76 are opened or closed. Since the granting of the "probability fluctuation state" is determined by the combination of a total of three elements of one element, it is possible to make it difficult to predict that the "probability fluctuation state" will be granted. Therefore, even when the "latent probability variation effect mode" is executed, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

Further, since the opening / closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 are the same for a plurality of jackpot types (for example, "time saving C" and "latent probability fluctuation C"), the opening / closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 alone are big hits. Configure so that the type cannot be determined. With this configuration, it is difficult (impossible) for the player to recognize which jackpot type the player has won, and the player is made to guess in which game state the game is being played. It can be created to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the variable winning device is used for the jackpot types (that is, the jackpot types “probability fluctuation A”, “time saving C”, and “latent probability fluctuation C”) that can be won in the so-called consecutive villas. The 65 and the second variable winning device 76 can be opened alternately without interruption to realize the quick game desired by the player in the so-called consecutive villa, prevent the game from being awakened, and play the game. Can improve the interest of.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment has the same effect as the first embodiment.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 47. In the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, a plurality of variable winning devices 65 and 76 are provided, and the probabilistic winning devices 73 and 74 are shared by the respective variable winning devices 65 and 76, so that the opening and closing patterns of the probabilistic areas 73 and 74 and By switching the effective pattern in each round of the jackpot game, control is executed whether or not a "probability fluctuation state" is generated after the jackpot ends.

Here, probabilistic regions 73 and 74 are provided inside the large winning opening 65a (second large winning opening 76a), and the right probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73a and the left probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74a (for each of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74). Hereinafter, the right probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73a and the left probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74a may be collectively referred to as "probability changing region opening / closing plate 73a, 74a") and the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73a, 74a is driven to open / close. The right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b (hereinafter, the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b may be collectively referred to as "probability variation region solenoids 73b, 74b") and the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b, 74b. When the switch 73d and the left probabilistic region switch 74d (hereinafter, the right probabilistic region switch 73d and the left probabilistic region switch 74d are collectively referred to as "probability variation region switches 73d, 74d") are provided, the number is small. The above-mentioned parts 73a, 73b, 73d, 74a, 74b, 74d must be installed in the space, which may complicate the design of the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76.

Further, the opening / closing plate 65b, the large winning opening solenoid 65c and the large winning opening switch 71 in the variable winning device 65, the second opening / closing plate 76b, the second large winning opening solenoid 76c and the second large winning opening in the second variable winning device 76. Since the above-mentioned parts 73a, 73b, 73d, 74a, 74b, 74d are provided in addition to the switch 71a, the number of parts used for the pachinko machine 10 may increase, and the manufacturing cost may increase.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, as in the second embodiment, the variable winning devices 65 and 76 of 2 are provided, and the second variable winning device 76 is provided with respect to the guide passage 72 of the variable winning device 65. The communication passage 77 is communicated via the confluence portion 77a, and the position of the confluence portion 77a is the downstream side of the right side probability variation region 73 and the upstream side of the left side probability variation region 74. Then, the spheres can always flow into the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 without providing the probabilistic region opening / closing plates 73a and 74a in the probabilistic regions 73 and 74. With this configuration, the ball that has won the variable winning device 65 flows into the right side probability variation region 73, and the ball that has won the second variable winning device 76 flows into the left side probability variation region 74.

Then, in the case of the jackpot type to which the "probability fluctuation state" is given (that is, "latent probability fluctuation A to C" and "probability fluctuation A"), the variable corresponding to the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set. It is set to be valid in the case of a jackpot type (that is, "time saving A to C") in which a ball is awarded to the winning devices 65 and 76 and a "probability fluctuation state" is given, but a "probability fluctuation state" is not given. The ball is won in the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 that are set to be invalid instead of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74, so that the "probability fluctuation state" is not given.

With this configuration, even if the sphere passes through each probability variation region 73,74, if the probability variation region 73,74 is not effectively set internally, a "probability fluctuation state" occurs after the jackpot ends. Therefore, even when the player visually recognizes the passage of the ball to each probability variation region 73, 74, the probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a, while preventing the occurrence of the “probability fluctuation state” from being confirmed after the end of the jackpot. Since it is not necessary to provide the 74a and the probabilistic region solenoids 73b and 74b, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 have a simple configuration without complicating the design of the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76. It can be easily designed.

Further, since it is not necessary to provide the probabilistic region opening / closing plates 73a and 74a and the probabilistic region solenoids 73b and 74b, the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment and the second embodiment. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first embodiment and the second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 of the third embodiment in a front view.

As shown in FIG. 42, the communication passage 77 of the second variable winning device 76 communicates with the guide passage 72 of the variable winning device 65 via the merging portion 77a, and the position of the merging portion 77a is the right side probability variation region. It is provided on the downstream side of 73 and on the upstream side of the left side probability variation region 74.

The probabilistic region 73,74 of the third embodiment is not provided with the probabilistic region opening / closing plates 73a, 74a and the probabilistic region solenoids 73b, 74b as in the second embodiment. Therefore, the sphere that has reached above each of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 is configured to flow into the probabilistic regions 73 and 74.

That is, in the third embodiment, the ball winning the variable winning device 65 is configured to flow into the right side probability variation region 73, and the ball winning the second variable winning device 76 flows into the left side probability variation region 74. It is configured to do. The variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are configured to share the discharge passage 75.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 43 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment.

Since the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is not provided with the probabilistic region opening / closing plates 73a, 74a and the probabilistic region solenoids 73b, 74b, the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the third embodiment has the first embodiment. And the probability variation region opening / closing table 202f (see FIG. 11) as in the second embodiment is not stored. On the other hand, as in the second embodiment, the large winning opening opening / closing table 202h is stored.

Here, with reference to FIG. 44, the large winning opening opening / closing table 202h of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 44 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the large winning opening opening / closing table 202h of the third embodiment. The big winning opening opening / closing table 202h shown in FIG. 44 shows a variable winning device 65 or a second variable winning device 76 that is opened in each round for each big hit type in each special symbol, and the variable winning device 76 is shown in each round. When the device 65 is opened, it is expressed as "lower", and when the second variable winning device 76 is opened, it is expressed as "upper". In the third embodiment, when one variable winning device 65,76 (for example, the variable winning device 65) is open, the other variable winning device 65,76 (for example, the second variable winning device 76) is opened. Is configured to be closed.

As shown in FIG. 44, in the third embodiment, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are configured to be alternately opened and closed in all the jackpot types. Specifically, each variable winning device 65 corresponding to the jackpot types "time saving A" and "latent probability fluctuation A" of the first special symbol, and "time saving C" and "latent probability fluctuation C" of the second special symbol. , 76 opening / closing pattern "lower and upper alternating" is opened only by the variable winning device 65 in odd rounds (that is, 1 round, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds, 9 rounds, 11 rounds, 13 rounds and 15 rounds). The second variable winning device 76 is configured to be closed during the odd round.

Further, in the opening / closing pattern "lower and upper alternating", only the second variable winning device 76 is opened in even rounds (that is, 2 rounds, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 12 rounds and 14 rounds). The variable winning device 65 is configured to be closed during even rounds.

Next, the opening / closing patterns "upper and lower alternating" of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 corresponding to the jackpot types "time saving B", "latent probability fluctuation B" and "probability fluctuation A" of the first special symbol or the second special symbol are changed. Only the second variable winning device 76 is open in odd rounds (ie, 1 round, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds, 9 rounds, 11 rounds, 13 rounds and 15 rounds), and the variable winning device 65 during the odd rounds. Is configured to be closed.

Further, in the opening / closing pattern "alternate up and down", only the variable winning device 65 is opened in even rounds (that is, 2 rounds, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 12 rounds and 14 rounds), and during the even rounds. Is configured so that the second variable winning device 76 is closed.

Therefore, in all the jackpot types of the third embodiment, one of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 is configured to be open without interruption. With such a configuration, the interval time during the jackpot game can be eliminated, the jackpot game can be quickly digested, and the game is not delayed, so that the player is prevented from being awakened. can do.

Further, the jackpot types "time saving A" and "latent probability fluctuation A", "time saving B" and "latent probability fluctuation B", or "time saving C" and "latent probability fluctuation C" are the variable winning devices 65,76. Since the opening and closing patterns are the same, it is difficult for the player to recognize which jackpot type is won by making it impossible to distinguish the jackpot type only by the opening and closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 (impossible). It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played.

Next, the jackpot process (S103) of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the jackpot process (S103) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the third embodiment. In the jackpot processing (S103) of the third embodiment, at the start of the jackpot, the probability variation area effective table 202 g (see FIG. 12) and the jackpot opening / closing table 202h (see FIG. 44) are set according to the jackpot type. The probability variation area opening / closing table 202f as in the second embodiment is not set.

In the jackpot processing (S103) of the third embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot has been won (S403: Yes), as in the jackpot processing of the first embodiment and the second embodiment (see FIG. 26), S404 to The process of S408 is executed, and the round counter is set (S404 to S406), the opening command is set (S407), and the opening time is set (S408).

Then, the probabilistic region opening / closing table 202f (see FIG. 11) is not set as in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, but the probabilistic region effective table 202g (see FIG. 12) is set (S410).

Next, the big winning opening opening / closing table 202h (see FIG. 44) is set according to the type of big hit (big hit type) (S501), and the process shifts to S411. Specifically, as described above, if the jackpot types are "time saving A", "latent probability fluctuation A", "time saving C" and "latent probability fluctuation C", the opening / closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 are set to "below". If it is set to "upper alternating" and the jackpot types are "time saving B", "latent probability fluctuation B" and "probability fluctuation A", the opening / closing patterns of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 are set to "upper and lower alternating".

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the open setting process (S422) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the open setting process (S422) of the third embodiment. In the open setting process (S422) of the third embodiment, either the variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 76 is referred to with reference to the large winning opening opening / closing table 202h (see FIG. 44) set at the start of the big hit. Set the opening of.

In the opening setting process (S422) of the third embodiment, first, since it is the timing to open the large winning opening 65a or the second large winning opening 76a, either the large winning opening 65a or the second large winning opening 76a is opened. Therefore, the variable winning device 65 or the second variable winning device 76 is set to open based on the set large winning opening opening / closing table 202h (S511), and the process shifts to S432. By performing this opening setting, either the large winning opening solenoid 65c or the second winning opening solenoid 76c is driven, and the opening / closing plate 65b or the second opening / closing plate 76b corresponding to the driven solenoids 65c and 76c is moved. It is opened so that the ball can flow into the large winning opening 65a or the second large winning opening 76a.

Next, the processing during opening (S424) of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the opening process (S424) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the third embodiment. In the opening process (S424) of the third embodiment, since the probability variation region opening / closing plates 73a and 74a are not provided, the number of counts is counted when the large winning opening switch 71 or the second large winning opening switch 71a is detected. It is possible to reduce the control load by eliminating the need for the process of confirming.

In the opening processing (S424) of the third embodiment, when it is determined in the processing of S446 that the opening time of any of the large winning openings 65a and 76a has not elapsed (S446: No), then the large winning opening 65a, 76a. Determine whether the ball has won the winning opening 65a and the large winning opening switch 71 has been turned on, or whether the ball has won the second winning opening 76a and the second winning opening switch 71a has been turned on. (S515).

In the process of S515, if the big winning opening switch 71 or the second big winning opening switch 71a is turned on (S515: Yes), the ball has won the big winning opening 65a or the second big winning opening 76a. The value of the winning counter is subtracted by 1 (S449), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter subtracted by 1 is greater than "0" (S454). If the value of the winning counter is not greater than "0" (S454: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter is "0" or less, 10 balls are placed in the large winning opening 65a or the second large winning opening 76a. Since the conditions for closing the large winning opening 65a or the second large winning opening 76a are satisfied by winning individual prizes, the process shifts to S455 in order to close the large winning opening 65a or the second large winning opening 76a.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the variable winning devices 65 and 76 of 2 are provided, and the communication passage of the second variable winning device 76 with respect to the guide passage 72 of the variable winning device 65. The 77 is communicated via the confluence portion 77a, and the position of the confluence portion 77a is the downstream side of the right side probability variation region 73 and the upstream side of the left side probability variation region 74. Then, the spheres can always flow into the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 without providing the probabilistic region opening / closing plates 73a and 74a in the probabilistic regions 73 and 74. With this configuration, the ball that has won the variable winning device 65 flows into the right side probability variation region 73, and the ball that has won the second variable winning device 76 flows into the left side probability variation region 74. Then, in the case of the jackpot type to which the "probability fluctuation state" is given (that is, "latent probability fluctuation A to C" and "probability fluctuation A"), the variable corresponding to the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set. A "probability fluctuation state" is given by having the winning devices 65 and 76 win a prize and passing the ball through the validly set probability variation regions 73 and 74. On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot type (that is, "time saving A to C") that does not give the "probability fluctuation state", the probability variation area 73 that is set to be invalid instead of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are set to be valid. , 74, the variable winning devices 65 and 76 are made to win the ball, the ball is not passed through the probabilistic region 73 and 74 which is set to be valid, and the ball is sent to the probabilistic region 73 and 74 which is set to be invalid. By passing it, it is configured so that the "probability fluctuation state" is not given.

With this configuration, even if the sphere passes through each of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74, if the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 are not effectively set internally, a "probability fluctuation state" occurs after the jackpot ends. Therefore, even when the player visually recognizes the passage of the ball through the probabilistic regions 73 and 74, the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73a, while preventing the occurrence of the "probability fluctuation state" from being confirmed after the end of the jackpot. It is not necessary to provide the 74a and the probabilistic region solenoids 73b and 74b. As a result, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 can be easily designed with a simple configuration without complicating the design of the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, it is not necessary to provide the probabilistic region opening / closing plates 73a, 74a and the probabilistic region solenoids 73b, 74b, so that the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced and the manufacturing cost is reduced. can do.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, since the probabilistic region opening / closing plates 73a and 74a are not provided, the large winning opening switch 71 for determining the opening / closing timing of the probabilistic region opening / closing plates 73a and 74a Alternatively, when the second special winning opening switch 71a is detected, the process of confirming the count number becomes unnecessary, and the control load can be reduced.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment has the same effect as the first embodiment or the second embodiment.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 52. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the right-side probabilistic region 73 and the left-side probabilistic region 74 are provided in the large winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, and the ball to the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set is provided. Based on the passage, it is configured to give a "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot ends.

Here, the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are provided inside the large winning opening 65a, and the probability variation region opening / closing plates 73a and 74a and the probability variation region opening / closing plates 73a and 74a are opened and closed for each of the probability variation regions 73 and 74. When a plurality of drive mechanisms with the region solenoids 73b and 74b are provided, each component 73a, 73b, 74a, 74b must be installed in a small space, which may complicate the design of the variable winning device 65. ..

Further, since the above parts 73a, 73b, 74a, 74b are provided in addition to the opening / closing plate 65b, the large winning opening solenoid 65c, and the large winning opening switch 71 in the variable winning device 65, the number of parts used in the pachinko machine 10 increases. However, the manufacturing cost may increase.

Further, since a plurality of drive mechanisms are arranged in the probability variation regions 73 and 74, maintenance work is required for each of the drive mechanisms, which may increase the maintenance man-hours.

Further, when the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 are opened and closed by a plurality of drive mechanisms, for example, both probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 may continue to be opened due to a failure or the like, or the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 may become open. It will continue to be closed, and based on the passage of the ball to the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set, there is a risk that the playability of imparting a "probability fluctuation state" after the end of the jackpot will collapse.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the right side probability change area 73 and the left side probability change area 74 are provided by the drive mechanism 1 composed of the probability change area opening / closing motor 78a, the drive gear 78b, and the probability change area opening / closing plate 78c. The probabilistic region opening / closing motor 78a is driven in the forward rotation or the reverse direction so that the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 78c can be slidably driven in a direction parallel to the guide passage 72.

Specifically, when the probabilistic region opening / closing motor 78a is driven in the normal direction, the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 78c slides to the downstream side of the guide passage 72 to open the right probabilistic region 73 and open the right probabilistic region. Let the ball flow into 73. On the other hand, when the probabilistic region opening / closing motor 78a is reversely driven, the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 78c slides to the upstream side of the guide passage 72 to open the left probabilistic region 74 and push the ball to the left probabilistic region 74. Inflow.

With this configuration, two probability variation areas (right side probability variation area 73 and left side probability variation area 74) are provided in the big winning opening 65a, and the probability variation area opening / closing motor 78a is provided for each round of the jackpot according to the jackpot type. Is driven in the forward or reverse direction to allow the ball to flow into either of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74, and the valid or invalid settings of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 are switched (internally) in a state in which the player cannot recognize them. To control. Then, when the ball passes through the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set during the jackpot, a "probability fluctuation state" is generated after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, even if the sphere passes through the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 that are set to be invalid, the "probability fluctuation state" is not generated after the end of the jackpot.

With this configuration, the probability variation regions 73 and 74 can be opened or closed by the drive mechanism 78 of 1, so that the design of the variable winning device 65 is not complicated, and the entire variable winning device 65 can be opened or closed. The configuration can be simplified and easily designed.

Further, since it is not necessary to open or close the probability variation regions 73 and 74 by the drive mechanism 78 of 1 and to open or close the probability variation regions 73 and 74 by a plurality of drive mechanisms, the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. , Manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Further, since the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are opened and closed or closed by the drive mechanism 78 of 1, the maintenance man-hours can be reduced by performing the maintenance work of only the drive mechanism 78 of 1.

Further, by opening and closing the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 by the drive mechanism 78 of 1, when one of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 is opened, the other probabilistic regions 74 and 73 can be closed without fail. Therefore, since both probabilistic regions 73 and 74 are opened due to a failure or the like, a "probability fluctuation state" is given after the jackpot ends based on the passage of the ball through the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the playability is disrupted, and to realize a novel playability.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first to third embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to third embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the variable winning device 65 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48A is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 of the fourth embodiment in a front view.

As shown in FIG. 48A, in the fourth embodiment, one drive mechanism 78 is provided between the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation region 74 provided in the guide passage 72 of the variable winning device 65. Has been done.

The drive mechanism 78 includes a probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a (see FIG. 49) built in the front view depth direction of the wall portion located between the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation region 74, and the probability variation region opening / closing motor. It includes a drive gear 78b that is rotationally driven by the drive gear 78a, and a probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c provided with a transmission gear that meshes with the drive gear 78b.

The probabilistic region opening / closing motor 78a (see FIG. 49) is composed of a stepping motor that can be driven in a forward rotation drive (counterclockwise) and a reverse rotation drive (clockwise). Therefore, when the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is driven in the forward rotation, the drive gear 78b is also rotationally driven in the counterclockwise direction, and when the motor 78a is driven in the reverse direction, the drive gear 78b is also rotationally driven in the clockwise direction.

The drive gear 78b is connected to the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a, and the drive gear 78b is also rotationally driven as the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is driven. The drive gear 78b is meshed with a transmission gear provided on the lower surface of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c, which will be described later.

In the initial state, the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 78c is configured such that the right side portion of the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 78c closes the right probabilistic region 73 and the left side portion of the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 78c closes the left probabilistic region 74. Has been done. The probabilistic region opening / closing plate 78c is arranged so that its upper surface is flush with the bottom surface (rolling surface of the sphere) of the guide passage 72. Further, a transmission gear that meshes with the drive gear 78b is provided on the lower surface of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c, and the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c can be slidably driven as the drive gear 78b is rotationally driven. Has been done.

In the fourth embodiment, when the probabilistic region opening / closing motor 78a is driven in the forward rotation (counterclockwise) and the drive gear 78b is rotationally driven in the counterclockwise direction, the probabilistic region is meshed with the drive gear 78b. The opening / closing plate 78c is slid-driven to the downstream side of the guide passage 72 so that the right side probability variation region 73 is opened. On the other hand, when the probabilistic region opening / closing motor 78a is reversely driven (clockwise) and the drive gear 78b is rotationally driven clockwise, the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 78c meshed with the drive gear 78b is a guide passage. It is configured to slide drive to the upstream side of 72 and open the left side probability variation region 74.

Here, the inflow pattern of the sphere flowing down in the guide passage 72 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 (b) to 48 (d). FIG. 48B shows the inside of the guide passage 72 when the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c is slid-driven to the downstream side, the right probability variation region 73 is in the open state, and the left probability variation region 74 is in the closed state. FIG. 48 (c) is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view for explaining the behavior of the sphere flowing down the sphere. FIG. 48 (c) shows a state in which the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c is slid-driven to the upstream side, and the left probability variation region 74 is in an open state. FIG. 48 (d) is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view for explaining the behavior of the sphere flowing down in the guide passage 72 when the right side probability variation region 73 is in the closed state, and FIG. 48 (d) shows the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c. Is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view for explaining the behavior of the sphere flowing down in the guide passage 72 when the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation region 74 are both in the closed state.

As shown in FIG. 48 (b), when a big hit is won and a special game state occurs, the opening / closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened so that the ball can flow into the big winning opening 65a. Then, when the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c is slid to the downstream side and the right probability variation region 73 is in the open state, the ball flowing into the large winning opening 65a is first detected by the large winning opening switch 71, and then. , Flow down the guide passage 72. Since the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 78c is slid-driven to the downstream side by the probabilistic region opening / closing motor 78a (see FIG. 49), the right probabilistic region 73 is open and the ball moves to the right probabilistic region passage 73c. Inflow. After that, the sphere is detected by the right probabilistic region switch 73d embedded in the right probabilistic region passage 73c. The ball detected by the right probability variable region switch 73d is discharged to the outside of the variable winning device 65 (on the back side of the game board 13) by a discharge path (not shown).

Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (c), when the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c is slid-driven to the upstream side and the left probability variation region 74 is in the open state, the ball flowing into the large winning opening 65a first. It is detected by the grand prize opening switch 71, and then flows down the guide passage 72. Then, the upper surface of the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 78c that closes the right probabilistic region 73 is rolled, and the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 78c is slid-driven to the upstream side by the probabilistic region opening / closing motor 78a (see FIG. 49). Therefore, the left probabilistic region 74 is open, and the ball flows into the left probabilistic region passage 74c. After that, the sphere is detected by the left probabilistic region switch 74d embedded in the left probabilistic region passage 74c. The ball detected by the left probability variable region switch 74d is discharged to the outside of the variable winning device 65 (on the back side of the game board 13) by a discharge path (not shown).

Next, as shown in FIG. 48 (d), when the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c was in the initial position and both the right probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region 74 were in a closed state, the flow into the large winning opening 65a. The ball is first detected by the large winning opening switch 71, and then flows down the guide passage 72. Then, it rolls on the upper surface of the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c, passes above the right probability variation region 73 and the left probability variation region 74, and is outside the variable winning device 65 (the back surface of the game board 13) from the discharge passage 75 provided on the downstream side. It is discharged to the side).

With this configuration, the probability variation regions 73 and 74 can be opened or closed by the drive mechanism 78 of 1, so that the design of the variable winning device 65 is not complicated, and the entire variable winning device 65 can be opened or closed. The configuration can be simplified and easily designed. Further, since it is not necessary to open or close the probability variation regions 73 and 74 by the drive mechanism 78 of 1 and to open or close the probability variation regions 73 and 74 by a plurality of drive mechanisms, the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. , Manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, since the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are opened and closed or closed by the drive mechanism 78 of 1, the maintenance man-hours can be reduced by performing the maintenance work of only the drive mechanism 78 of 1. Further, by opening and closing the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 by the drive mechanism 78 of 1, when one of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 is opened, the other probabilistic regions 74 and 73 can be closed without fail. Therefore, since both probabilistic regions 73 and 74 are opened due to a failure or the like, a "probability fluctuation state" is given after the jackpot ends based on the passage of the ball through the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the playability is disrupted, and to realize a novel playability.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 49 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment.

The ROM 202 of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment stores a probability variation region opening / closing table 202f for setting a drive pattern of the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a.

Further, a probabilistic region opening / closing motor 78a for sliding driving the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 78c is connected to the input / output port 205 of the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment, and the MPU 201 is connected to the input / output port 205 via the input / output port 205. Send a control signal. In the fourth embodiment, the probability-changing area opening / closing table 202f set based on the jackpot type is referred to at the start of each round, and the probability-changing area opening / closing motor 78a is driven in the forward or reverse direction to drive either the probability-changing area or the probability-changing area. Open 73 and 74. Then, when a predetermined time (“6000 ms” in the fourth embodiment) elapses after the forward rotation drive or the reverse rotation drive, the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is returned to the initial position, and the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are combined. Configure to close.

Here, with reference to FIG. 50, the opening / closing patterns of the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 for each jackpot type will be described. FIG. 50 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the probability variation region opening / closing table 202f according to the fourth embodiment. The probability variation region opening / closing table 202f shown in FIG. 50 shows the drive pattern of the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a for each jackpot type in each special symbol, and the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is driven in the forward rotation (counterclockwise) for each round. When the right side probability variation area 73 is opened by (clockwise), it is expressed as "positive", and when the probability variation area opening / closing motor 78a is reversely driven (clockwise) and the left side probability variation area 74 is opened, it is expressed as "positive". It is expressed as "reverse". In the fourth embodiment, when one probability variation region 73,74 (for example, right side probability variation region 73) is open, the other probability variation region 74, 73 (for example, left side probability variation region 74) is always closed. It is configured to be.

As shown in FIG. 50, the opening / closing patterns “X3” of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 corresponding to the jackpot types “time saving A” and “latent probability fluctuation A”, which are jackpots for a maximum of 7 rounds of the first special symbol, are odd numbers. In the rounds (that is, 1st round, 3rd round, 5th round, and 7th round), the probabilistic region opening / closing motor 78a is driven in the forward direction, the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 78c is slid to the downstream side, and the right probabilistic region 73 is opened. As a result, the ball can pass through the right side probability variation region 73, and the left side probability variation region 74 is closed by the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c so that the ball cannot pass through the left side probability variation region 74.

Further, in the opening / closing pattern "X3", in the even-numbered rounds (that is, 2nd round, 4th round and 6th round), the probabilistic region opening / closing motor 78a is reversely driven and the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 78c is slid to the upstream side to the left side. By opening the probability variation region 74, the ball can pass through the left probability variation region 74, and the right probability variation region 73 is closed by the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c so that the ball cannot pass through the right probability variation region 73.

That is, in the opening / closing pattern "X3", the ball can pass through the right side probability variation region 73 in the first round of the jackpot, the ball can pass through the left side probability variation region 74 in the next round (that is, the second round), and then the jackpot Until the end (that is, the end of the 7th round), the ball can alternately pass through the right side probability change area 73 or the left side probability change area 74 for each round. Therefore, the number of passable rounds to the right side probability variation region 73 is "4", and the number of passable rounds to the left side probability variation region 74 is "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 50, the opening / closing patterns “X4” of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 corresponding to the jackpot types “time saving B” and “latent probability fluctuation B”, which are jackpots for a maximum of 7 rounds of the first special symbol, are , In odd rounds (that is, 1 round, 3 rounds, 5 rounds and 7 rounds), the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is reversely driven, the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c is slid to the upstream side, and the left probability variation region 74 is opened. As a result, the ball can pass through the left side probability variation region 74, and the right side probability variation region 73 is closed by the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c so that the ball cannot pass through the right side probability variation region 73.

Further, in the opening / closing pattern "X4", in the even-numbered rounds (that is, 2nd round, 4th round and 6th round), the probabilistic region opening / closing motor 78a is driven in the forward direction and the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 78c is slid to the downstream side. By opening the right probabilistic region 73, the ball can pass through the right probabilistic region 73, and the left probabilistic region 74 is closed by the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 78c so that the ball cannot pass through the left probabilistic region 74. ..

That is, in the opening / closing pattern "X4", the ball can pass through the left probabilistic region 74 in the first round of the jackpot, the ball can pass through the right probabilistic region 73 in the next round (that is, the second round), and then the jackpot Until the end (that is, the end of the 7th round), the ball can alternately pass through the left side probability change area 74 or the right side probability change area 73 for each round. Therefore, the number of passable rounds to the left side probability variation region 74 is "4", and the number of passable rounds to the right side probability variation region 73 is "3".

Next, as shown in FIG. 50, the opening / closing pattern “Y3” of each probability variation region 73, 74 corresponding to the jackpot type “probability fluctuation A”, which is a jackpot of a maximum of 15 rounds of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, is In odd-numbered rounds (that is, 1 round, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds, 9 rounds, 11 rounds, 13 rounds, and 15 rounds), the probabilistic region opening / closing motor 78a is driven in reverse and the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 78c is on the upstream side. By sliding to the left side and opening the left side probability change area 74, the ball can pass through the left side probability change area 74, and the right side probability change area 73 is closed by the probability change area opening / closing plate 78c so that the ball passes through the right side probability change area 73. It becomes impossible to pass.

Further, in the opening / closing pattern "Y3", the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is driven in the forward direction to probabilistically change in even-numbered rounds (that is, 2 rounds, 4 rounds, 6 rounds, 8 rounds, 10 rounds, 12 rounds and 14 rounds). The area opening / closing plate 78c is slid to the downstream side, and the right side probabilistic region 73 is opened, so that the ball can pass through the right side probabilistic region 73, and the left side probabilistic region 74 is closed by the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 78c. The ball cannot pass through the left probabilistic region 74.

That is, in the opening / closing pattern "Y3", the ball can pass through the left probabilistic region 74 in the first round of the jackpot, the ball can pass through the right probabilistic region 73 in the next round (that is, the second round), and then the jackpot. Until the end (that is, the end of the 15th round), the ball can alternately pass through the left side probability change area 74 or the right side probability change area 73 for each round. Therefore, the number of passable rounds to the left side probability variation region 74 is "8", and the number of passable rounds to the right side probability variation region 73 is "7".

Next, as shown in FIG. 50, the opening / closing patterns "Y4" of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 corresponding to the jackpot types "time reduction C" and "latent probability fluctuation C", which are jackpots of a maximum of 15 rounds of the second special symbol, are , In odd rounds (that is, 1 round, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, 7 rounds, 9 rounds, 11 rounds, 13 rounds and 15 rounds), the probabilistic region opening / closing motor 78a is driven in the forward direction to form the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 78c. By sliding driving to the downstream side and opening the right probabilistic region 73, the ball can pass through the right probabilistic region 73, and the left probabilistic region 74 is closed by the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 78c to open the left probabilistic region 74. The ball cannot pass.

Further, in the opening / closing pattern "Y4", in the even-numbered rounds (that is, 2nd round, 4th round, 6th round, 8th round, 10th round, 12th round and 14th round), the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is reversely driven to drive the probability variation region. The opening / closing plate 78c slides to the upstream side and the left side probability variation region 74 is opened, so that the ball can pass through the left side probability variation region 74, and the right side probability variation region 73 is closed by the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c to the right side. The ball cannot pass through the probability variation region 73.

That is, in the opening / closing pattern "Y4", the ball can pass through the right side probability variation region 73 in the first round of the jackpot, the ball can pass through the left side probability variation region 74 in the next round (that is, the second round), and then the jackpot Until the end (that is, the end of the 15th round), the ball can alternately pass through the right side probability change area 73 or the left side probability change area 74 for each round. Therefore, the number of passable rounds to the right side probability variation region 73 is "8", and the number of passable rounds to the left side probability variation region 74 is "7".

In this way, the jackpot types (that is, the jackpot types "time reduction A" and "latent probability fluctuation A", and the jackpot type "time reduction" have the same opening and closing patterns of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 accompanying the drive pattern of the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a. "B" and "latent probability fluctuation B", and jackpot types "time saving C" and "latent probability fluctuation C") are provided, respectively, so that the jackpot type cannot be discriminated only by the opening / closing patterns of the respective probability variation regions 73 and 74. Therefore, it is difficult (impossible) to make it difficult for the player to recognize which jackpot type is won, and the game is created so that the player can guess in which game state the game is being played. You can improve your interest.

Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the open setting process (S422) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the open setting process (S422) of the fourth embodiment. In the opening setting process (S422) of the fourth embodiment, the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is driven in the forward rotation or the reverse rotation with reference to the probability variation region opening / closing table 202f (see FIG. 50) set at the start of the jackpot.

In the open setting process (S422) of the fourth embodiment, the processes of S431 to S434 are performed in the same manner as the open setting process (S422) of the first embodiment, the large winning opening opening setting is performed (S431), and the winning counter is set. Set "10" (S432), set the opening time (S433), and set the opening command (S434).

Next, depending on the type of jackpot (big hit type), the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is driven forward or reverse based on the probability variation region opening / closing table 202f (see FIG. 50) set at the start of the jackpot (see FIG. 50). S521), one of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 is opened and the other probabilistic regions 74 and 73 are closed, and the process shifts to S436.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the opening process (S424) of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the opening process (S424) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the fourth embodiment. In the opening process (S424) of the fourth embodiment, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (“6000 ms” in the fourth embodiment) has elapsed from the start of driving the probabilistic region opening / closing motor 78a, and the operation is performed. When the predetermined time has elapsed, the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is returned to the initial position, and the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are closed together.

In the opening process (S424) of the fourth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, first, the processes of S441 to S445 are performed, and the probability variation transition flag 203i is set based on the passage of the sphere to the probability variation regions 73 and 74. Is performed, and the process shifts to S531.

In the process of S531, it is determined whether or not "6000 ms" has elapsed since the probabilistic region opening / closing motor 78a started to be driven by S521 of the open setting process (see FIG. 51) described above (S531). As a result of the determination, if "6000 ms" has elapsed from the start of driving the probabilistic region opening / closing motor 78a (S531: Yes), the probabilistic region opening / closing motor 78a is returned to the initial position (S532), and the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 are both set. Close and shift processing to S446. On the other hand, if "6000 ms" has not elapsed from the start of driving the probabilistic region opening / closing motor 78a (S531: No), the process of S532 is skipped and the process shifts to S446.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation region 73 are provided by the drive mechanism 1 composed of the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a, the probability variation region opening / closing plate 78c, and the like. By configuring the 74 to be closed at the same time and driving the probabilistic region opening / closing motor 78a in the forward or reverse direction, the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 78c can be slidably driven in a direction parallel to the guide passage 72. In addition, two probability variation regions (right side probability variation region 73 and left side probability variation region 74) are provided in the jackpot 65a, and the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is driven or reversed in each round of the jackpot according to the jackpot type. The ball is driven to flow into one of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74, and the valid or invalid setting of each probabilistic region 73 and 74 is controlled to be switched (internally) in a state in which the player cannot recognize it. Then, when the ball passes through the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set during the jackpot, a "probability fluctuation state" is generated after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, even if the sphere passes through the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 that are set to be invalid, the "probability fluctuation state" is not generated after the end of the jackpot.

With this configuration, the probability variation regions 73 and 74 can be opened or closed by the drive mechanism 78 of 1, so that the design of the variable winning device 65 is not complicated, and the entire variable winning device 65 can be opened or closed. The configuration can be simplified and easily designed.

Further, since it is not necessary to open or close the probability variation regions 73 and 74 by the drive mechanism 78 of 1 and to open or close the probability variation regions 73 and 74 by a plurality of drive mechanisms, the number of parts of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced. , Manufacturing cost can be reduced.

Further, since the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are opened and closed or closed by the drive mechanism 78 of 1, the maintenance work of only the drive mechanism 78 of 1 can be performed, and the maintenance man-hours of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, when one of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 is opened by opening and closing the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 by sliding the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 78c, the other probabilistic regions 74 and 73 must be closed. Can be done. Therefore, since both probabilistic regions 73 and 74 are opened due to a failure or the like, a "probability fluctuation state" is given after the jackpot ends based on the passage of the ball through the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the playability is disrupted, and to realize a novel playability.

Further, when the probabilistic region opening / closing plate 78c is not driven (initial position), both the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 are closed, so that the probabilistic region opening / closing motor 78a does not operate normally due to a failure or the like. Even if there is, both probabilistic regions 73 and 74 can be closed, and even in an abnormal state, the inflow of balls into the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 can be prevented. Therefore, even if the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are effectively set at the time of abnormality, it is possible to prevent an unexpected disadvantage from occurring in the amusement park.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment has the same effect as the first to third embodiments.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, the right-side probabilistic region 73 and the left-side probabilistic region 74 are provided in the large winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65, and the ball to the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set is provided. Based on the passage, it is configured to give a "probability fluctuation state" after the jackpot ends.

Here, there is a possibility that the ball that won the prize in the large winning opening 65a in the round immediately before the running round remains (retained) in the guide passage 72. In particular, when the two variable winning devices 65 and 76 are used to digest a jackpot game with no (small) interval time between rounds as in the second embodiment, the above-mentioned event occurs frequently.

However, when the above event occurs, the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are effectively set at the same time as the start of each round, so that the jackpot type that does not give the "probability fluctuation state" is initially won. In spite of this, the ball that won the prize in the previous round has passed through the validly set probability variation areas 73 and 74 that cannot normally be passed, and the game value is unexpected due to the game specifications. Granted, there is a risk of unexpected loss in the amusement park.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 are set to be valid not at the start of the round but after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening 65a is opened. Specifically, the probabilistic region solenoids 73b and 74b are driven at the same time as the winning of the third ball after the large winning opening 65a is opened, and at the same time, the probabilistic region 73 and 74 are effectively set.

With this configuration, even though the jackpot type that does not give the "probability fluctuation state" is initially won, the ball that won the previous round is effectively set so that it cannot normally pass. It is possible to make it difficult for an event that passes through the probable change areas 73 and 74 to occur, to give the player the game value as expected in the game specifications, and to prevent an unexpected loss from occurring in the game field. Can be done.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 in the first to fourth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to fourth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 53, a ball detection mode and the like in each round of the jackpot type “time saving A” of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 shows the operation timings of the big winning opening solenoid 65c, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b, and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b in the first and second rounds of the jackpot type “time saving A” of the first special symbol of the fifth embodiment. , The time of each of the ball detection timings of the large winning opening switch 71, the right probability variation area switch 73d and the left probability variation area switch 74d, and the setting timings of the right probability variation effective flag 203g, the left probability variation effective flag 203h and the probability variation transition flag 203i is schematically modeled. It is a timing chart shown in the above.

In the jackpot type "time saving A" of the fifth embodiment, a total of seven rounds of jackpot games are executed as in the first embodiment, and the jackpot solenoid 65c is turned on and the opening / closing plate 65b is opened at the start of each round. Will be done. Then, 10 balls are detected by a predetermined condition (in the fifth embodiment, a maximum of "30 seconds" has elapsed from the opening (see Max t1 in FIG. 53. Max t1 <"30000 ms"), or by the large winning opening switch 71. When any one of the events) is established, the large winning opening solenoid 65c is turned off, the opening / closing plate 65b is closed, and one round is completed.

Further, in the jackpot type "time saving A", since the opening / closing pattern of the right side probability variation area 73 and the left side probability variation area 74 is "X1", the ball of the first count was detected by the large winning opening switch 71 in the first round. In this case, both the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are turned on by "60 ms" (see t2 in FIG. 53; t2 = "60 ms"), and the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are normal. It is configured so that it can be recognized whether or not it can be driven.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, only the right probability variation region solenoid 73b is turned on by "2000 ms" (see t3 in FIG. 53. T3 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the time required to reach the right side probability variation region 73 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the fifth embodiment, "1. 5 seconds ”. See t4 in FIG. 53. T4 <“2000 ms ”.). Therefore, the ball at the third count can flow into the open right probability variation region 73, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “time saving A” is “A”, and the right probability variation region 73 in the second round and the left probability variation region 74 in the fifth round are effectively set. To. Therefore, in the first round, all the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probabilistic variation effective flag 203g and the left probabilistic variation effective flag 203h are set to off. Therefore, even if the sphere passes through the right probabilistic region 73 and the sphere is detected by the right probabilistic region switch 73d in the first round, the right probabilistic region 73 is not effectively set, so that the probabilistic transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In the odd-numbered rounds of the jackpot type "time saving A" (that is, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, and 7 rounds), the driving modes of the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are the same as those in the first round.

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "time saving A", when the ball of the first count is detected by the big winning opening switch 71, the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are generated as in the first round. Both are turned on for "60 ms" (see t5 in FIG. 53; t5 = "60 ms"), and are configured to be recognizable as to whether or not the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, only the left probability variation region solenoid 74b is turned on by "2000 ms" (see t6 in FIG. 53. T6 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, it takes "2 seconds" or less (that is, "1.6 seconds") to reach the left side probability variation region 74 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71. See t7 in FIG. 53. T7 <“2000 ms”.). Therefore, the sphere of the third count can flow into the open left probability variation region 74, and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, when the probability variation effective regions 73 and 74 are effectively set, when the third count ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, the corresponding probability variation effective flags 203g and 203h are set to ON. It is configured as follows. In other words, even in the round in which the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are effectively set, the probability variation is during the period in which at least three balls flow into the large winning opening 65a (see t8 in FIG. 53) after the round is started. The valid flags 203g and 203h are set to off. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, since the ball firing interval is "0.6 seconds", the probability variation effective flags 203g and 203h are turned off for at least "1.8 seconds" after the large winning opening 65a is opened. You can leave it as it is.

In particular, when the first-count ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 in each round, the probability variation area opening / closing plates 73a and 74a are configured to be opened "60 ms" for operation check. If the ball of the round is left (retained) in the guide passage 72, the ball may flow into the open probability variation regions 73 and 74.

Therefore, the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are set to be valid not at the start of the round but after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the large winning opening 65a was opened. Specifically, the probabilistic region solenoids 73b and 74b are driven at the same time as the winning of the third ball after the large winning opening 65a is opened, and at the same time, the probabilistic region 73 and 74 are effectively set. With this configuration, the ball that won the prize in the previous round (that is, the first round) even though it was initially won in the jackpot type "Time saving A" that does not give the "probability fluctuation state" It is possible to eliminate as much as possible the event of passing through the effectively set probability variation regions 73 and 74, which cannot normally pass through. Therefore, while confirming the operation of the probabilistic region opening / closing plates 73a and 74a, it is possible to give the player a game value as expected in the game specifications and prevent an unexpected loss from occurring in the game field.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, a ball detection mode and the like in each round of the jackpot type “latent probability variation A” of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 shows the operation timings of the large winning opening solenoid 65c, the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b, and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation A”, and the large winning opening switch 71, right. It is a timing chart schematically showing each time of the detection timing of the sphere in the probability variation region switch 73d and the left probability variation region switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag 203g, the left probability variation effective flag 203h, and the probability variation transition flag 203i. ..

In the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" of the fifth embodiment, a total of seven rounds of jackpot games are executed as in the first embodiment, and the jackpot solenoid 65c is turned on at the start of each round to open / close plate 65b. Is released. Then, 10 balls are detected by a predetermined condition (in the fifth embodiment, a maximum of "30 seconds" has elapsed from the opening (see Max t1 in FIG. 54. Max t1 <"30000 ms"), or by the large winning opening switch 71. When any one of the events) is established, the large winning opening solenoid 65c is turned off, the opening / closing plate 65b is closed, and one round is completed.

Further, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the opening / closing pattern of the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation region 74 is "X1" as in the jackpot type "time reduction A", so that the jackpot in the first round When the first count ball is detected by the switch 71, both the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are turned on by "60 ms" (see t2 in FIG. 54. T2 = "60 ms"), and the right side. It is configured so that it can be recognized whether or not the probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

At this time, since the probability variation effective flags 203g and 203h are still set to off, even if a sphere flows into the probability variation regions 73 and 74 at this timing, the on condition of the probability variation transition flag 203i is not satisfied.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, only the right probability variation region solenoid 73b is turned on by "2000 ms" (see t3 in FIG. 54. T3 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the time required to reach the right side probability variation region 73 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the fifth embodiment, "1. 5 seconds ”. See t4 in FIG. 54. T4 <“2000 ms ”.). Therefore, the ball at the third count can flow into the open right probability variation region 73, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation A” is “B”, and the right probability variation region 73 in the third round and the left probability variation region 74 in the sixth round are valid. Set. Therefore, in the first round, all the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probabilistic variation effective flag 203g and the left probabilistic variation effective flag 203h are set to off. Therefore, even if the sphere passes through the right probabilistic region 73 and the sphere is detected by the right probabilistic region switch 73d in the first round, the right probabilistic region 73 is not effectively set, so that the probabilistic transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In the odd rounds (that is, 3 rounds, 5 rounds, and 7 rounds) of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the driving modes of the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are the same as those in the first round. ..

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", when the first count ball is detected by the big winning opening switch 71, the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid are the same as in the first round. Both 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t5 in FIG. 54; t5 = "60 ms"), and the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are configured to be recognizable as to whether or not they can be driven normally. There is.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, only the left probability variation region solenoid 74b is turned on by "2000 ms" (see t6 in FIG. 54. T6 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, it takes "2 seconds" or less (that is, "1.6 seconds") to reach the left side probability variation region 74 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71. See t7 in FIG. 54. T7 <“2000 ms”.). Therefore, the sphere of the third count can flow into the open left probability variation region 74, and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation A” is “B”, and in the second round, all the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g and the right probability variation effective flag 203g and The left probability change effective flag 203h is set to off. Therefore, in the second round, even if the ball passes through the left probability variation region 74 and the ball is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d, the left probability variation region 74 is not effectively set, so that the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In the even-numbered rounds (that is, the 4th round and the 6th round) of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the driving modes of the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are the same as those in the second round.

Next, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", when the first count ball is detected by the jackpot switch 71, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the same as in the first and second rounds. Both the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are turned on for "60 ms" (see t8 in FIG. 54; t8 = "60 ms"), and it is possible to recognize whether or not the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. It is configured in.

Then, in the third round, only the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b is turned on by "2000 ms" (see t9 in FIG. 54. T9 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the time required to reach the right side probability variation region 73 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (that is, "1.5 seconds". See t10 in FIG. 54. T10 <“2000 ms”.). Therefore, the ball at the third count can flow into the open right probability variation region 73, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation A” is “B”, and only the right probability variation region 73 is valid in the third round. Further, when the third count ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 after the large winning opening 65a is opened (see t11 in FIG. 53), the right probability variation effective flag 203g is set to ON. Therefore, in the third round, when the ball after the third count flows into the right probability variation region 73 and the ball is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d, the right probability variation region 73 is effectively set. The probabilistic transition flag 203i is set to on.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" of the fifth embodiment, even if the effective setting of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 is started from the third count of the jackpot switch 71, the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are reached. It is possible to pass the ball after the third count. As a result, it becomes possible to pass the sphere to the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set, and the probabilistic transition flag 203i is turned on as the sphere passes through the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set. It can be set to give a "probability fluctuation state" by referring to the probability variation transition flag 203i at the end of the jackpot.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the open setting process (S422) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the open setting process (S422) of the fifth embodiment. The open setting process (S422) of the fifth embodiment is configured so that the probabilistic change effective flags 203g and 203h are not processed at the start of the round.

Therefore, in the opening setting process (S422) of the fifth embodiment, the processing of S431 to S434 is performed in the same manner as the opening setting process (S422) of the first embodiment, and the large winning opening opening setting is performed (S431) to win a prize. Set "10" to the counter (S432), set the opening time (S433), and set the opening command (S434).

Then, the open setting process (S422) of the fifth embodiment does not refer to the probability variation region effective table 202g at this stage, and ends the open setting process (S422) as it is. Therefore, at the start of the round, the probabilistic valid flags 203g and 203h remain set to off.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the opening process (S424) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing the opening process (S424) of the fifth embodiment. In the opening processing of the fifth embodiment, the winning detection processing of the ball accompanying the opening of the large winning opening 65a, the opening / closing control processing of the right side probability change area 73 and the left side probability change area 74, or the opened right side probability change area 73 or the left side. The probabilistic region 73,74 is effectively set based on the set probabilistic region effective table 202g (see FIG. 12) at the timing when a predetermined number of balls are won, while executing the ball passage detection process to the probabilistic region 74. I do.

In the opening process (S424) of the fifth embodiment, in the process of S452, whether or not the ON detection of the large winning opening switch 71 this time is the third count, that is, whether or not the value of the winning counter is "7". (S452). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the ON detection of the jackpot switch 71 this time is the third count (S452: Yes), the probability change set according to the jackpot type in the jackpot processing (see FIG. 26). Based on the region opening / closing table 202f (see FIG. 11), the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b or the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b is set to ON for “2000 ms” (S453), and the right probabilistic region switching plate 73a or the left probabilistic region opening / closing One of the plates 74a is opened so that the ball can flow into the open probability variation regions 73 and 74.

After the processing of S453, the right probability variation effective flag 203g or the left probability variation effective flag in the round is based on the probability variation area effective table 202g (see FIG. 12) set according to the jackpot type in the jackpot processing (see FIG. 26). 203h is set (S491), and this open setting process (S422) is terminated. After the completion of the opening setting process (S422), the process proceeds to S423 of the large winning opening opening / closing control process (see FIG. 27). Therefore, in the fifth embodiment, the probability variation effective flags 203g and 203h can be effectively set after a predetermined period has elapsed from the opening of the large winning opening 65a.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 are effectively set not at the start of the round but after a predetermined period has elapsed after the large winning opening 65a is opened. It is configured as follows. Specifically, the probabilistic region solenoids 73b and 74b are driven at the same time as the winning of the third ball after the large winning opening 65a is opened, and at the same time, the probabilistic region 73 and 74 are effectively set.

With this configuration, even though the jackpot type that does not give the "probability fluctuation state" is initially won, the ball that won the previous round is effectively set so that it cannot normally pass. It is possible to make it difficult for an event that passes through the probable change areas 73 and 74 to occur, to give the player the game value as expected in the game specifications, and to prevent an unexpected loss from occurring in the game field. Can be done.

Further, even when the effective setting of the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 is started from the third count of the large winning opening switch 71, the balls after the third count can be passed through the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74. As a result, it becomes possible to pass the sphere to the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set, and the probabilistic transition flag 203i is turned on as the sphere passes through the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set. It can be set to give a "probability fluctuation state" by referring to the probability variation transition flag 203i at the end of the jackpot.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth embodiment has the same effect as the first to fourth embodiments.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 57. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in one round of the jackpot, "30 seconds" has passed since the opening of the big winning opening 65a was started, or 10 balls are won while the big winning opening 65a is open. It is configured to execute one "round". Therefore, the player can grasp the current number of rounds by counting the number of times the large winning opening 65a is opened.

Further, the interval between rounds is a state in which the big winning opening 65a is closed, and the player is in the big hit game whether the big winning opening 65a is open (that is, during the round) or is in the interval. It is possible to easily grasp whether or not.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, in a predetermined round (the second round and the third round in the sixth embodiment), the large winning opening 65a is opened a plurality of times within one round (first round). (Opening and 2nd opening), so that the closing time of the pseudo interval between the 1st opening and the 2nd opening in the round and the opening time of the 1st opening and the 2nd opening are the same time. Execute (hereinafter, the above opening mode is referred to as "special opening"). In addition, the interval time between rounds is also configured to be the same as the opening time and closing time. Then, in a part of the round in which the special opening is executed, the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are effectively set, and when the ball passes through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set, the "probability" is obtained after the jackpot ends. It is configured to give a "fluctuation state".

With this configuration, even if the player is aware of the number of rounds in the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are effectively set, the player can grasp the number of rounds currently being executed. It can be configured so that it is difficult to clearly recognize whether or not a "probability fluctuation state" occurs. Therefore, even when the "latent probability variation effect mode" is executed, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 in the first to fifth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to fifth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 57, the operation of the big winning opening solenoid 65c, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b, and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b in the first to third rounds of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation A” of the sixth embodiment. Each time of the timing, the detection timing of the ball in the large winning opening switch 71, the right probability variation area switch 73d and the left probability variation area switch 74d, and the setting timing of the right probability variation effective flag 203g, the left probability variation effective flag 203h and the probability variation transition flag 203i. Is a timing chart schematically showing.

In the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" of the sixth embodiment, a total of seven rounds of jackpot games are executed as in the first embodiment, and the jackpot solenoid 65c is turned on at the start of each round to open / close plate 65b. Is released. Then, in the first round, the opening pattern of the large winning opening 65a is normally open, and a maximum of "30 seconds" has elapsed since the opening of the large winning opening 65a (see Max t1 in FIG. 57. Max t1 <"30000 ms"). Alternatively, when any one of the events of detecting 10 balls by the large winning opening switch 71 is established, the large winning opening solenoid 65c is turned off, the opening / closing plate 65b is closed, and the first round is completed.

Further, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the opening / closing pattern of the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation region 74 is "X1" as in the jackpot type "time reduction A". Therefore, in the first round, when the ball of the first count is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, both the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are turned on by "60 ms" (see t2 in FIG. 57). t2 = "60 ms"), and it is configured so that it can be recognized whether or not the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, when the third count ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, only the right probability variation region solenoid 73b is turned on by "2000 ms" (see t3 in FIG. 57. T3 = "2000 ms"). In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the time required to reach the right side probability variation region 73 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the sixth embodiment, "1. 5 seconds ”. See t4 in FIG. 57. T4 <“2000 ms ”.). Therefore, the ball at the third count can flow into the open right probability variation region 73, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation A” is “B”, and the right probability variation region 73 in the third round and the left probability variation region 74 in the sixth round are valid. Set. Therefore, in the first round, all the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probabilistic variation effective flag 203g and the left probabilistic variation effective flag 203h are set to off. Therefore, even if the sphere passes through the right probabilistic region 73 and the sphere is detected by the right probabilistic region switch 73d in the first round, the right probabilistic region 73 is not effectively set, so that the probabilistic transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

Next, when the big winning opening 65a in the first round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" is closed, the interval time of "3 seconds" (FIG. 57) until the next round (that is, the second round) is started. . T5 = "3000 ms".) Is provided. The MPU 201 (see FIG. 7) of the main control device 110 starts opening the large winning opening 65a in the second round when it is determined that this interval time has elapsed.

Next, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" of the sixth embodiment, the opening mode of the large winning opening 65a is a special opening, and the first opening is performed among a plurality of opening, and the large winning prize is won. When "3 seconds" have passed since the opening of the mouth 65a (see t6 in FIG. 57; t6 = "3000 ms"), the winning opening solenoid 65c is turned off, the opening / closing plate 65b is closed, and the first round of the second round is performed. The opening is finished.

When the ball of the first count is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 at the time of the first opening of the second round, both the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are "60 ms" as in the first round. It is turned on (see t7 in FIG. 57. T5 = "60 ms"), and it is configured so that it can be recognized whether or not the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b can be driven normally.

Then, after the first opening of the second round, a pseudo interval is performed, and when "3 seconds" have passed since the closing of the large winning opening 65a (see t8 in FIG. 57. T8 = "3000 ms"), the large winning prize is won. The mouth solenoid 65c is turned on, the opening / closing plate 65b is opened, and the pseudo interval of the second round ends.

After that, in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the second opening was performed out of multiple openings, and "3 seconds" passed from the opening of the big winning opening 65a (see t9 in FIG. 57). = "3000 ms"), the large winning opening solenoid 65c is turned off, the opening / closing plate 65b is closed, the second opening of the second round is completed, and the second round is completed.

When the ball of the third count is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 at the time of the first opening or the second opening of the second round, only the left probability variation region solenoid 74b is turned on for "2000 ms" (FIG. 57). See t10. T10 = "2000 ms".). In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the time required to reach the left side probability variation region 74 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the sixth embodiment, "1. 6 seconds ”. See t11 in FIG. 57. T11 <“2000 ms ”.). Therefore, the sphere of the third count can flow into the open left probability variation region 74, and is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation A” is “B”, and in the second round, all the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are invalid, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g and the right probability variation effective flag 203g and The left probability change effective flag 203h is set to off. Therefore, even if the ball passes through the left probability variation region 74 and the ball is detected by the left probability variation region switch 74d at the time of the second opening in the second round, the left probability variation region 74 is not effectively set. Therefore, the probability variation transition flag 203i is not turned on and remains off.

In the even-numbered rounds (that is, the 4th round and the 6th round) of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the driving modes of the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are the same as those in the second round. Further, in the first opening and the second opening of the large winning opening 65a in the second round, if a total of 10 balls are detected by the large winning opening switch 71 during the first opening and the second opening, the second round. Is configured to end.

Next, when the big winning opening 65a in the second round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" is closed, as in the interval time after one round, until the next round (that is, three rounds) is started, " An interval time of "3 seconds" (see t12 in FIG. 57; t12 = "3000 ms") is provided. The MPU 201 (see FIG. 7) of the main control device 110 starts opening the large winning opening 65a in the third round when it is determined that this interval time has elapsed.

Next, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A" of the sixth embodiment, as in the second round, the opening mode of the big winning opening 65a is a special opening, and the first opening out of a plurality of opening. When "3 seconds" have passed since the opening of the large winning opening 65a (see t13 in FIG. 57; t13 = "3000ms"), the large winning opening solenoid 65c is turned off and the opening / closing plate 65b is closed. The first opening of the third round is completed.

When the ball of the first count is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 at the time of the first opening of the third round, the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b are the same as in the first and second rounds. Are both turned on for "60 ms" (see t14 in FIG. 57; t14 = "60 ms"), and are configured to be able to recognize whether or not the right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and the left probabilistic region solenoid 74b can be driven normally. ..

Then, after the first opening of the third round, a pseudo interval is performed, and when "3 seconds" have passed since the closing of the large winning opening 65a (see t15 in FIG. 57. T15 = "3000 ms"), the large winning prize is won. The mouth solenoid 65c is turned on, the opening / closing plate 65b is opened, and the pseudo interval of the third round ends.

After that, in the third round of the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the second opening was performed among the multiple openings, and "3 seconds" passed from the opening of the big winning opening 65a (see t16 in FIG. 57. T16). = "3000 ms"), the large winning opening solenoid 65c is turned off, the opening / closing plate 65b is closed, the second opening of the third round is completed, and the third round is completed.

When the ball of the third count is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 at the time of the first opening or the second opening of the third round, only the right probability variation region solenoid 73b is turned on for "2000 ms" (FIG. 57). See t17. T17 = "2000 ms".). In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the time required to reach the right side probability variation region 73 after the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 71 is within "2 seconds" (in the sixth embodiment, "1. 5 seconds ”. See t18 in FIG. 57. T18 <“2000 ms ”.). Therefore, the ball at the third count can flow into the open right probability variation region 73, and is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d.

At this time, the effective pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of the jackpot type “latent probability fluctuation A” is “B”, and in the third round, only the right probability variation region 73 is valid, and the right probability variation effective flag 203g is turned on. At the same time, the left probability change effective flag 203h is set to off. Therefore, in the third round, when the ball passes through the right probability variation region 73 and the ball is detected by the right probability variation region switch 73d, the right probability variation region 73 is effectively set, so that the probability variation transition flag 203i is turned on. Is set to.

Therefore, in the jackpot type "latent probability fluctuation A", the probability variation regions 73 and 74 corresponding to the probability variation region switches 73d and 74d that detected the ball in the third round (sixth round) are effectively set, so that the probability variation transition Flag 203i is set to on. Then, at the end of the jackpot, the "probability fluctuation state" is set with reference to the probability variation transition flag 203i.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, in a predetermined round (in the sixth embodiment, the second round and the third round), a plurality of large winning openings 65a are provided in one round. The special opening (first opening and second opening) is executed, and the closing time of the pseudo interval between the first opening and the second opening in the round is set to the first opening and the second opening. Execute so that it is the same time as the opening time of. In addition, the interval time between rounds is also configured to be the same as the opening time and closing time. Then, in the round in which the special opening is executed, the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are effectively set, and when the ball passes through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set, the "probability fluctuation state" is obtained after the jackpot ends. Is configured to be given.

With this configuration, even if the player is aware of the number of rounds in the probability variation areas 73 and 74 that are effectively set, the player can grasp the number of rounds currently being executed. It can be configured so that it is difficult to clearly recognize whether or not a "probability fluctuation state" occurs. Therefore, even when the "latent probability variation effect mode" is executed, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment has the same effect as the first to fifth embodiments.

<7th Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a right-side probabilistic region 73 and a left-side probabilistic region 74 are provided as probabilistic regions through which a ball flowing in from the variable winning device 65 can pass, and a right-side probabilistic region 73 is arranged on the upstream side. The left side probability variation region 74 is arranged on the downstream side in the front left side direction of the game board 13.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the front side probability change area 73e is provided on the front side of the game board 13 as a probability change area through which the ball flowing in from the variable winning device 65 can pass, and the downstream side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided. The back side probability variation region 74e is provided on the side and on the back side of the front view. Then, the two probability variation regions (front side probability variation region 73e and back side probability variation region 74e) are provided for each probability variation region 73e, 74e for each round of jackpot according to the jackpot type. The drive is controlled so that either one is opened, and the valid or invalid setting of each probability variation region 73e, 74e is controlled to be switched (internally) in a state in which the player cannot recognize it. Then, when the sphere passes through the probabilistic variation regions 73e and 74e that are effectively set during the jackpot, a "probability fluctuation state" is generated after the jackpot ends. On the other hand, even if the sphere passes through the probabilistic variation regions 73e and 74e that are set to be invalid, the "probability fluctuation state" is not generated after the end of the jackpot.

With this configuration, the probabilistic regions 73e and 74e overlap in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, and which of the probabilistic regions 73e and 74e has flowed into the player who is visually recognizable from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It can be difficult to recognize whether or not. In particular, by forming the probabilistic region opening / closing plates 73f and 74f with transparent members, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the probabilistic region 73e and 74e is open. Therefore, even when the "latent probability variation effect mode" is executed, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the player is in the "probability fluctuation state", the "time reduction state", or the "normal game state". Therefore, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 in the seventh embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 in the first to sixth embodiments. In the following description, the same elements as those in the first to sixth embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

The variable winning device 65 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing the configuration of the variable winning device 65 of the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 58 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 of the seventh embodiment in a front view, FIG. 58. (B) is a schematic cross-sectional view (cross-sectional top view) of the variable winning device 65 in line AA of FIG. 58 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 58 (a) and 58 (b), the variable winning device 65 of the seventh embodiment has a horizontally long rectangular opening / closing plate 65b covering the large winning opening 65a and the lower side of the opening / closing plate 65b as axes. The large winning opening solenoid 65c (see FIG. 7) for opening and closing the opening / closing plate 65b on the front side, the large winning opening switch 71 for detecting the ball winning in the large winning opening 65a, and the large winning opening switch 71. A guide passage 72 into which the ball detected in the above flow flows down, a front side probabilistic region 73e provided on the downstream side of the guide passage 72 and from the guide passage to the back side of the front view of the game board 13, and the front side probabilistic region. The back side probabilistic region 74e provided on the downstream side of 73e and in the front view back side of the game board 13, and the innermost side provided on the downstream side of the back side probabilistic change region 74e and in the front view back side of the game board 13. A discharge passage 75a is provided.

The guide passage 72 of the seventh embodiment is a passage formed in a crank shape in a cross-sectional top view of the game board 13 into which the ball flowing into the grand prize opening 65a flows down. The guide passage 72 is provided with a front side probability variation region 73e and a back side probability variation region 74e at predetermined positions on the downstream side of the guide passage 72 and at a predetermined position of the passage extending in the front view depth direction of the game board 13. The innermost discharge passage 75a is provided on the downstream side of the front side probability variation region 73e and the back side probability variation region 74e and in the frontward view side direction of the game board 13. Therefore, the ball that flows into the large winning opening 65a and flows down the guide passage 72 passes through the front side probability variation region 73e, the back side probability variation region 74e, or the innermost discharge passage 75a. ..

In the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, after the ball flowing into the large winning opening 65a is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, the ball reaches above the front side probability variation region 73e through the guide passage 72. It is configured to take "5 seconds", and after the ball flowing into the large winning opening 65a is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, it takes about about until it reaches the upper part of the back side probability variation region 74e through the guide passage 72. It is configured to take "1.6 seconds". Therefore, the ball detected by the large winning opening switch 71 is configured to be able to flow into the front side probability variation region 73e or the back side probability variation region 74e within "2 seconds".

The front side probabilistic region 73e is arranged so that the upper surface thereof is flush with the bottom surface (rolling surface of the sphere) of the guide passage 72 in the closed state (protruding state), and is open from the closed state (immersive state). The front probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73f configured to be displaceable, the front probabilistic region solenoid 73g (not shown) capable of opening / closing the front probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73f, and the vertical lower side of the front probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73f. The front probabilistic region passage 73h, which is provided in the above and allows the ball to flow down, and the front probabilistic region switch 73i, which is embedded in the passage of the front probabilistic region passage 73h and can detect the ball passing through the front probabilistic region passage 73h. It is composed of.

Here, the members 73f to 73i constituting the front side probabilistic region 73e are all formed of a transparent material or a translucent material (for example, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc.). As a result, the player can pass the ball passing through the front side probability variation region 73e and the ball passing through the back side probability variation region 74e (and the innermost discharge passage 75a) arranged in the front view depth direction of the game board 13. It is possible to visually recognize each of them from the front side of the game board 13.

The back probabilistic region 74e is configured such that the upper surface thereof is flush with the bottom surface of the guide passage 72 in the closed state (protruding state) and can be displaced from the closed state to the open state (immersive state). The opening / closing plate 74f, the back probability changing region solenoid 74g (not shown) capable of opening / closing the back probability changing region opening / closing plate 74f, and the back of the back probability changing region opening / closing plate 74f provided on the lower side in the vertical direction so that a ball can flow down. It is composed of a probability change area passage 74h and a back probability change area switch 74i that is embedded in the passage of the back probability change area passage 74h and can detect a sphere passing through the back probability change area passage 74h.

Here, the members 74f to 74i constituting the back side probability variation region 74e are all transparent materials or translucent materials (for example, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc.) like the members 73f to 73i constituting the front side probability variation region 73e. ) Is formed. As a result, the player can see the ball passing through the back side probability variation region 74e and the ball passing through the innermost discharge passage 75a arranged in the front view depth direction of the game board 13 from the front side of the game board 13. It becomes possible to visually recognize.

Further, when the front probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73f of the front probabilistic region 73e and the back probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74f of the back probabilistic region 74e open the probabilistic regions 73e and 74e, the front surface of the game board 13 of the guide passage 72. It is driven by the front probabilistic region solenoid 73g and the back probabilistic region solenoid 74g so as to be immersed (buried) in the side wall on the left side of the view. Then, the front probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73f and the back probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74f are immersed in the front side (player side) of the game board 13 at the immersion position of the front probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73f and the back probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74f. A concealing member (not shown) that conceals the state invisible is arranged. Therefore, the front probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73f and the back probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74f are hidden in the side wall of the guide passage 72 by making them invisible to the player sitting on the front side of the game board 13. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp the driving state of the area opening / closing plate 73f and the back probability changing area opening / closing plate 74f.

The innermost discharge passage 75a allows the ball to flow out of the variable winning device 65 (game board) when the ball that has flowed into the large winning opening 65a does not flow into either the front side probabilistic region 73e or the back side probabilistic region 74e. 13 This is a passage for discharging to the back side).

Here, the members constituting the innermost discharge passage 75a are all transparent materials like the members 73f to 73i constituting the front side probabilistic region 73e and the members 74f to 74i constituting the back probabilistic region 74e. Alternatively, it is made of a translucent material (for example, polycarbonate resin, acrylic resin, etc.). As a result, the ball passing through the innermost discharge passage 75a can be visually recognized by the player from the front side of the game board 13.

Further, the front probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73f, the back probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74f, and the innermost discharge passage 75a are made of a transparent material or a translucent material. Therefore, by configuring the positions (driving modes) of the probabilistic region opening / closing plates 73f, 74f to be difficult for the player to recognize, the probabilistic region opening / closing plates 73f, 74f open or close the probabilistic regions 73e, 74e. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether or not. The front probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73f and the back probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74f may be made of colored resin.

Here, the inflow pattern of the balls that have flowed into the large winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 of the seventh embodiment will be described. In the seventh embodiment, when a big hit is won and a special gaming state occurs, the opening / closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 is opened so that the ball can flow into the big winning opening 65a. Then, when the front probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73f is in the open state (immersive state) and the back probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74f is in the closed state (protruding state), the ball flowing into the large winning opening 65a is First, it is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, and then it flows down the guide passage 72. Then, it collides with the front side wall of the guide passage 72, and the flow direction changes to the front view depth direction of the game board 13. After that, since the front probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73f is opened (immersed) by the front probabilistic region solenoid 73g (not shown), the sphere flows into the front probabilistic region passage 73h. After that, the sphere is detected by the front probabilistic region switch 73i embedded in the front probabilistic region passage 73h. The ball detected by the front probabilistic region switch 73i is discharged to the outside of the variable winning device 65 (on the back side of the game board 13) by a discharge path (not shown).

Further, when the front probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73f is in the closed state (protruding state) and the back probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74f is in the open state (immersive state), the ball flowing into the large winning opening 65a is First, it is detected by the large winning opening switch 71, and then it flows down the guide passage 72. Then, it collides with the front side wall of the guide passage 72, and the flow direction changes to the front view depth direction of the game board 13. After that, the upper surface of the front probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73f in the closed state (protruding state) is rolled, and the back probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74f provided on the downstream side and the front view back side of the front probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73f is changed. Since it is opened (immersed) by the region solenoid 74g (not shown), the sphere flows into the back probabilistic region passage 74h. After that, the sphere is detected by the back probability change area switch 74i embedded in the back probability change area passage 74h. The ball detected by the back probability change area switch 74i is discharged to the outside of the variable winning device 65 (on the back side of the game board 13) by a discharge path (not shown).

Further, when both the front probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73f and the back probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74f are in the closed state (protruding state), the ball flowing into the large winning opening 65a is first detected by the large winning opening switch 71. After that, it flows down the guide passage 72. Then, it collides with the front side wall of the guide passage 72, and the flow direction changes to the front view depth direction of the game board 13. After that, it rolls on the upper surface of the front probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73f in the closed state (protruding state) and the upper surface of the back probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74f, collides with the back wall on the back side of the guide passage 72, and the flow direction is the game board. It changes to the left side of the front view of 13. Then, it is discharged to the outside of the variable winning device 65 (the back side of the game board 13) from the innermost discharge passage 75a provided on the downstream side thereof.

With this configuration, the front side probability variation region 73e and the back side probability variation region 74e (and the innermost discharge passage 75a) overlap in the front-rear direction (depth direction) of the pachinko machine 10. In general, it is more difficult for human vision to recognize the difference in the depth image than the difference in the plane image. Therefore, the front side probability variation region 73e and the depth side probability variation region 74e (and the innermost discharge passage 75a) are planarized (front view lateral direction). ), When the front side probability change area 73e and the back side probability change area 74e (and the innermost discharge passage 75a) are arranged in the front-rear direction of the front view, the front side probability change area is from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to make it difficult for the player who visually recognizes the 73e and the innermost probabilistic region 74e (and the innermost discharge passage 75a) to recognize which probabilistic region 73e, 74e (or the innermost discharge passage 75a) has flowed into. .. In particular, by forming the front probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73f and the back probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74f with a transparent member, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the probabilistic regions 73e and 74e is open. Therefore, even if the probabilistic regions 73e and 74e that are effectively set are recognized by the player, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to identify the probabilistic regions 73e and 74e through which the ball has passed. It is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not the "probability fluctuation state" is given. As a result, even when the "latent probability variation effect mode" is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether the player is in the "probability fluctuation state", the "time reduction state", or the "normal game state". By making it possible, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although the present invention has been described above based on each of the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to each of the above embodiments, and various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Can be easily inferred. For example, the numerical values given in each of the above embodiments are examples, and it is naturally possible to adopt other numerical values.

In addition, it is naturally possible to combine each configuration of each of the above embodiments with respect to any configuration of any of the following modifications. Further, it is naturally possible to combine each configuration of the other one or a plurality of modifications with respect to the configuration of any of the modifications shown below. In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

<Modification example 1: One side is continuously open (non-alternate)>
In the above embodiment, the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation region 74 are alternately opened in each round at the time of a big hit. Instead of this, one of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 may be continuously opened, or only one of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 may be opened. With this configuration, the variation of the opening / closing patterns of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 is enriched according to the jackpot type, and it is difficult (impossible) for the player to recognize which jackpot type is won. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played.

<Modification example 2: Number of effective rounds is 3 or more, or only 1>
In the above embodiment, the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are effectively set in any two rounds of one jackpot type. Instead of this, a jackpot type with 3 or more rounds that enable probabilistic regions 73,74, a jackpot type with only 1 round that enables probabilistic regions 73,74, or probabilistic regions 73,74. It may be configured to provide a jackpot type that is not set to be valid. By configuring in this way, by configuring in this way, the variation of the effective patterns of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 is enriched according to the jackpot type, and the player recognizes which jackpot type is won. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by creating a playability that makes it difficult or impossible for the player to guess in which game state the game is being played.

<Modification example 3: Turn off the valid flag before the end of the round>
In the above embodiment, the probabilistic valid flags 203g and 203h are turned off at the end of one round, that is, at the closing of the large winning opening 65a. On the other hand, the probability variation effective flags 203g and 203h are set at a timing before the closing of one round, that is, for example, when the probability variation region solenoids 73b and 74b are off (when the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are closed) or a predetermined number. When counting the ball (for example, the 5th count, etc.), or when a predetermined time elapses (for example, "5 seconds", etc.) from the opening of the large winning opening 65a or the opening of the probability variation areas 73, 74, it is set to off. It may be configured. With this configuration, the period for effectively setting the probability variation regions 73 and 74 is shortened. For example, a ball that has won a prize in another round stays in the variable winning device 65 and cannot normally pass through. Even if an event occurs in which the sphere passes through the probabilistic regions 73 and 74, by shortening the effective period of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74, the stagnant sphere passes through the probabilistic regions 73 and 74. By disabling, 74, it is possible to prevent the unintended "probability fluctuation state" from being given. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a game value as expected in the game specifications and prevent an unexpected loss from occurring in the game field.

<Modification 4: Specific area of 1 for each double attacker>
In the second embodiment, the plurality of variable winning devices 65 and 76 are configured to share the probability variation regions 73 and 74. Instead of this, each variable winning device 65, 76 may be configured to have one probability variation region 73, 74, respectively. With this configuration, the flow paths in the variable winning devices 65 and 76 can be individually designed, and it is not necessary to design the flow paths in consideration of the confluence of the guide passage 72 and the communication passage 77. The degree of freedom in designing the variable winning devices 65 and 76 can be increased.

<Modification 5: All latent jackpots>
In the above embodiment, when the jackpot type "probability variation A" is won, the "probability variation notification effect mode" for notifying that the "probability variation state" is given is executed. On the other hand, it may be configured not to notify that the "probability fluctuation state" is given to all the jackpot types. With such a configuration, it is possible to constantly create a game property that allows the player to guess which game state the game is being played in, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification example 6: Sudden probability, small hit>
In each of the above embodiments, in the lottery of each special symbol, any one of "15R probability variation jackpot", "15R latent probability variation jackpot", "7R latent probability variation jackpot", "15R time reduction jackpot", and "7R time reduction jackpot" is It was configured to be granted. On the other hand, a jackpot different from the above jackpot (for example, a so-called "sudden probability variation jackpot (2R probability variation jackpot)") or a "small hit" different from the jackpot may be drawn. With this configuration, when a big hit is won, the game value given to the player is different, so that the game can be varied and various game characteristics can be realized to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

In particular, when a "small hit" is provided in the special symbol lottery, when the small hit is won, the opening / closing mode of the large winning opening 65a or the like (that is, similar to or similar to the big hit to which the "latent probability fluctuation state" is given (that is,) In the case of "7R latent probability variation jackpot", the player is given a "normal game" by setting the opening and closing operation of the large winning opening 65a seven times as in the case of "7R latent probability variation jackpot"). It is difficult to distinguish between "state" and "latent probability fluctuation state". With this configuration, it is possible to create a playability that allows the player to guess which game state the game is in, and to improve the interest of the game.

The "small hit" is a lottery result in which the opening and closing of the large winning opening 65a and the like are executed, but unlike the "15R probability variation jackpot" and the "7R latent probability variation jackpot", the transition of the gaming state is not executed.

<Transformation example 7: Probability change suggestion effect>
In the above embodiment, it is configured to notify the player only in the "probability change notification effect mode" that the "probability fluctuation state" is given. Instead of this, it may be configured to suggest that the "probability fluctuation state" is given or that it is given to the player by a special effect. As a special effect, for example, in the third symbol display device 81, a special character that is more likely to be selected in a situation where a "probability fluctuation state" is given and difficult to be selected when a "probability fluctuation state" is not given is selected. It is easy to be output when it appears at a predetermined timing (for example, during a big hit, at the end of a big hit, or during a fluctuation effect), or when it passes through the probabilistic variation areas 73 and 74 that are set to be valid, and is set to invalid. When the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are passed, a special sound effect or the like that is difficult to be output is produced. With such a configuration, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Transformation example 8: Effective setting multiple times>
In the above embodiment, the opening pattern that allows the ball to flow into any of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 is executed once within one round of the jackpot. Instead of this, the opening pattern in which the ball can flow into any of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 may be executed a plurality of times of two or more times in one round. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the chances of the ball flowing into the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set, and to facilitate the granting of the right to the player in the “probability fluctuation state”.

<Modification example 9: 1 Effective setting switching according to the number of counts in the round>
In the above embodiment, one of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 is effectively set in one round. Instead of this, it may be configured to switch the valid settings of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 within one round. Specifically, for example, when the large winning opening 65a in the second round is opened, the right side probability variation area 73 is set to be valid, and then the right side probability variation area 73 is set to be invalid after the fifth count in the second round. The left side probability variation region 74 is configured to be effectively set. With this configuration, the variation of the effective patterns of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 is enriched, and it is difficult for the player to recognize which jackpot type is won, and the game is played in which game state. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a playability that makes the player guess whether or not it is.

<Opening / closing member only on the upstream side of the probability variation region of modification 10: 2>
In the first embodiment, the opening / closing plates 73a and 74a are arranged in the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation region 74, respectively, and the opening / closing plates 73a and 74a are controlled to open and close to flow into the probability variation regions 73 and 74. I was sorting the balls. Instead of this, the right probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73a is arranged only in the upstream probabilistic region, that is, the right probabilistic region 73a, and when the right probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73a is open, the ball goes to the right probabilistic region 73. Is configured to flow in, and when the right probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a is closed, the ball is configured to flow into the left probability variation region 74. With this configuration, it is not necessary to dispose the drive mechanism in the left side probability variation region 74, so that the number of parts can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, since the ball winning the variable winning device 65 always passes through the left side probability variation region 74 and it is not necessary to provide the discharge passage 75 on the downstream side of the left side probability variation region 74, the degree of freedom in designing the variable winning device 65 is improved. can do.

<Modification example 11: Non-electric sorting device>
In the above embodiment, the probability variation region 73,74 is opened or closed by an electric member (probability variation region solenoid 73b, 74b or the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a) arranged in the vicinity of the probability variation region 73,74, and the sphere is formed. It was configured to change the probability variation regions 73 and 74 into which the solenoid flows. Instead of this, the probability is changed by a non-electric distribution device (for example, a distribution device that alternately distributes the balls entering the distribution inlet to the left side path or the right side path in the alternate distribution unit 64). The spheres to the regions 73 and 74 may be configured to be distributed. With this configuration, the number of parts in the variable winning device 65 can be reduced, and control of each drive mechanism becomes unnecessary, so that the control load on the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

<Modification example 12: The time for rolling on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate is different>
In the above embodiment, when the right probabilistic region 73 and the left probabilistic region 74 are closed, a special difference is provided between the probabilistic region opening / closing plates 73a and 74a that close the probabilistic regions 73 and 74. It was configured so that there would be no difference in the time it took for the sphere to pass over the upper surfaces of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74. On the other hand, by making the configuration of one probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a, 74a different from the configuration of the other probability variation region opening / closing plate 73a, 74a, there is a difference in the time for the sphere to pass over the upper surface of the probability variation region 73,74. It may be configured to occur. Specifically, for example, the length of the right probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73a is made longer than the length of the left probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74a, and the time for the sphere to roll on the upper surface of the right probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73a is set to the left probabilistic variation. The upper surface of the region opening / closing plate 74a is configured to be longer than the rolling time of the sphere. With this configuration, by providing variations in the opening / closing timings of the probabilistic region opening / closing plates 73a and 74a, it is possible to increase the variations of the probabilistic region 73 and 74 into which the sphere flowing down in the guide passage 72 flows. ..

<Modification example 13: Loop type>
Each of the above embodiments is configured with a so-called ST type game specification in which a predetermined number of "probability fluctuation states" are given without exception after the end of the jackpot, regardless of which jackpot is won. On the other hand, after the end of the big hit, a so-called loop type game specification that maintains the "probability fluctuation state" until the next big hit occurs may be configured. In the so-called loop type pachinko machine where the next big hit is guaranteed, by applying the configuration of the present invention, the playability of whether or not the ball passes through the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set is improved. Can be planned.

<Modification example 14: Probability variation region of 3 or more>
In the above embodiment, two probabilistic regions 73 and 74 are provided in the guide passage 72, and the ball winning the big winning opening 65a during the big hit is configured to flow into one of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74. It was. Instead of this, three or more probabilistic regions may be provided in the guide passage 72 so that the balls winning in the large winning opening 65a flow into any one probabilistic region. With this configuration, the variation of the inflow pattern of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 is enriched, and it is difficult (impossible) for the player to recognize which jackpot type is won, and which game state is used. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a playability that makes the player guess whether or not the game is being played in.

<Modification 15: Opening and closing according to the amount of drive>
In the fourth embodiment, the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is arranged between the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation region 74, and the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is driven in the forward or reverse direction to drive the probability variation region. The opening / closing plate 78c was configured to be slidable on the upstream side or the downstream side of the guide passage 72 in accordance with the above drive. Instead of this, the probabilistic region opening / closing motor 78a is arranged on the upstream side of the right probabilistic region 73, and the probabilistic region opening / closing motor 78a is configured to enable only one direction (right rotation), and the probabilistic region opening / closing motor 78a is configured. A plurality of patterns of drive amounts of the motor 78a may be provided. When the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is driven by the first drive amount (for example, 60 pulses), only the left side probability variation region 74 is opened, and the second drive amount (for example, 120 pulses) larger than the first drive amount is opened. When driven, both the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation region 74 are opened. With this configuration, the balls flowing into the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 can be distributed according to the drive amount of the drive mechanism 78 of 1, and the above distribution is possible even with a motor that can drive only in one direction, which is inexpensive. The playability of the present invention can be realized at a cost.

<Modification 16: Movement of the opening / closing plate
In the fourth embodiment, the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is arranged between the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation region 74, and the probability variation region opening / closing motor 78a is driven in the forward or reverse direction to drive the probability variation region. The opening / closing plate 78c was configured to be slidable on the upstream side or the downstream side of the guide passage 72 in accordance with the above drive. Instead of this, a drive solenoid (or drive motor) and one opening / closing plate connected to the driving solenoid are provided, and when the driving solenoid is off, the opening / closing plate opens the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side. The probabilistic region 74 may be closed, while the opening / closing plate may be configured to close the right probabilistic region 73 and open the left probabilistic region 74 when the drive solenoid is on. With this configuration, the balls flowing into the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 can be distributed by driving the drive mechanism 78 of 1, and the playability of the present invention can be realized at a low cost.

<Modification example 17: Multiple pseudo intervals during one round>
In the sixth embodiment, the pseudo interval time is set once in one round. Instead of this, the pseudo interval time may be provided a plurality of times in one round. In other words, when the pseudo interval time is provided a plurality of times in one round, the variable winning device 65 may be opened three times or more in the round. With this configuration, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds currently being executed.

<Modification 18: Variable winning device that wins by hitting left and second variable winning device that wins by hitting right>
In the second embodiment, the two variable winning devices 65 and 76 are arranged on the right side of the game area, respectively. Instead of this, one variable winning device is arranged in the center of the game area, and the other variable winning device is arranged on the right side of the game area, so that the variable winning device that can win by left-handed or right-handed is different. It may be configured as follows.

<Variable winning device of variant example 19: 2, a jackpot that only one opens>
In the second embodiment, at the time of a big hit, the two variable winning devices 65 and 76 are alternately opened according to each big hit type. On the other hand, even when two variable winning devices 65 and 76 are arranged, a jackpot type that opens only one of the variable winning devices 65 and 76 may be provided.

<Modification 20: Identity of pseudo interval time>
In the sixth embodiment, the interval time between the jackpot rounds and the closing time of the pseudo-interval that is pseudo-closed during the round are configured to be the same time. On the other hand, if the interval time between the jackpot rounds and the closing time of the pseudo interval that is pseudo-closed during the round are times (modes) in which it is difficult for the player to identify each time, what kind of time is it? (Aspect) may be used. Specifically, when the interval time between jackpot rounds is 2 seconds, the pseudo interval time is set between 1 second and 3 seconds, and the interval time between jackpot rounds is set to a plurality of times ( For example, it is executed in 1 second or 2 seconds), and the pseudo interval time is also executed in a time equivalent to the plurality of times (for example, 1 second or 2 seconds). With this configuration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the number of rounds being executed, and even if the rounds in which the probability variation areas 73 and 74 are effectively set are recognized, the probability fluctuations. It can be configured so that it is difficult to grasp whether or not a state is given.

<Modification 21: One continuous effective (non-alternate)>
In the above embodiment, the right side probability variation area 73 and the left side probability variation area 74 are alternately and effectively set in each round at the time of a big hit. Instead of this, one of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 may be continuously validly set, or only one of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 may be validly set. With this configuration, the variation of the effective patterns of the probability variation areas 73 and 74 is enriched according to the jackpot type, and it is difficult (impossible) for the player to recognize which jackpot type is won. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game by creating a game property that allows the player to guess in which game state the game is being played.

<Validity / invalidity of 1 specific area in the special winning opening of 22: 1>
In the first embodiment, in the variable winning device 65 of 1, the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of 2 are provided, and one of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 is effectively set and the other is invalid for each jackpot round. It was set. On the other hand, in the variable winning device 65 of 1, when the probability variation region of 1 is provided, the probability variation region is effectively set or effectively set for each jackpot round, and the ball passes through the effectively set probability variation region. It may be configured to generate a probability fluctuation state.

<Modification example 23: Valid setting round is fixed>
In the first embodiment, the variable winning device 65 of 1 is provided with the probability variation regions 73 and 74 of 2, and one of the probability variation regions 73 and 74 is effectively set for each round based on the jackpot type, and the other. Was disabled. On the other hand, a round in which the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are effective in all jackpots is fixedly configured, and only the opening and closing patterns of the probability variation region opening / closing plates 73a and 74a are different so that a probability fluctuation state can be given. It may be configured.

<Modification 24: Multiple opening / closing patterns in Special Figure 2>
In the first embodiment, in the jackpot type in the second special symbol, one type (that is, ". It consisted only of the opening / closing pattern "Y2") of "time saving C" and "latent probability fluctuation C". On the other hand, in the second special symbol as well, as in the first special symbol, the jackpot type (for example, "time saving D") of the opening / closing pattern different from the opening / closing pattern of "Y2" (for example, "Y3" corresponding to "X2") "And" latent probability fluctuation D ") may be provided to make it difficult to determine whether or not the ball has passed through the probability variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set for the player.

<Modification 25: Pattern in which all probabilistic regions are closed>
In the first embodiment, one of the probabilistic regions 73 and 74 is always opened in the jackpot. On the other hand, an opening / closing pattern (closing pattern) may be provided such that both probability changing regions 73 and 74 are closed.

<Modification 26: Double attacker without continuous passage>
In the second embodiment, the variable winning devices 65 and 76 of 2 are provided, and the inside thereof is communicated by the communication passage 77. On the other hand, the opening / closing plate of another variable winning device is provided directly above (directly below) the opening / closing plate of the variable winning device of 1, and the variable winning device of 2 is provided so that the balls flowing in from each opening / closing plate immediately merge. It may be configured as. With such a configuration, it is not necessary to configure the communication passage, and it is possible to reduce the installation space and the manufacturing cost when the variable winning device 2 is provided.

<Modification 27: Electric chew type attacker>
In the first embodiment, the opening / closing plate 65b is normally closed so that the ball does not win the big winning opening 65a provided inside the opening / closing plate 65b, and the opening / closing plate 65b opens based on the big hit. Probability variation regions 73 and 74 are provided in the variable winning device 65 in which the ball wins in the large winning opening 65a provided in the above, and when the ball passes through the probabilistic variation regions 73 and 74 that are effectively set, the probability fluctuation state is set. It was configured to grant. On the other hand, a so-called electric chew type variable winning device is provided, in which the ball is easy to win when rotating and the ball is harder to win than when rotating when not rotating, and the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are provided inside the device. You may. In the normal state, the probabilistic areas 73 and 74 are closed or disabled so that the ball does not pass through the probabilistic areas 73 and 74 that are set to be valid, so that the ball wins a prize in the normal time. Even if it can be done, it is possible not to give the probability fluctuation state.

<Modification 28: Variable winning device 65 and probability variation area are separate>
In the first embodiment, the probability variation regions 73 and 74 are provided in the variable winning device 65. On the other hand, the probability variation regions 73 and 74 may be arranged in a mechanism on the back side of the game board 13 which is separate from the variable winning device 65 (for example, a collecting path plate for collecting winning balls). With this configuration, the degree of freedom in designing the variable winning device 65 and the probability variation regions 73 and 74 can be improved.

<Modification 29: One version of the probability variation region of the seventh embodiment>
In the seventh embodiment, the front side probability variation region 73e and the back side probability variation region 74e are arranged in the variable winning device 65 so that a sphere can pass through each of them, and one of the probability variation regions is provided. While the 73e and 74e are set to be valid, the other probabilistic regions 74e and 73e are set to be invalid, and a probability fluctuation state is given when a sphere passes through the probabilistic regions 73e and 74e that are set to be valid. Was there. On the other hand, only the front side probability variation region 73e may be arranged in the variable winning device 65, and the innermost discharge passage 75a may be arranged on the back side of the front view. With this configuration, even if only the opening / closing plate 73f of 1, the front side probable change area 73e and the innermost discharge passage 75a overlap in the front view of the game board 13, the front side probable change area 73e becomes. It can be opened so that it is difficult for the player to recognize whether the ball has passed through the front side probability variation region 73e or the innermost discharge passage 75a.

<Modification 30: Version without the innermost discharge passage of the seventh embodiment>
In the seventh embodiment, the front side probability variation region 73e, the back side probability variation region 74e, and the innermost discharge passage 75a are provided in the variable winning device 65, and the ball flowing into the variable winning device 65 is provided in any of the regions or passages. It was configured to flow in. On the other hand, the innermost discharge passage 75a may be eliminated so that the ball flows into either the front side probability variation region 73e or the back side probability variation region 74e. In this case, it is desirable that the opening / closing plate for closing the probabilistic regions 73e and 74e is an opening / closing plate that opens the other probabilistic regions 74e and 73e when one of the probabilistic regions 73e and 74e is closed. With this configuration, the ball that has flowed into the variable winning device 65 can flow into any of the probabilistic regions 73e and 74e, and at the same time, it must pass through any of the probabilistic regions 73e and 74e from within the large winning opening 65a. It can be configured to be discharged.

<Modification 31: Opening and closing the discharge passage>
In the above embodiment, the opening / closing plates 73a and 74a are provided in the probability changing regions 73 and 74, respectively, and by opening and closing the opening / closing plates 73a and 74a, whether or not the sphere flows into the probability changing regions 73e and 74e is controlled. .. On the other hand, the discharge passage 75 may be provided on the upstream side (front side) of the probability variation regions 73 and 74, and the opening / closing plate may be arranged in the discharge passage 75. In this case, when the opening / closing plate is in the open state, the ball flows down the discharge passage 75, while when the opening / closing plate is in the closed state, the ball does not flow down into the discharge passage 75, and the probabilistic regions 73, 74 on the downstream side thereof do not flow down. Will flow down.

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 gives a display instruction to the display control device 114. A command may be transmitted directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 may be connected to the display control device 114, and a command for instructing the output of each voice and lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device 114 to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the variation of the third symbol (special symbol) that is suspended and executed when the ball is entered into the special figure 1 winning opening 64b or the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c (starting winning) is changed to become a big hit during the production. The case where "holding change notice" is performed in the execution symbol and the pending symbol has been described as to whether or not there is an effect. On the other hand, whether or not there is a hit (stop at the symbol "○") in the variable display of the normal symbol that is suspended and executed when the ball passes through the normal symbol gate 67 (starting prize). Whether or not there is a big hit fluctuation effect during the variation effect of the third symbol by using the normal symbol hold lamp 84, the third symbol display device 81, etc., or instead, the player is asked. It may be notified. As a result, the player can grasp whether or not there is a winning variable display in the variable display of the pending normal symbol or in the variable display of the running and pending ordinary symbols. Therefore, it can be inferred whether or not the normal symbol is a hit before the variable display of the normal symbol is executed. Among the gaming machines, there are some that enhance the playability by the presence or absence of hitting a normal symbol, which is particularly effective in such a gaming machine.

In the above embodiment, the case where the demonstration effect is to stop and display the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not given the numbers "0" to "9" has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. , The third symbol consisting of the main symbol with a number or the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variation effect may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, the case where the "hold change notice", which is one form of the continuous notice effect, is executed on the third symbol display device 81 on which the variation effect is performed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and pachinko A fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 is provided in the machine 10, and the fourth symbol is displayed on the fourth symbol display device together with the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81. (Hereinafter, "continuous notice effect" including "hold change notice") is executed, which is different from "hold change notice" or "hold change notice" and is executed over a plurality of variable effects. You may. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with an accessory different from each movable accessory that operates according to various effects, and the accessory is operated in a predetermined manner together with the variable effect to execute a continuous advance notice effect. May be good. Further, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous advance notice effect from the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the voice lamp control device 113, or the illumination unit of the pachinko machine 10 may be executed. The continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the third symbol display device 81 (and the special symbol display device 37) performs the variation effect (dynamic display), the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory is predetermined. It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation of a big hit by operating in this mode, outputting a sound from the sound output device 226, or lighting or blinking the illumination units 29 to 33. Further, the player usually keeps an eye on the third symbol display device 81 on which the variation effect is performed and continues the game, but displays the symbols by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81. , The operation of the accessory, the voice output from the voice output device 226, or the lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 causes the continuous advance notice effect, so that the player is given an unusual effect. It can be easily recognized. In addition, continuous notice effect can be easily continuously performed by simple control such as display of symbols by the fourth symbol display device, operation of accessories, voice output from voice output device 226, or lighting / blinking of illumination units 29 to 33. It is possible to make a notice production.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by the voice output from the voice output device 226 or the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, the continuous notice effect is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113, so that the start winning prize is obtained. The pachinko machine 10 continuously performs the winning / failing determination and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation in the main control device 110, causes the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous advance notice effect, and causes the display control device 114 to perform the fluctuation effect. When performing the advance notice effect, each control device can share each process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be suppressed to a low level.

It should be noted that the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the sound from the voice output device 226. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by combining at least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 and controlling each of them in conjunction with each other. As a result, a wider variety of continuous notice effects can be executed. Further, a method of executing the continuous notice effect (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33). Or, by changing the combination of them), the game state ("15R probability variation jackpot", "15R latency probability variation jackpot", "15R time reduction jackpot", "7R latency probability variation jackpot", "7R time reduction" after the end of the continuous advance notice production A plurality of continuous notice effect modes selected according to "big hit" and "missing" may be prepared.

In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 controls the number of reserved balls to which "1" is added by voice lamp control when there is a prize (starting prize) in the special figure 1 winning opening 64b or the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c. A case has been described in which each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c in connection with the start winning is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in response to the hold ball number command to be notified to the device 113. However, the type of the counter included in the reserved ball number command may be a part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include the values of other counters. Further, when the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning, the information indicating the value of each of these counters is included in the hold ball number command and notified. Instead, the voice lamp control device 113 may be notified of these values by including information indicating the values of each counter in a command other than the reserved ball count command. As another command, it may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or another information such as a fluctuation pattern command or a stop symbol command may be voiced. The value of each counter acquired with the start winning may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113. As another command, when the value of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning is notified to the voice lamp control device 113, the value of each counter to be notified is changed to the variable effect corresponding to any number of holdings. Information indicating whether this is the case may be included. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 includes the hold information included in the command in any of the hold information first to fourth areas corresponding to the hold count based on the information regarding the hold count included in the command. The value of the counter can be stored.

In the above embodiment, the winning of the special figure 1 winning opening 64b and the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c and the passing of the normal symbol gate 67 are each held up to 4 times, but the maximum holding ball The number is not limited to 4, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect based on the winning of the special figure 1 winning opening 64b or the special drawing 2 winning opening 64c is divided into four numbers or four in a part of the third symbol display device 81. The area may be displayed in a mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) different by the number of reserved balls, and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the special symbol display device 37 and reserved by the light emitting member. It may be configured to notify the number of balls.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variation effect which is the variation display of the third symbol is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. The design may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a horizontal direction or an L-shape. Further, the variation display of the symbol is not limited to the variation effect of the symbol, and for example, an effect performed by displaying one or a plurality of characters together with the symbol or by displaying a wide variety of movements or changes separately from the symbol. Display etc. are also included. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above embodiments, when the variation effect is executed, the case where the high-speed variation in which all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed so as not to be visible by the player is displayed has been described. Instead, all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed. May be good.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs including that. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.
<Group A: Switching between valid and invalid of a specific area>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on a game board, and a game ball is launched into any of a plurality of entrances provided in the game area. A winning / failing lottery is performed based on the entry of the ball, and when a winning or other advantageous state is won in the hit / fail lottery, the normally closed variable entry means is opened to give the player a predetermined game value. Is configured to be granted.

In such a gaming machine, a special area through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass is provided, the special area is controlled to open and close by an opening / closing member or the like, and when the game ball passes through the special area, the above-mentioned There is a pachinko machine that generates a special game value based on a second advantageous state, which is different from a predetermined game value based on the advantageous state.

Further, in the pachinko machine, for example, even when the second advantageous state occurs, the second advantageous state does not occur without notifying the player whether or not the second advantageous state occurs. Some perform a notification mode. That is, the interest of the game is created by performing an effect as if the second advantageous state does not occur to the player and creating a game property in which it is inferred whether or not the second advantageous state is given to the player. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when the gaming ball passes through the special area, the second advantageous state is generated without exception. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes that the gaming ball has passed through the special area, the second advantageous state is generated. 2 The player recognizes that an advantageous state will occur. For this reason, if the player recognizes the occurrence of the second advantageous state due to the passage of the game ball to the special area and then executes the normal notification mode, the player is given the expected interest in the game. Rather, there is a risk that the game will be aroused, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The invention of Group A was made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 winning opening 64b) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and
An information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the ball entry means, and
A determination means (for example, a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A game state changing means (for example, a jackpot end process (S415)) that changes the game state by using the determination result of the determination means.
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes a state suggestion notification (for example, "probability change notification effect mode") that suggests the game state to the player is executed. 81) and
A variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter.
By using the determination result by the determination means, the advantageous state means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state (for example, a jackpot state). )When,
In a gaming machine provided with a special region (for example, a right-side probability variation region 73 and a left-side probability variation region 74) through which a gaming ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass.
The game state changing means
A second advantageous state means (for example, a probability variation transition flag 203i) capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means is provided.
The advantageous state means
A special area switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special area (for example, turning on the right probability change effective flag 203 g or the left probability change effective flag 203h) is provided.
The second advantageous state means is
When the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated, while the second advantageous state is generated.
When the game ball passes through the special area that has not been effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is not generated.
The notification means is
At the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the suggestion notification non-execution means corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed (for example, "latent probability variation A". The gaming machine A0, which is characterized by having a "latent probability variation effect mode") based on the winning of ".

According to the gaming machine A0, the gaming ball is launched by the launching means, the gaming ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the ball entering means, and the gaming ball enters the ball entering means. As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and by using the determination result of the determination means, the game state is changed by the game state changing means, and the game state is changed by the game state changing means. When the change is made, the notification means executes a state suggestion notification that notifies the player of the game state. Further, a variable ball entry means that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter is provided, and by using the judgment result by the judgment means, The advantageous state means brings the variable ball entry means into an advantageous state from the first state to the second state. In addition, a special area is provided through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass. Here, the second advantageous state means provided in the game state changing means may generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means. Further, whether or not the special area is enabled can be switched by the special area switching means provided in the advantageous state means. Then, when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state means generates the second advantageous state, while the special area switching means effectively sets it. When the game ball passes through a special area that is not present, the second advantageous state means is configured so that the second advantageous state is not generated. Then, the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means by the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means. That is, even if the game ball passes through the special area, it is possible to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring unless the special area is valid, and it is assumed that the game ball has passed through the special area set to be valid. However, it is not suggested to the player that the second advantageous state occurs at that timing. Thereby, even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur. Then, the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area set effectively by the suggestion notification non-execution means, and the player is informed that the game is in the second advantageous state. When not recognizing, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special area. As a result, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine A0
The advantageous state means
In the advantageous state of 1, the unit game executing means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for executing the unit game (for example, one round) for changing the variable ball entering means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times. ), With
The special area switching means
In at least one of the unit games, the unit game effective means for validating the special area (for example, the second round of "latent probability fluctuation B") and
A game characterized in that the unit game effective means includes effective suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of valid settings of probabilistic regions 73 and 74) that does not suggest that the special region is valid. Machine A1.

According to the gaming machine A1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the unit game executing means provided in the advantageous state means executes the unit game for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times in one advantageous state. Then, the special area is made effective in at least one of the unit games by the unit game effective means provided in the special area switching means, and the unit game is made by the effective suggestion non-execution means also provided in the special area switching means. Effective means do not suggest that the special area is effective. As a result, the special area becomes effective in any of the unit games in the advantageous state, and while it is not suggested that the special area is effective, the game ball is made to flow into the special area during the unit game to obtain the second advantageous state. Can be generated. Therefore, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special region. As a result, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine A1
The special area is
The first special region (for example, the right side probability variation region 73) and
A second special region different from the first special region (for example, a left probabilistic region 74) is provided.
The special area switching means
The gaming machine A2, characterized in that either one of the first special area or the second special area is enabled and the other is not enabled in the predetermined unit game.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the special area, a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area are provided, and the first special area or the second special area is provided in a predetermined unit game by the special area switching means. It is configured so that one is valid and the other is not. As a result, by providing effective patterns for a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the first special area or the second special area that are effectively set, and as a result, the game is performed in the second advantageous state. It has the effect of creating a playability that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is present, and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A2
The second advantageous state means is
When it is determined by the determination means that it is the first lottery result (for example, the lottery result of "latent probability variation A") that can generate the second advantageous state, the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. Among them, an effective passing means (for example, turning on the right probability changing effective flag 203g and turning on the right probability changing area solenoid 73b) for passing the game ball through the special area that is effective,
When the determination means determines that the second lottery result does not generate the second advantageous state (for example, the lottery result of "time saving A"), during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, The gaming machine A3 is provided with a passage blocking means (for example, the right probability variation effective flag 203g is turned on and the right probability variation region solenoid 73b is turned off) that prevents the gaming ball from passing through the special region that is effective. ..

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A0 to A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the determination means determines that the result is the first lottery that can generate the second advantageous state, the effective passing means provided in the second advantageous state means is in the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. It is configured to allow the game ball to pass through a special area that is valid. On the other hand, when it is determined by the determination means that the result is the second lottery that does not generate the second advantageous state, the passage blocking means provided in the second advantageous state means is used during the advantageous state based on the second advantageous state result. It is configured to prevent the game ball from passing through a special area that is valid. That is, in the case of the first lottery result that can generate the second advantageous state, the second advantageous state is generated by passing the game ball to the effective special area, but the second advantageous state is not generated. In the case of the second lottery result, the second advantageous state is not generated by preventing the game ball from passing through the effective special area. As a result, a second advantageous state is generated depending on whether or not the game ball is passed through the special area that is effective, and even if the game ball passes through the special area, if the special area is not effective, the second advantageous state is generated. By configuring so as not to generate the above, it is possible to create a playability that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. There is.

In the game machine A3
A first opening / closing means for opening / closing the first special region (for example, a right probability variable region opening / closing plate 73a) and
A second opening / closing means (for example, a left probability variable region opening / closing plate 74a) for opening / closing the second special region is provided.
The effective passing means is
When the first special area is effective by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is opened to allow the game ball to flow into the first special area.
When the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the gaming machine A4 is characterized in that the second opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the two special areas.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first opening / closing means opens and closes the first special area, and the second opening / closing means opens and closes the second special area. Then, when the first special area is valid by the special area switching means by the effective passing means, the first opening / closing means is opened and the game ball flows into the first special area, and the second special area switching means second. When the special area is effective, the second opening / closing means is opened and the game ball flows into the second special area. As a result, when the second advantageous state is generated, there is an effect that the second advantageous state can be appropriately generated by passing the game ball through the special region where it is effective.

In the gaming machine A4
The passage blocking means
When the first special area is effective by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is closed to prevent the game ball from flowing into the first special area, and the game ball is not allowed to flow into the first special area.
When the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the game machine A5 is characterized in that the second opening / closing means is closed to prevent the game ball from flowing into the two special areas.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first special area is effective by the special game switching means by the passage blocking means, the first opening / closing means is closed and the game ball does not flow into the first special area. Similarly, when the second special area is effective by the special area switching means by the passage blocking means, the second opening / closing means is closed and the game ball does not flow into the second special area. As a result, when the second advantageous state is not generated, the game ball is not passed to the effective special area, so that even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area, It is possible to create a situation in which a second advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine A4 or A5
The passage blocking means
When the first special area is effective by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is opened to allow the game ball to flow into the second special area.
When the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the first opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the first special area.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4 or A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first special area is effective by the special game switching means by the passage blocking means, the second opening / closing means is opened and the game ball flows into the second special area. Similarly, when the second special area is effective by the special area switching means by the passage blocking means, the first opening / closing means is opened and the game ball flows into the first special area. As a result, when the second advantageous state is not generated, the game ball is passed to the ineffective special area, so that even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area, the second advantage state is not generated. 2 It is possible to create a situation in which an advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines A3 to A6
The second advantageous state means is
Using the determination result by the determination means, an effective pattern determining means (for example, a probability variation region effective table 202 g) for determining whether or not to enable the special region for each unit game, and
An opening / closing pattern determining means (for example, a probability variation region opening / closing table 202f) that determines whether or not to allow a game ball to flow into the special area for each unit game using the determination result by the determination means.
The opening / closing pattern same means (for example, the opening / closing pattern "X1") that makes the opening / closing pattern of the special area the same by the opening / closing pattern determining means in the first lottery result and the second lottery result.
The first lottery result and the second lottery result are provided with effective pattern mismatch means (for example, effective patterns "A" and "B") that make the effective pattern of the special area different by the effective pattern determining means. A game machine A7 characterized by being

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A3 to A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effective pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to enable the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Further, the opening / closing pattern determining means also provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to allow the game ball to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Then, the opening / closing pattern of the special area by the opening / closing pattern determining means is made the same in the first lottery result and the second lottery result by the same opening / closing pattern means, and the first lottery result and the second lottery result are made by the effective pattern mismatching means. Then, the effective pattern of the special area by the effective pattern determining means is different. As a result, the opening / closing pattern of the special area is made the same for the first lottery result and the second lottery result so that the lottery result cannot be identified only by the opening / closing pattern, and the special area is divided between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. By making the effective pattern of the above different, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and the playability is created so that the player can guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines A3 to A7
A display means (for example, a special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and
As a result of making it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result by the display result by the display means (for example, there are 127 types of display patterns of "time saving C" and "latent probability variation C". The gaming machine A8 is characterized in that there are 127 types of display patterns, and each display pattern is a random pattern having no regularity by eight LEDs).

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A3 to A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result identification difficult means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result by the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to identify which lottery result is, so that the player does not recognize that the second lottery result is in the second advantageous state. If so, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special area, and whether or not the second advantageous state occurs even in the display result of the display means. I can't recognize it. As a result, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A8
The special area is
The gaming machine A9, characterized in that it is arranged at a position visible to the player.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A0 to A8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special area is arranged at a position visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the player visually recognize that the game ball has passed through the special area and creating a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not a second advantageous state occurs. effective.

In any of the gaming machines A4 to A9
The first opening / closing means and / or the second opening / closing means
A gaming machine A10 characterized in that it is formed of a transparent or translucent material.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A4 to A9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first opening / closing means and / or the second opening / closing means are formed of a transparent or translucent material. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to determine the driving mode of the first opening / closing means and / or the second opening / closing means. Therefore, it is possible that the first opening / closing means is opened and flows into the first special area, or the second opening / closing means. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the situation is open and can flow into the second special area. As a result, it becomes difficult to recognize the inflow pattern into each special area in advance, and it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state. It has the effect of being able to improve.

<Group B: Double attacker x Probability change area>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on a game board, and a game ball is launched into any of a plurality of entrances provided in the game area. A winning / failing lottery is performed based on the entry of the ball, and when a winning or other advantageous state is won in the hit / fail lottery, the normally closed variable entry means is opened to give the player a predetermined game value. Is configured to be granted.

In such a gaming machine, a special area through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass is provided, the special area is controlled to open and close by an opening / closing member or the like, and when the game ball passes through the special area, the above-mentioned There is a pachinko machine that generates a special game value based on a second advantageous state, which is different from a predetermined game value based on the advantageous state.

Further, in the pachinko machine, for example, even when the second advantageous state occurs, the second advantageous state does not occur without notifying the player whether or not the second advantageous state occurs. Some perform a notification mode. That is, the interest of the game is created by performing an effect as if the second advantageous state does not occur to the player and creating a game property in which it is inferred whether or not the second advantageous state is given to the player. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when the gaming ball passes through the special area, the second advantageous state is generated without exception. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes that the gaming ball has passed through the special area, the second advantageous state is generated. 2 The player recognizes that an advantageous state will occur. For this reason, if the player recognizes the occurrence of the second advantageous state due to the passage of the game ball to the special area and then executes the normal notification mode, the player is given the expected interest in the game. Rather, there is a risk of arousing the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The invention of Group B was made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 winning opening 64b) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and
An information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the ball entry means, and
A determination means (for example, a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A game state changing means (for example, from a "normal game state" to a "latent probability fluctuation state") that changes the game state by using the determination result of the determination means.
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes a state suggestion notification (for example, "probability change notification effect mode") that suggests the game state to the player is executed. 81) and
A first variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) and a second variable entry ball that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter, respectively. Means (eg, second variable winning device 76) and
By using the determination result by the determination means, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot state) in which one or both of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means is changed from the first state to the second state (for example, a jackpot state). ) (For example, opening of the big winning opening 65a and the second big winning opening 76a at the time of a big hit),
In a gaming machine provided with the first variable ball entry means and a special area (for example, right side probability change area 73 and left side probability change area 74) through which a game ball flowing into the second variable ball entry means can pass.
The game state changing means
A second advantageous state means (for example, generation of a "probability fluctuation state") capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means is provided.
The advantageous state means
A special area switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special area (for example, turning on the right probability change effective flag 203 g or the left probability change effective flag 203h) is provided.
The second advantageous state means is
When the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated, while the second advantageous state is generated.
It is configured so that the second advantageous state does not occur when the game ball passes through the special area that has not been effectively set by the special area switching means.
The notification means is
At the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the suggestion notification non-execution means corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed (for example, "latent probability variation A". The gaming machine B0, which is characterized by having a "latent probability variation production mode") based on the winning of.

According to the gaming machine B0, the gaming ball is launched by the launching means, the gaming ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the ball entering means, and the gaming ball enters the ball entering means. As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and by using the determination result of the determination means, the game state is changed by the game state changing means, and the game state is changed by the game state changing means. When the change is made, the notification means executes a state suggestion notification that notifies the player of the game state. In addition, a first variable ball entry means and a second variable ball entry means that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter are provided, and the determination means. By using the determination result according to, one or both of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means is set to the advantageous state from the first state to the second state by the advantageous state means. In addition, a special area is provided through which the game ball that has flowed into the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means can pass. Here, the second advantageous state means provided in the game state changing means may generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means. Here, the special area switching means provided in the advantageous state means switches whether or not to enable the special area. Then, when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state means generates the second advantageous state, while the special area switching means effectively sets it. When the game ball passes through a special area that is not present, the second advantageous state means is configured so that the second advantageous state is not generated. Then, the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means by the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means. That is, even if the game ball passes through the special area, it is possible to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring unless the special area is valid, and it is assumed that the game ball has passed through the special area set to be valid. However, it is not suggested to the player that the second advantageous state occurs at that timing. Thereby, even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, when the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed by the suggestion notification non-execution means so that the player is not recognized as the second advantageous state, the game ball in the special region It is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing. Further, by giving the second advantageous state by the combination of the open-closed of the variable ball entry means of 2 and the validity or invalidity of the special area of 2, the second advantageous state is obtained unless the variation of each combination is grasped in advance. Cannot be recognized as occurring. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and it is possible to create a playability that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state. It has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine B0
The advantageous state means
In the advantageous state of 1, a unit game (for example, one round) in which the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means is changed from the first state to the second state is executed a plurality of times. Execution means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) and
Each time the unit game is executed in the predetermined advantageous state by the unit game executing means, the first variable ball-entry means and the second variable ball-entry means are alternately and continuously brought into the second state. The gaming machine B1 comprising alternate ball-entry means (for example, the variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are opened without an interval time).

According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the unit game executing means provided in the advantageous state means executes the unit game for changing the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times in one advantageous state. Will be done. Then, each time the unit game is executed in a predetermined advantageous state by the unit game executing means, the first variable ball entering means and the second variable ball entering means are brought together by the alternate ball entering means provided in the advantageous state means. Alternately, it is in the second state without interruption.

Conventionally, when the advantageous state is digested by opening or closing the variable ball entry means of 1, it is necessary to provide an interval time accompanying the closing of the variable ball entry means, and it takes time to digest the advantageous state. There is a risk that the game will be delayed and the player will be awakened, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the first variable ball-entry means and the second variable ball-in means are alternately and seamlessly placed in the second state for each unit game in a predetermined advantageous state by the alternate ball-entry means. It is possible to eliminate the interval time associated with the closure of the variable ball entry means. Therefore, the advantageous state can be quickly digested, and the game is not delayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being awakened. Further, by giving the second advantageous state by the combination of the open-closed of the variable ball entry means of 2 and the validity or invalidity of the special area of 2, the second advantageous state is obtained unless the variation of each combination is grasped in advance. Cannot be recognized as occurring. As a result, in the advantageous state that is quickly performed, it is possible to reduce the thinking time of the player and make it difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and the game is performed in the second advantageous state. There is an effect that it is possible to create a playability that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is played, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B0 or B1
A first flow path (for example, a guide passage 72) for flowing down a game ball that has flowed into the first variable ball entry means,
A second flow path (for example, a communication passage 77) for flowing down a game ball that has flowed into the second variable ball entry means,
The gaming machine B2 is provided with a merging means (for example, a merging portion 77a) for merging the first flow path and the second flow path on the upstream side of the special region.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B0 or B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first flow path causes the game ball that has flowed into the first variable entry means to flow down, the second flow path causes the game ball that has flowed into the second variable entry means to flow down, and the merging means causes the first The flow path and the second flow path are merged on the upstream side of the special region. As a result, both the game ball that has flowed into the first variable ball entry means and the game ball that has flowed into the second variable ball entry means can flow into the special area. With this configuration, it is not necessary to provide a special area for each variable ball entry means, so that there is an effect that the number of parts in the gaming machine can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

In the gaming machine B1 or B2
The alternating ball entry means
The advantageous state of 1 appears, and then a new advantageous state appears within a predetermined period (for example, during the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time shortening state", that is, the jackpot in the second special symbol). When the unit game is executed, the gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the first variable ball-entry means and the second variable ball-entry means are alternately and seamlessly brought into the second state.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when one advantageous state appears by the alternate ball entry means and then a new advantageous state appears within a predetermined period, each time the unit game is executed, the first variable ball entry means and the first variable ball entry means and the first. The two variable ball entry means are alternately and continuously put into the second state.

Conventionally, in a situation where advantageous states occur continuously within a predetermined period (so-called consecutive villas), the player desires a quick game, and in such a situation, the variable during the advantageous state. If it takes time for the interval time due to the closure of the ball entry means, the player may be more likely to get excited about the game.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B3, when a new advantageous state appears within a predetermined period, the first variable ball-entry means and the second variable ball-entry means are used each time the unit game is executed. The second state can be alternately and without interruption, and the advantageous state can be quickly digested. Therefore, in a situation where advantageous states are continuously generated, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are alternately set to the second state without interruption, and the quick game desired by the player can be performed. It has the effect of being able to be realized, preventing the game from being awakened, and improving the interest of the game. Further, by giving the second advantageous state by the combination of the open-closed of the variable ball entry means of 2 and the validity or invalidity of the special area of 2, the second advantageous state is obtained unless the variation of each combination is grasped in advance. Cannot be recognized as occurring. As a result, in the advantageous state that is quickly performed, it is possible to reduce the thinking time of the player and make it difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and the game is performed in the second advantageous state. There is an effect that it is possible to create a playability that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is played, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B3
The special area switching means
In at least one of the unit games, the unit game effective means for validating the special area (for example, the second round of "latent probability fluctuation B") and
A game characterized in that the unit game effective means includes effective suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of valid settings of probabilistic regions 73 and 74) that does not suggest that the special region is valid. Machine B4.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special area is effective in at least one of the unit games from the unit game effective means provided in the special area switching means, and the unit game is made by the effective suggestion non-execution means also provided in the special area switching means. Effective means do not suggest that the special area is effective. As a result, the special area becomes effective in any of the unit games in the advantageous state, and while it is not suggested that the special area is effective, the game ball is made to flow into the special area during the unit game to obtain the second advantageous state. Can be generated. Therefore, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special region. As a result, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B4
The special area is
The first special region (for example, the right side probability variation region 73) and
A second special region different from the first special region (for example, a left probabilistic region 74) is provided.
The special area switching means
A gaming machine B5, characterized in that either one of the first special region or the second special region is enabled and the other is not enabled in the predetermined unit game.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B1 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the special area, a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area are provided, and the first special area or the second special area is provided in a predetermined unit game by the special area switching means. It is configured so that one is valid and the other is not. As a result, by providing effective patterns for a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the first special area or the second special area that are effectively set, and as a result, the game is performed in the second advantageous state. It has the effect of creating a playability that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is present, and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines B0 to B5
The second advantageous state means is
When it is determined by the determination means that it is the first lottery result (for example, the lottery result of "latent probability variation A") that can generate the second advantageous state, the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. Among them, an effective passing means (for example, turning on the right probability changing effective flag 203g and turning on the right probability changing area solenoid 73b) for passing the game ball through the special area that is effective,
When the determination means determines that the second lottery result does not generate the second advantageous state (for example, the lottery result of "time saving A"), during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, The gaming machine B6 is provided with a passage blocking means (for example, turning on the right probability changing effective flag 203g and turning off the right probability changing region solenoid 73b) that prevents the gaming ball from passing through the special region that is effective. ..

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B0 to B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the determination means determines that the result is the first lottery that can generate the second advantageous state, the effective passing means provided in the second advantageous state means is in the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. It is configured to allow the game ball to pass through a special area that is valid. On the other hand, when it is determined by the determination means that the result is the second lottery that does not generate the second advantageous state, the passage blocking means provided in the second advantageous state means is used during the advantageous state based on the second advantageous state result. It is configured to prevent the game ball from passing through a special area that is valid. That is, in the case of the first lottery result that can generate the second advantageous state, the second advantageous state is generated by passing the game ball to the effective special area, but the second advantageous state is not generated. In the case of the second lottery result, the second advantageous state is not generated by preventing the game ball from passing through the effective special area. As a result, a second advantageous state is generated depending on whether or not the game ball is passed through the special area that is effective, and even if the game ball passes through the special area, if the special area is not effective, the second advantageous state is generated. By configuring so as not to generate the above, it is possible to create a playability that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. There is.

In the gaming machine B6
A first opening / closing means for opening / closing the first special region (for example, a right probability variable region opening / closing plate 73a) and
A second opening / closing means (for example, a left probability variable region opening / closing plate 74a) for opening / closing the second special region is provided.
The effective passing means is
When the first special area is effective by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is opened to allow the game ball to flow into the first special area.
When the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the gaming machine B7 is characterized in that the second opening / closing means is opened to allow the game ball to flow into the two special areas.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first opening / closing means opens and closes the first special area, and the second opening / closing means opens and closes the second special area. Then, when the first special area is valid by the special area switching means by the effective passing means, the first opening / closing means is opened and the game ball flows into the first special area, and the second special area switching means second. When the special area is effective, the second opening / closing means is opened and the game ball flows into the second special area. As a result, when the second advantageous state is generated, there is an effect that the second advantageous state can be appropriately generated by passing the game ball through the special region where it is effective.

In the gaming machine B7
The passage blocking means
When the first special area is effective by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is closed to prevent the game ball from flowing into the first special area, and the game ball is not allowed to flow into the first special area.
When the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the game machine B8 is characterized in that the second opening / closing means is closed to prevent the game ball from flowing into the two special areas.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first special area is effective by the special game switching means by the passage blocking means, the first opening / closing means is closed and the game ball does not flow into the first special area. Similarly, when the second special area is effective by the special area switching means by the passage blocking means, the second opening / closing means is closed and the game ball does not flow into the second special area. As a result, when the second advantageous state is not generated, the game ball is not passed to the effective special area, so that even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area, It is possible to create a situation in which a second advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B7 or B8
The passage blocking means
When the first special area is effective by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is opened to allow the game ball to flow into the second special area.
When the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the gaming machine B9 is characterized in that the first opening / closing means is opened to allow the game ball to flow into the first special area.

According to the gaming machine B9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B7 or B8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first special area is effective by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means opens the second opening / closing means and the game ball flows into the second special area. When the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the passage blocking means also opens the first opening / closing means and the game ball flows into the first special area. As a result, when the second advantageous state is not generated, the game ball is passed to the ineffective special area, so that even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area, the second advantage state is not generated. 2 It is possible to create a situation in which an advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines B6 to B9
The second advantageous state means is
By using the determination result by the determination means, an effective pattern determining means (for example, a probability variation region effective table 202 g) for determining whether or not to enable the special region for each unit game, and
An opening / closing pattern determining means (for example, a probability variation region opening / closing table 202f) that determines whether or not to allow a game ball to flow into the special region for each unit game by using the determination result by the determination means.
The opening / closing pattern same means (for example, the opening / closing pattern "X1") that makes the opening / closing pattern of the special area the same by the opening / closing pattern determining means in the first lottery result and the second lottery result.
The first lottery result and the second lottery result are provided with effective pattern mismatch means (for example, effective patterns "A" and "B") that make the effective pattern of the special area different by the effective pattern determining means. A gaming machine B10 characterized by being

According to the gaming machine B10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B6 to B9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effective pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to enable the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Further, the opening / closing pattern determining means also provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to allow the game ball to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Then, the opening / closing pattern of the special area by the opening / closing pattern determining means is made the same in the first lottery result and the second lottery result by the same opening / closing pattern means, and the first lottery result and the second lottery result are made by the effective pattern mismatching means. Then, the effective pattern of the special area by the effective pattern determining means is different. As a result, the opening / closing pattern of the special area is made the same for the first lottery result and the second lottery result so that the lottery result cannot be identified only by the opening / closing pattern, and the special area is divided between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. By making the effective pattern of the above different, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and the playability is created so that the player can guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines B6 to B10
A display means (for example, a special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and
As a result of making it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result by the display result by the display means (for example, there are 127 types of display patterns of "time saving C" and "latent probability variation C". The gaming machine B11 is characterized in that there are 127 types of display patterns, and each display pattern is a random pattern having no regularity due to eight LEDs).

According to the gaming machine B11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B6 to B10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result identification difficult means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result by the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to identify which lottery result is, so that the player does not recognize that the second lottery result is in the second advantageous state. If so, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special area, and whether or not the second advantageous state occurs even in the display result of the display means. I can't recognize it. As a result, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines B0 to B11
The special area is
A gaming machine B12 characterized in that it is arranged at a position visible to the player.

According to the gaming machine B12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B0 to B11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special area is arranged at a position visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the player visually recognize that the game ball has passed through the special area and creating a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not a second advantageous state occurs. effective.

<Group C: Distribution to two passages by one drive member>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on a game board, and a game ball is launched into any of a plurality of entrances provided in the game area. A winning / failing lottery is performed based on the entry of the ball, and when a winning or other advantageous state is won in the hit / fail lottery, the normally closed variable entry means is opened to give the player a predetermined game value. Is configured to be granted.

In such a gaming machine, a special area through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass is provided, the special area is controlled to open and close by an opening / closing member or the like, and when the game ball passes through the special area, the above-mentioned There is a pachinko machine that generates a special game value based on a second advantageous state, which is different from a predetermined game value based on the advantageous state.

Further, in the pachinko machine, for example, even when the second advantageous state occurs, the second advantageous state does not occur without notifying the player whether or not the second advantageous state occurs. Some perform a notification mode. That is, the interest of the game is created by performing an effect as if the second advantageous state does not occur to the player and creating a game property in which it is inferred whether or not the second advantageous state is given to the player. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when the gaming ball passes through the special area, the second advantageous state is generated without exception. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes that the gaming ball has passed through the special area, the second advantageous state is generated. 2 The player recognizes that an advantageous state will occur. For this reason, if the player recognizes the occurrence of the second advantageous state due to the passage of the game ball to the special area and then executes the normal notification mode, the player is given the expected interest in the game. Rather, there is a risk of arousing the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The inventions of Group C have been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 winning opening 64b) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and
An information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the ball entry means, and
A determination means (for example, a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A game state changing means (for example, a jackpot end process (S415)) that changes the game state by using the determination result of the determination means.
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes a state suggestion notification (for example, "probability change notification effect mode") that suggests the game state to the player is executed. 81) and
A variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter.
By using the determination result by the determination means, the advantageous state means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state (for example, a jackpot state). ) And,
The game state changing means
In a gaming machine provided with a second advantageous state means (for example, a probability variation transition flag 203i) capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means.
A first special region (for example, right side probability variation region 73) and a second special region (for example, left side probability variation region 74) through which a game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass,
An opening / closing means (for example, a probabilistic region opening / closing plate 78c) capable of opening / closing the first special region or the second special region, and
A drive means for opening and closing the opening / closing means (for example, a probabilistic region opening / closing motor 78a) and
A special area switching means for switching the validity or invalidity of the first special area or the second special area (for example, turning on the right probability change effective flag 203 g or the left probability change effective flag 203h) is provided.
The second advantageous state means is
When the second advantageous state is generated, the opening / closing means is driven by the driving means to open the effective first special region or the second special region.
When the second advantageous state is not generated, the opening / closing means is driven by the driving means to close the effective first special region or the second special region.
The notification means is
The suggestion notification non-execution means that does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the first special region or the second special region effectively set by the special region switching means. (For example, a gaming machine C0 characterized by comprising (for example, a "latent probability variation effect mode" based on the winning of "latent probability variation A").

According to the gaming machine C0, the gaming ball is launched by the launching means, the gaming ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the ball entering means, and the gaming ball enters the ball entering means. As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and by using the determination result of the determination means, the game state is changed by the game state changing means, and the game state is changed by the game state changing means. When the change is made, the notification means executes a state suggestion notification that notifies the player of the game state. Further, a variable ball entry means that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter is provided, and by using the judgment result by the judgment means, The advantageous state means brings the variable ball entry means into an advantageous state from the first state to the second state. Further, the second advantageous state means provided in the game state changing means may generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means. Here, a first special area and a second special area through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass are provided, and the first special area or the second special area is configured to be openable and closable by the opening and closing means, and the driving means. The opening / closing means is driven to open / close. Further, the special area switching means switches the validity or invalidity of the first special area or the second special area. Then, when the second advantageous state is generated, the opening / closing means is driven by the driving means by the second advantageous state means, and the effective first special region or the second special region is opened. Further, when the second advantageous state is not generated, the opening / closing means is driven by the driving means by the second advantageous state means, and the effective first special region or the second special region is closed. Then, the state corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the first special area or the second special area effectively set by the special area switching means by the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means. It is configured so that the suggestion notification is not executed. That is, even if the game ball passes through the first special region or the second special region, the second advantageous state can be prevented from occurring unless the first special region or the second special region is valid. Even if the game ball passes through the first special area or the second special area that is effectively set, it is not suggested to the player that the second advantageous state occurs at that timing. Thereby, even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the first special area or the second special area, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, when the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed by the suggestion notification non-execution means so that the player is not recognized as the second advantageous state, the first special area or the first special area or the first It is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special area. As a result, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine C0
The second advantageous state means is
When the second advantageous state is generated, the opening / closing means is driven by the driving means to close the ineffective second special region or the first special region.
A gaming machine characterized in that the opening / closing means is driven by the driving means to open the ineffective second special region or the first special region when the second advantageous state is not generated. C1.

According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second advantageous state is generated, the opening / closing means is driven by the driving means by the second advantageous state means, and the second special region or the first special region which is not effective is closed. Further, when the second advantageous state is not generated, the opening / closing means is driven by the driving means by the second advantageous state means, and the second special area or the first special area which is not effective is opened. As a result, when it is desired to generate a second advantageous state, the first special region or the second special region that is not effectively set is closed, and the sphere is moved to the first special region or the second special region that is effectively set. Can be passed through. Therefore, when it is desired to generate the second advantageous state, the sphere can be passed through the first special region or the second special region which is effectively set, and the second advantageous state can be surely generated. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine C0 or C1
The driving means is
By driving the opening / closing means in the first direction, the first direction driving means (for example, forward rotation driving) that opens the first special region and closes the second special region, and
By driving the opening / closing means in a second direction different from the first direction, a second direction driving means (for example, reverse drive) that opens the second special region and closes the first special region. A game machine C2 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C0 or C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by driving the opening / closing means in the first direction by the first-direction driving means provided in the driving means, the first special area is opened and the second special area is closed. Further, by driving the opening / closing means in the second direction different from the first direction by the second direction driving means also provided in the driving means, the second special area is opened and the first special area is closed. To.

Conventionally, when a plurality of special areas are provided inside the variable ball entry means and a drive mechanism is provided for each special area, the parts of each drive mechanism must be installed in a small space, and the variable entry means. The design of the ball means may be complicated.

Further, since the above-mentioned parts are provided, the number of parts used in the gaming machine may increase, and the manufacturing cost may increase.

Further, since the drive mechanism is arranged in each of the special regions, maintenance work is required for each of the drive mechanisms, which may increase the maintenance man-hours.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C2, the opening or closing of the first special region and the second special region can be realized depending on the driving direction of the driving mechanism of 1, which complicates the design of the variable ball entry means. There is an effect that the configuration of the entire variable ball entry means can be simplified and easily designed without the need for it.

Further, since it is not necessary to open or close the first special area and the second special area by one drive mechanism and open or close the first special area and the second special area by a plurality of drive mechanisms, the gaming machine It has the effect of reducing the number of parts and manufacturing costs.

Further, since the first special area and the second special area are opened and closed by the drive mechanism of 1, it is sufficient to perform the maintenance work of only the drive mechanism of 1, and the maintenance man-hours of the gaming machine can be reduced. effective.

In the gaming machine C0 or C1
The first special region is arranged on the upstream side of the second special region.
The driving means is
Arranged on the upstream side of the first special region and the second special region,
By driving the opening / closing means by a first predetermined amount, the first predetermined amount driving means (for example, the probabilistic region opening / closing motor 78a) that opens the second special region and closes the first special region is driven by 60 pulses. )When,
By driving the opening / closing means in the same direction as the driving direction based on the driving of the first predetermined amount and a second predetermined amount larger than the first predetermined amount, the first special region and the second special region are driven. The gaming machine C3 is provided with a second predetermined amount driving means (for example, driving a motor 78a for opening / closing a probability variation region with 120 pulses).

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C0 or C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first special region is arranged on the upstream side of the second special region, and the driving means is arranged on the upstream side of the first special region and the second special region. Then, by driving the opening / closing means by the first predetermined amount by the first predetermined amount driving means provided in the driving means, the second special area is opened and the first special area is closed. Further, the opening / closing means is driven by the second predetermined amount driving means also provided in the driving means in the same direction as the driving based on the first predetermined amount, and by driving the second predetermined amount more than the first predetermined amount. Both the first special area and the second special area are opened. As a result, the balls flowing into the first special region or the second special region can be distributed according to the drive amount of one drive mechanism, and the above distribution becomes possible depending on the drive amount of one drive means in one direction. It is not necessary to provide the driving means of the present invention, and there is an effect that the playability of the present invention can be realized at a low cost.

In the gaming machine C0 or C1
The driving means is
In the case of the first drive pattern (including the initial position), the first drive pattern means (for example, the right side probability variation region when the drive solenoid is turned off) that opens the first special region and closes the second special region. (73 is opened and the left side probability variation area 74 is closed),
When the second drive pattern is different from the first drive pattern, the second drive pattern means (for example, right side probability change when the drive solenoid is turned on) closes the first special area and opens the second special area. The gaming machine C4 is characterized in that the region 73 is closed and the left side probability variation region 74 is opened).

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C0 or C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first drive pattern means provided in the drive means opens the first special region and closes the second special region in the case of the first drive pattern. Further, the second drive pattern means also provided in the drive means closes the first special region and opens the second special region when the second drive pattern is different from the first drive pattern. As a result, the gaming machine balls flowing into the first special region or the second special region can be distributed according to each drive pattern of the drive mechanism 1, and the playability of the present invention can be realized at a low cost. effective.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C4
The opening / closing means
The gaming machine C5, characterized in that the first special region and the second special region are closed at the initial position of the opening / closing means.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C0 to C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the opening / closing means closes the first special region and the second special region at the initial position of the opening / closing means. That is, at the initial position of the opening / closing means, both the first special area and the second special area are closed so that both special areas are closed even when the driving means does not operate normally due to a failure or the like. Can be in the state of As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball into the first special area and the second special area even at the time of abnormality. Therefore, even if the first special area or the second special area is effective at the time of abnormality, the second advantageous state can be prevented from occurring, and an unexpected disadvantage occurs in the amusement park. It has the effect of being able to prevent it.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C5
The variable ball entry means
The gaming machine C6 is provided with a discharge means (for example, a discharge passage 75) for discharging the game ball to the outside of the variable ball entry means on the downstream side of the first special region and the second special region. ..

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C0 to C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the discharge means provided in the variable ball entry means discharges the game ball that has flowed down to the downstream side of the first special region and the second special region to the outside of the variable ball entry means. As a result, the game balls that have not flowed into the first special area or the second special area can be appropriately discharged to the outside of the variable entry means so that the game balls do not stay in the variable entry means. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball staying in the variable entry means from flowing into the first special area or the second special area, and the game ball staying in the variable entry means is in the first special area or the first special area. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent unexpected disadvantages from occurring in the amusement park, such as the occurrence of an unintended second advantageous state due to the inflow into the second special area.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C6
The advantageous state means
In the advantageous state of 1, the unit game executing means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for executing the unit game (for example, one round) for changing the variable ball entering means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times. ), With
The special area switching means
In at least one of the unit games, the unit game effective means for validating the special area (for example, the second round of "latent probability fluctuation B") and
A game characterized in that the unit game effective means includes effective suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of valid settings of probabilistic regions 73 and 74) that does not suggest that the special region is valid. Machine C7.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C0 to C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the unit game executing means provided in the advantageous state means executes the unit game for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times in one advantageous state. Then, the special area is made effective in at least one of the unit games by the unit game effective means provided in the special area switching means, and the unit game is made by the effective suggestion non-execution means also provided in the special area switching means. Effective means do not suggest that the special area is effective. As a result, the special area becomes effective in any of the unit games in the advantageous state, and while it is not suggested that the special area is effective, the game ball is made to flow into the special area during the unit game to obtain the second advantageous state. Can be generated. Therefore, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special region. As a result, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C7
The special area switching means
A gaming machine C8, characterized in that either one of the first special region or the second special region is enabled and the other is not enabled in the predetermined unit game.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C0 to C7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special area switching means is configured so that either one of the first special area or the second special area is valid and the other is not valid in a predetermined unit game. As a result, by providing effective patterns for a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the first special area or the second special area that are effectively set, and as a result, the game is performed in the second advantageous state. It has the effect of creating a playability that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is present, and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C8
The second advantageous state means is
When it is determined by the determination means that it is the first lottery result (for example, the lottery result of "latent probability variation A") that can generate the second advantageous state, the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. Among them, the effective passing means for passing the game ball to the first special region or the second special region (for example, the right probability variation effective flag 203 g is turned on and the right probability variation region solenoid 73b is turned on).
When the determination means determines that the second lottery result does not generate the second advantageous state (for example, the lottery result of "time saving A"), during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, It is provided with a passage blocking means (for example, turning on the right probability changing effective flag 203g and turning off the right probability changing region solenoid 73b) that prevents the game ball from passing through the first special region or the second special region that is effective. The gaming machine C9 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C0 to C8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the determination means determines that the result is the first lottery that can generate the second advantageous state, the advantageous state based on the first lottery result is determined by the effective passing means provided in the second advantageous state means. It is configured to allow the game ball to pass through a valid first special area or second special area. On the other hand, when the determination means determines that the result is the second lottery that does not generate the second advantageous state, the passage blocking means provided in the second advantageous state means is used during the advantageous state based on the second advantageous state. , It is configured to prevent the game ball from passing through the effective first special area or second special area. That is, in the case of the first lottery result that can generate the second advantageous state, the second advantageous state is generated by passing the game ball to the effective first special area or the second special area. In the case of the second lottery result that does not generate the second advantageous state, the second advantageous state is not generated by preventing the game ball from passing through the effective first special area or the second special area. As a result, it is assumed that the game ball has passed through the first special area or the second special area while generating a second advantageous state depending on whether or not the game ball is passed through the effective first special area or second special area. Also, by configuring so that the second advantageous state does not occur unless the first special area or the second special area is valid, the player is made to guess whether or not the game is being performed in the second advantageous state. It has the effect of creating playability and improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine C9
The second advantageous state means is
Effective pattern determining means (for example, probabilistic region effective table) for determining whether or not to enable the first special region or the second special region for each unit game by using the determination result by the determination means. 202g) and
By using the determination result by the determination means, the opening / closing pattern determining means (for example, the probability variation region) for determining whether or not to allow the game ball to flow into the first special region or the second special region for each unit game. Opening table 202f) and
The opening / closing pattern same means (for example, the opening / closing pattern "X1") that makes the opening / closing pattern of the first special area or the second special area the same by the opening / closing pattern determining means in the first lottery result and the second lottery result. )When,
The effective pattern mismatching means (for example, the effective pattern "A") that causes the effective pattern of the first special region or the second special region to differ between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. A gaming machine C10 characterized by having "B") and.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, whether or not to enable the first special area or the second special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determination means by the effective pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means. It is determined. Further, by using the determination result by the determination means by the opening / closing pattern determining means also provided in the second advantageous state means, whether the game ball is allowed to flow into the first special area or the second special area for each unit game. Whether or not is decided. Then, the opening / closing pattern of the first special area or the second special area by the opening / closing pattern determining means is made the same in the first lottery result and the second lottery result by the opening / closing pattern same means, and the first by the effective pattern mismatching means. The effective pattern of the first special area or the second special area by the effective pattern determining means is different between the lottery result and the second lottery result. As a result, the opening / closing pattern of the first special area or the second special area is made the same for the first lottery result and the second lottery result so that the lottery result cannot be identified only by the opening / closing pattern, and the first lottery result and the first lottery result and the first. By making the effective pattern of the first special area or the second special area different from the two lottery results, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and the game is played in the second advantageous state. It has the effect of creating a playability that allows the player to guess whether or not it is, and improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine C9 or C10
A display means (for example, a special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and
As a result of making it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result by the display result by the display means (for example, there are 127 types of display patterns of "time saving C" and "latent probability variation C". The gaming machine C11 is characterized in that there are 127 types of display patterns, and each display pattern is a random pattern having no regularity by eight LEDs).

According to the gaming machine C11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C9 or C10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result identification difficult means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result by the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to identify which lottery result is, so that the player does not recognize that the second lottery result is in the second advantageous state. If so, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the first special area or the second special area, and the display result of the display means also shows the second advantageous state. Cannot be recognized whether or not occurs. As a result, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C11
The special area is
A gaming machine C12 characterized in that it is arranged at a position visible to the player.

According to the gaming machine C12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C0 to C11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special area is arranged at a position visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the player visually recognize that the game ball has passed through the special area and creating a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not a second advantageous state occurs. effective.

<Group D: Multiple opportunities to acquire probabilistic rights during a jackpot of 1>

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on a game board, and a game ball is launched into any of a plurality of entrances provided in the game area. A winning / failing lottery is performed based on the entry of a ball, and when an advantageous state such as a hit is won in the hit / fail lottery, the normally closed variable entry means is opened to give the player a predetermined game value. Is configured to be granted.

In such a gaming machine, a special area through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass is provided, the special area is controlled to open and close by an opening / closing member or the like, and when the game ball passes through the special area, the above-mentioned There is a pachinko machine that generates a special game value based on a second advantageous state different from a predetermined game value based on the advantageous state (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, the timing at which the game ball can be passed to the special region is configured to occur only once in the advantageous state of 1. Therefore, if the game ball cannot flow into the special area at the above timing due to a game abnormality such as a game ball launch abnormality or a sudden trouble such as a player's poor physical condition, a second advantageous state may be generated. This may not be possible, causing the player to suffer an unexpected disadvantage and awakening the game.

The invention of Group D has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 winning opening 64b) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and
An information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the ball entry means, and
A determination means (for example, a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter.
By using the determination result by the determination means, the advantageous state means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state (for example, a jackpot state). )When,
A special region (for example, the right side probability variation region 73 and the left side probability variation region 74) through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass,
In a gaming machine provided with a second advantageous state means (for example, a probability variation transition flag 203i) capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means.
The advantageous state means
A special area switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special area (for example, turning on the right probability change effective flag 203 g or the left probability change effective flag 203h) is provided.
The second advantageous state means is
When the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated, while the second advantageous state is generated.
It is configured so that the second advantageous state does not occur when the game ball passes through the special area that has not been effectively set by the special area switching means.
When the second advantageous state is generated, the multi-timing inflow means (for example, "latent probability variation A") for inflowing the game ball into the special region effectively set at the plurality of timings in the advantageous state is 3 The gaming machine D0, which comprises the roundth and sixth rounds).

According to the gaming machine D0, the gaming ball is launched by the launching means, the gaming ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the ball entering means, and the gaming ball enters the ball entering means. As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. Further, a variable ball entry means that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter is provided, and by using the judgment result by the judgment means, The advantageous state means brings the variable ball entry means into an advantageous state from the first state to the second state. In addition, a special area is provided through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass. Then, the second advantageous state means may generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means. Here, the special area switching means provided in the advantageous state means switches whether or not to enable the special area. Then, when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state means generates the second advantageous state, while the special area switching means effectively sets it. When the game ball passes through a special area that is not present, the second advantageous state means is configured so that the second advantageous state is not generated. Further, when the second advantageous state is generated by the plurality of timing inflow means provided in the second advantageous state means, the game ball is flowed into the effective special region at a plurality of timings in the advantageous state. That is, even if the game ball passes through the special area, it is possible to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring unless the special area is valid, and it is assumed that the game ball has passed through the special area set to be valid. However, it is not suggested to the player that the second advantageous state occurs at that timing. Thereby, even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, when the advantageous state that generates the second advantageous state is won, the game ball is configured to be able to pass through the special area that is effectively set at a plurality of timings during the advantageous state. As a result, even if the game ball cannot be passed through the special area at one timing when the special area is valid, the game ball is passed through the special area which is valid at the other timing. It becomes possible to make it. Therefore, a sudden trouble (for example, a game abnormality such as a launch abnormality, a player's poor physical condition, etc.) causes a problem in passing the game ball to the special area at the timing of 1 when the special area is effective. Even in the case, by providing the possibility of passing the game ball to a special area that is effective at the other timing, the player can realize a comfortable game without suffering a disadvantage due to an unexpected situation. Can be done. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being awakened to the game and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D0
The special area is
The first special region (for example, the right side probability variation region 73) and
A second special region different from the first special region (for example, a left probabilistic region 74) is provided.
The plurality of timing inflow means
The second special region, which is effective at one timing in the advantageous state, allows the game ball to flow into the first special region, and is effective at another timing different from the first timing in the advantageous state. A gaming machine D1 characterized in that a gaming ball can flow into a special area.

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as a special area, a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area are provided. Then, the plurality of timing inflow means enables the game ball to flow into the effective first special region at one timing in the advantageous state, and is effective at another timing different from the one timing in the advantageous state. The game ball can flow into a certain second special area. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in either one of the first special area or the second special area, if the game ball passes through the other second special area or the first special area. A second advantageous state can be generated. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can realize a comfortable game without suffering a disadvantage due to an unexpected situation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D0 or D1
The advantageous state means
In the advantageous state of 1, the unit game executing means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for executing the unit game (for example, one round) for changing the variable ball entering means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times. ), With
The special area switching means
In each of at least any two of the unit games, the unit game effective means for activating the special area (for example, the third and sixth rounds of "latent probability fluctuation A") and
A game characterized in that the unit game effective means includes effective suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of valid settings of probabilistic regions 73 and 74) that does not suggest that the special region is valid. Machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D0 or D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the unit game executing means provided in the advantageous state means executes the unit game for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times in one advantageous state. Then, the special area is effective in each of at least any two unit games from the unit game effective means provided in the special area switching means, and the effective suggestion non-execution means also provided in the special area switching means is used. It is not suggested that the special area is effective by the unit game effective means. As a result, the special area becomes effective in any one of at least two unit games of the unit game in the advantageous state, and while it is not suggested that the special area is effective, the game ball is moved to the special area in any one of the unit games. By inflowing, a second advantageous state can be generated. Therefore, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special region. As a result, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state while being configured so that the second advantageous state can occur at a plurality of timings. It has the effect of improving the interest of the.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D2
A game state changing means (for example, a jackpot end process (S415)) that changes the game state by using the determination result of the determination means.
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes a state suggestion notification (for example, "probability change notification effect mode") that suggests the game state to the player is executed. 81) and
The notification means is
At the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the suggestion notification non-execution means corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed (for example, "latent probability variation A". The gaming machine D3, which is characterized by having a "latent probability variation effect mode") based on the winning of ".

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D0 to D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game state is changed by using the determination result of the determination means by the game state change means and the game state is changed by the game state change means, the game state is notified to the player by the notification means. The status suggestion notification is executed. Then, the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means by the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means. As a result, when the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed by the suggestion notification non-execution means and the player is prevented from recognizing the second advantageous state, the game ball in the special region. Since it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing through, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state. It has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D3
The special area switching means
The gaming machine D4, characterized in that either one of the first special region or the second special region is enabled and the other is not enabled in the predetermined unit game.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D0 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special area switching means is configured so that either one of the first special area or the second special area is valid and the other is not valid in a predetermined unit game. As a result, by providing effective patterns for a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the first special area or the second special area that are effectively set, and as a result, the game is performed in the second advantageous state. It has the effect of creating a playability that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is present, and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D4
The second advantageous state means is
When it is determined by the determination means that it is the first lottery result (for example, the lottery result of "latent probability variation A") that can generate the second advantageous state, the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. Among them, an effective passing means (for example, turning on the right probability changing effective flag 203g and turning on the right probability changing area solenoid 73b) for passing the game ball through the special area that is effective,
When the determination means determines that the second lottery result does not generate the second advantageous state (for example, the lottery result of "time saving A"), during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, The gaming machine D5 is provided with a passage blocking means (for example, turning on the right probability changing effective flag 203g and turning off the right probability changing region solenoid 73b) that prevents the gaming ball from passing through the special region that is effective. ..

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D0 to D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the determination means determines that the result is the first lottery that can generate the second advantageous state, the effective passing means provided in the second advantageous state means is in the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. It is configured to allow the game ball to pass through a special area that is valid. On the other hand, when it is determined by the determination means that the result is the second lottery that does not generate the second advantageous state, the passage blocking means provided in the second advantageous state means is used during the advantageous state based on the second advantageous state result. It is configured to prevent the game ball from passing through a special area that is valid. That is, in the case of the first lottery result that can generate the second advantageous state, the second advantageous state is generated by passing the game ball to the effective special area, but the second advantageous state is not generated. In the case of the second lottery result, the second advantageous state is not generated by preventing the game ball from passing through the effective special area. As a result, a second advantageous state is generated depending on whether or not the game ball is passed through the special area that is effective, and even if the game ball passes through the special area, if the special area is not effective, the second advantageous state is generated. By configuring so as not to generate the above, it is possible to create a playability that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. There is.

In the gaming machine D5
A first opening / closing means for opening / closing the first special region (for example, a right probability variable region opening / closing plate 73a) and
A second opening / closing means (for example, a left probability variable region opening / closing plate 74a) for opening / closing the second special region is provided.
The effective passing means is
When the first special area is effective by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is opened to allow the game ball to flow into the first special area.
When the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the gaming machine D6 is characterized in that the second opening / closing means is opened to allow the game ball to flow into the two special areas.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first opening / closing means opens and closes the first special area, and the second opening / closing means opens and closes the second special area. Then, when the first special area is valid by the special area switching means by the effective passing means, the first opening / closing means is opened and the game ball flows into the first special area, and the second special area switching means second. When the special area is effective, the second opening / closing means is opened and the game ball flows into the second special area. As a result, when the second advantageous state is generated, there is an effect that the second advantageous state can be appropriately generated by passing the game ball through the special region where it is effective.

In the gaming machine D6
The passage blocking means
When the first special area is effective by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is closed, and when the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is opened. A gaming machine D7 characterized by being closed.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first special area is effective by the special game switching means by the passage blocking means, the first opening / closing means is closed and the game ball does not flow into the first special area. Similarly, when the second special area is effective by the special area switching means by the passage blocking means, the second opening / closing means is closed and the game ball does not flow into the second special area. As a result, when the second advantageous state is not generated, the game ball is not passed to the effective special area, so that even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area, It is possible to create a situation in which a second advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine D6 or D7
The passage blocking means
When the first special area is effective by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is opened to allow the game ball to flow into the second special area.
When the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the gaming machine D8 is characterized in that the first opening / closing means is opened to allow the game ball to flow into the first special area.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D6 or D7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first special area is effective by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means opens the second opening / closing means and the game ball flows into the second special area. When the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the passage blocking means also opens the first opening / closing means and the game ball flows into the first special area. As a result, when the second advantageous state is not generated, the game ball is passed to the ineffective special area, so that even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area, the second advantage state is not generated. 2 It is possible to create a situation in which an advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D5 to D8
The second advantageous state means is
By using the determination result by the determination means, an effective pattern determining means (for example, a probability variation region effective table 202 g) for determining whether or not to enable the special region for each unit game, and
An opening / closing pattern determining means (for example, a probability variation region opening / closing table 202f) that determines whether or not to allow a game ball to flow into the special region for each unit game by using the determination result by the determination means.
The opening / closing pattern same means (for example, the opening / closing pattern "X1") that makes the opening / closing pattern of the special area the same by the opening / closing pattern determining means in the first lottery result and the second lottery result.
The first lottery result and the second lottery result are provided with effective pattern mismatch means (for example, effective patterns "A" and "B") that make the effective pattern of the special area different by the effective pattern determining means. The gaming machine D9, which is characterized by being

According to the gaming machine D9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D5 to D8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effective pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to enable the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Further, the opening / closing pattern determining means also provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to allow the game ball to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Then, the opening / closing pattern of the special area by the opening / closing pattern determining means is made the same in the first lottery result and the second lottery result by the same opening / closing pattern means, and the first lottery result and the second lottery result are made by the effective pattern mismatching means. Then, the effective pattern of the special area by the effective pattern determining means is different. As a result, the opening / closing pattern of the special area is made the same for the first lottery result and the second lottery result so that the lottery result cannot be identified only by the opening / closing pattern, and the special area is divided between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. By making the effective pattern of the above different, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and the playability is created so that the player can guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D5 to D9
A display means (for example, a special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and
As a result of making it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result by the display result by the display means (for example, there are 127 types of display patterns of "time saving C" and "latent probability variation C". The gaming machine D10 is characterized in that there are 127 types of display patterns, and each display pattern is a random pattern having no regularity by eight LEDs).

According to the gaming machine D10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D5 to D9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result identification difficult means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result by the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to identify which lottery result is, so that the player does not recognize that the second lottery result is in the second advantageous state. If so, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special area, and whether or not the second advantageous state occurs even in the display result of the display means. I can't recognize it. As a result, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D10
The special area is
A gaming machine D11 characterized in that it is arranged at a position visible to the player.

According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D0 to D10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special area is arranged at a position visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the player visually recognize that the game ball has passed through the special area and creating a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not a second advantageous state occurs. effective.

<Group E: Valid setting period of probabilistic valid flag>

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on the game board, and a game ball is launched into any of a plurality of entrances provided in the game area. A winning / failing lottery is performed based on the entry of a ball, and when a winning or other advantageous state is won in the hit / fail lottery, a unit game for opening the normally closed variable entry means is executed multiple times. It is configured so that a predetermined game value is given to the player.

In such a gaming machine, a special area through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass is provided, the opening and closing control of the special area is controlled by an opening / closing member, and the opening / closing member is opened in a predetermined unit game. There is a pachinko machine that generates a special game value based on a second advantageous state different from a predetermined game value based on the advantageous state when the ball passes through the special area.

In the above-mentioned pachinko machine, in the advantageous state where the second advantageous state can be generated, the opening / closing member is opened so that the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can flow into the special region in the predetermined unit game, while the second opening / closing member is opened. In an advantageous state in which an advantageous state cannot be generated, in the unit game, the opening / closing member is opened so that the game ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means cannot flow into the special region (for example, a patent). Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264).

However, in the unit game one before the unit game that opens the special area, the game ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means may remain (remain) in the variable ball entry means. In such a case, although the second advantageous state does not occur at the beginning, the game ball that has flowed in in the previous unit game remains in the variable entry means, so that the game ball normally passes through. There is a risk that the game will pass through a special area that cannot be obtained, an unexpected game value will be given due to the game specifications, and an unexpected loss will occur in the game field.

The invention of group E has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing an unexpected loss from occurring in the amusement park.

A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 winning opening 64b) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and
An information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the ball entry means, and
A determination means (for example, a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter.
By using the determination result by the determination means, the advantageous state means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state (for example, a jackpot state). )When,
In a gaming machine provided with a second advantageous state means (for example, a probability variation transition flag 203i) capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means.
In the advantageous state of 1, the unit game executing means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for executing the unit game (for example, one round) for changing the variable ball entering means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times. )When,
A special area (for example, the right side probability change area 73 and the left side probability change area 74) through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass, and
Among the unit games executed by the unit game executing means, the special area switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special area in a predetermined first unit game (for example, right probability change effective flag 203 g or left probability change). With effective flag 203h on),
The second advantageous state means is
When the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated, while the second advantageous state is generated.
It is configured so that the second advantageous state does not occur when the game ball passes through the special area that has not been effectively set by the special area switching means.
The special area switching means
In the first unit game, when the variable ball entry means changes from the first state to the second state, the effective delay means (for example, one count of a round) that does not activate the special area for a predetermined period of time. Eyes and 2nd count) and
The gaming machine E0 is provided with post-period effective means (for example, after the third count of the round) for validating the special area after the lapse of the predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine E0, a gaming ball is launched by the launching means, and the gaming ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the ball entering means, and the gaming ball enters the ball entering means. As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. Further, a variable ball entry means that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter is provided, and by using the judgment result by the judgment means, The advantageous state means brings the variable ball entry means into an advantageous state from the first state to the second state. Further, the second advantageous state means may generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means. Here, the unit game executing means provided in the advantageous state means executes the unit game for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times in one advantageous state. Then, a special area through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass is provided, and among the unit games executed by the unit game execution means, in the predetermined first unit game, the special area switching means causes the special area. Can be switched on or off. Then, when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state means generates the second advantageous state, while the special area switching means effectively sets it. When the game ball passes through a special area that is not present, the second advantageous state means is configured so that the second advantageous state is not generated. Here, in the first unit game, when the variable ball entry means changes from the first state to the second state, the special area is effective for a predetermined period by the effective delay means provided in the special area switching means. However, after the lapse of the predetermined period, the special area is made effective by the effective means after the lapse of the period. That is, the special area is configured to be effective not at the start of the first unit game but after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the change of the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state. As a result, the game ball that has flowed in in the unit game before the first unit game remains in the variable ball entry means even though the advantageous state that does not generate the second advantageous state is initially won. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for an event that passes through a special area that is supposed to be effective, which should not be able to pass through, to occur, and gives the player the game value as expected in the game specifications, and the game hall is unexpected. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent the loss of the above.

In the gaming machine E0
The launching means
It is equipped with a specific interval launching means (for example, launching a game ball at a "0.6 second" interval), which launches a game ball at a specific interval.
The predetermined period is
The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that, in the first unit game, it is a period until two or more predetermined numbers (for example, three) of gaming balls flow in.

According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game balls are launched at specific intervals by the specific interval launching means provided in the launching means, and the predetermined period is the period until a predetermined number of game balls flow in in the first unit game. That is, in the first unit game, the special area is not effective until at least two or more predetermined number of game balls flow in. As a result, the game ball that flowed in in the unit game before the first unit game should not be able to pass by not enabling the special area at least for a period more than twice the specific interval at which the game ball is launched. It is possible to make it difficult for the event of passing through the special area where the above is valid to occur, to give the player the game value as expected in the game specifications, and to prevent unexpected loss in the game field. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In the gaming machine E0
The variable ball entry means
A flow path (for example, a guide passage 72) for flowing down a game ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means is provided.
The special area is
Arranged at a predetermined position on the flow path,
The predetermined period is
The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the period is equal to or longer than the period after the gaming ball flows into the variable ball entry means and then flows down the flow path to the predetermined position.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means is flowed down by the flow path provided in the variable ball entry means, and a special region is arranged at a predetermined position of the flow path. Then, a period equal to or longer than the period during which the game ball flows down to a predetermined position after the Ryukyu ball enters the variable ball entry means is defined as a predetermined period. That is, the special region is not effective at least until it flows into the variable ball entry means and then flows down to a predetermined position where the special region is arranged. As a result, the special area can be activated after the game ball that has flowed in in the unit game before the first unit game flows down to the downstream side from the special area, and initially, the advantageous state that does not generate the second advantageous state is obtained. It makes it difficult for a game ball that has flowed in in a unit game before the first unit game to pass through a special area that is considered to be effective, which should not be able to pass normally, even though it has been won. be able to. As a result, there is an effect that the game value as expected of the game specifications can be given to the player, and it is possible to prevent an unexpected loss from occurring in the game field.

In any of the gaming machines E0 to E2
The variable ball entry means
With the first variable ball entry means (for example, variable winning device 65),
A second variable ball entry means (for example, a second variable winning device 76) different from the variable ball entry means is provided.
The advantageous state means
In the predetermined advantageous state, each time the unit game is executed, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are alternately and seamlessly brought into the second state (for example, the alternate ball entry means). A first flow path (for example, a guide passage 72) that is provided with a variable winning device 65 and a second variable winning device 76 without an interval time and allows a game ball that has flowed into the first variable winning means to flow down.
A second flow path (for example, a communication passage 77) for flowing down a game ball that has flowed into the second variable ball entry means,
The gaming machine E3 is provided with a merging means (for example, a merging portion 77a) for merging the first flow path and the second flow path on the upstream side of the special region.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E0 to E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the variable ball entry means, a first variable ball entry means and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means are provided. Then, the unit game executing means provided in the advantageous state means executes the unit game for changing the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times in one advantageous state. Will be done. Then, by the alternate ball-entry means also provided in the advantageous state means, the first variable ball-entry means and the second variable ball-entry means are alternately and without interruption each time the unit game is executed in a predetermined advantageous state. It is the second state. Here, the first flow path causes the game ball that has flowed into the first variable entry means to flow down, the second flow path causes the game ball that has flowed into the second variable entry means to flow down, and the merging means causes the first. The first flow path and the second flow path are merged on the upstream side of the special region.

Conventionally, in a unit game one before a unit game that opens a special area, a game ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means may remain (remain) in the variable ball entry means. In such a case, the game ball that has flowed in and remains in the previous unit game, although it is in an advantageous state that does not initially generate the second advantageous state, passes through a special area that cannot normally pass through. As a result, an unexpected game value is given due to the game specifications, and there is a risk of causing an unexpected loss in the game field.

In particular, in the case of an advantageous state in which the unit game is alternately digested by using the two variable ball entry means, and in the case where the two variable ball entry means share a special area, the unit is used. Since there is no (small) interval time between games, when one of the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means is in the second state based on the first unit game, before the first unit game. There is a high possibility that the game ball that has flowed into the other second variable ball entry means or the first variable ball entry means remains in the unit game of the above, and it is easy to cause an unexpected loss in the game field.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E3, the special area is not set at the start of the first unit game, but after the first variable entry means or the second variable entry means has changed from the first state to the second state. It is configured to be effective after a predetermined period of time has passed. As a result, even though the player is initially elected in an advantageous state that does not generate the second advantageous state, the game ball that has flowed in in the unit game before the first unit game is effective that it should not be able to pass through. It is possible to make it difficult for an event that passes through the special area to occur, to give the player the game value as expected in the game specifications, and to prevent an unexpected loss from occurring in the game field. , Has the effect.

In any of the gaming machines E0 to E3
A game state changing means (for example, a jackpot end process (S415)) that changes the game state by using the determination result of the determination means.
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes a state suggestion notification (for example, "probability change notification effect mode") that suggests the game state to the player is executed. 81) and
The notification means is
At the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the suggestion notification non-execution means corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed (for example, "latent probability variation A". The gaming machine E4, which is characterized by having a "latent probability variation production mode") based on the winning of.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E0 to E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game state is changed by using the determination result of the determination means by the game state change means and the game state is changed by the game state change means, the game state is notified to the player by the notification means. The status suggestion notification is executed. Then, the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means by the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means. As a result, when the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed by the suggestion notification non-execution means and the player is prevented from recognizing the second advantageous state, the game ball in the special region. Since it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing through, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state. It has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines E0 to E4
The special area is
The first special region (for example, the right side probability variation region 73) and
A second special region different from the first special region (for example, a left probabilistic region 74) is provided.
The special area switching means
A gaming machine E5, characterized in that either one of the first special region or the second special region is enabled and the other is not enabled in the predetermined unit game.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E0 to E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the special area, a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area are provided, and either the first special area or the second special area is provided for each unit game by the special area switching means. It is configured so that one is valid and the other is not. As a result, by providing effective patterns for a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the first special area or the second special area that are effectively set, and as a result, the game is performed in the second advantageous state. It has the effect of creating a playability that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is present, and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines E0 to E5
The second advantageous state means is
When it is determined by the determination means that it is the first lottery result (for example, the lottery result of "latent probability variation A") that can generate the second advantageous state, the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. Among them, an effective passing means (for example, turning on the right probability changing effective flag 203g and turning on the right probability changing area solenoid 73b) for passing the game ball through the special area that is effective,
When the determination means determines that the second lottery result does not generate the second advantageous state (for example, the lottery result of "time saving A"), during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, The gaming machine E6 is provided with a passage blocking means (for example, turning on the right probabilistic variation effective flag 203g and turning off the right probabilistic variation area solenoid 73b) that prevents the gaming ball from passing through the special region that is effective. ..

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E0 to E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the effective passing means provided in the second advantageous state means determines that the result is the first lottery that can generate the second advantageous state by the determination means, the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. Inside, it is configured to allow the game ball to pass through a special area that is valid. On the other hand, when the passage blocking means provided in the second advantageous state means determines that the result is the second lottery that does not generate the second advantageous state, the advantageous state based on the second advantageous state result is entered. , It is configured to prevent the game ball from passing through a special area that is valid. That is, in the case of the first lottery result that can generate the second advantageous state, the second advantageous state is generated by passing the game ball to the effective special area, but the second advantageous state is not generated. In the case of the second lottery result, the second advantageous state is not generated by preventing the game ball from passing through the effective special area. As a result, a second advantageous state is generated depending on whether or not the game ball is passed through the special area that is effective, and even if the game ball passes through the special area, if the special area is not effective, the second advantageous state is generated. By configuring so as not to generate the above, it is possible to create a playability that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. There is.

In the gaming machine E6
A first opening / closing means for opening / closing the first special region (for example, a right probability variable region opening / closing plate 73a) and
A second opening / closing means (for example, a left probability variable region opening / closing plate 74a) for opening / closing the second special region is provided.
The effective passing means is
When the first special area is effective by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is opened to allow the game ball to flow into the first special area.
When the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the gaming machine E7 is characterized in that the second opening / closing means is opened to allow the game ball to flow into the two special areas.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first opening / closing means opens and closes the first special area, and the second opening / closing means opens and closes the second special area. Then, when the first special area is valid by the special area switching means by the effective passing means, the first opening / closing means is opened and the game ball flows into the first special area, and the second special area switching means second. When the special area is effective, the second opening / closing means is opened and the game ball flows into the second special area. As a result, when the second advantageous state is generated, there is an effect that the second advantageous state can be appropriately generated by passing the game ball through the special region where it is effective.

In the gaming machine E7
The passage blocking means
When the first special area is effective by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is closed to prevent the game ball from flowing into the first special area.
When the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the gaming machine E8 is characterized in that the second opening / closing means is closed to prevent the game ball from flowing into the two special areas.

According to the gaming machine E8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first special area is effective by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means closes the first opening / closing means so that the game ball does not flow into the first special area. Further, when the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the passage blocking means also closes the second opening / closing means so that the game ball does not flow into the second special area. As a result, when the second advantageous state is not generated, the game ball is not passed to the effective special area, so that even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area, It is possible to create a situation in which a second advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E7 or E8
The passage blocking means
When the first special area is effective by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is opened to allow the game ball to flow into the second special area.
When the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the gaming machine E9 is characterized in that the first opening / closing means is opened to allow the game ball to flow into the first special area.

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E7 or E8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first special area is effective by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means opens the second opening / closing means and the game ball flows into the second special area. When the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the passage blocking means also opens the first opening / closing means and the game ball flows into the first special area. As a result, when the second advantageous state is not generated, the game ball is passed to the ineffective special area, so that even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area, the second advantage state is not generated. 2 It is possible to create a situation in which an advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines E6 to E9
The second advantageous state means is
By using the determination result by the determination means, an effective pattern determining means (for example, a probability variation region effective table 202 g) for determining whether or not to enable the special region for each unit game, and
An opening / closing pattern determining means (for example, a probability variation region opening / closing table 202f) that determines whether or not to allow a game ball to flow into the special region for each unit game by using the determination result by the determination means.
The opening / closing pattern same means (for example, the opening / closing pattern "X1") that makes the opening / closing pattern of the special area the same by the opening / closing pattern determining means in the first lottery result and the second lottery result.
The first lottery result and the second lottery result are provided with effective pattern mismatch means (for example, effective patterns "A" and "B") that make the effective pattern of the special area different by the effective pattern determining means. The gaming machine E10 characterized by being

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E6 to E9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effective pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to enable the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Further, the opening / closing pattern determining means also provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to allow the game ball to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Then, the opening / closing pattern of the special area by the opening / closing pattern determining means is made the same in the first lottery result and the second lottery result by the same opening / closing pattern means, and the first lottery result and the second lottery result are made by the effective pattern mismatching means. Then, the effective pattern of the special area by the effective pattern determining means is different. As a result, the opening / closing pattern of the special area is made the same for the first lottery result and the second lottery result so that the lottery result cannot be identified only by the opening / closing pattern, and the special area is divided between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. By making the effective pattern of the above different, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and the playability is created so that the player can guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines E6 to E10
A display means (for example, a special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and
As a result of making it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result by the display result by the display means (for example, there are 127 types of display patterns of "time saving C" and "latent probability variation C". The gaming machine E11 is characterized in that there are 127 types of display patterns, and each display pattern is a random pattern having no regularity by eight LEDs).

According to the gaming machine E11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E6 to E10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result identification difficult means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result by the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to identify which lottery result is, so that the player does not recognize that the second lottery result is in the second advantageous state. If so, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special area, and whether or not the second advantageous state occurs even in the display result of the display means. I can't recognize it. As a result, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines E0 to E11
The special area is
A gaming machine E12 characterized in that it is arranged at a position visible to the player.

According to the gaming machine E12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E0 to E11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special area is arranged at a position visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the player visually recognize that the game ball has passed through the special area and creating a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not a second advantageous state occurs. effective.

<Group F: Synchronize interval time and open time>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on the game board, and a game ball is launched into any of a plurality of entrances provided in the game area. A winning / failing lottery is performed based on the entry of a ball, and when an advantageous state such as a hit is won in the hit / fail lottery, a unit game for opening the normally closed variable entry means is executed a plurality of times. It is configured so that a predetermined game value is given to the player.

In such a gaming machine, a special area through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass is provided, the opening and closing control of the special area is controlled by an opening / closing member, and the opening / closing member is opened in a predetermined unit game. There is a pachinko machine that generates a special game value based on a second advantageous state different from a predetermined game value based on the advantageous state when the ball passes through the special area.

Further, in the pachinko machine, for example, even when the second advantageous state occurs, the second advantageous state does not occur without notifying the player whether or not the second advantageous state occurs. Some perform a notification mode. That is, the interest of the game is created by performing an effect as if the second advantageous state does not occur to the player and creating a game property in which it is inferred whether or not the second advantageous state is given to the player. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, since the game machine is configured to generate a second advantageous state without exception when the game ball passes through the special area, the player can grasp the unit game in which the special area is opened in advance, and the unit. When the player visually recognizes that the game ball has passed through the special area in the game, the player recognizes that the second advantageous state occurs. For this reason, if the player recognizes the occurrence of the second advantageous state due to the passage of the game ball to the special area and then executes the normal notification mode, the player is given the expected interest in the game. Rather, there is a risk of arousing the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The invention of Group F has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 winning opening 64b) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and
An information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the ball entry means, and
A determination means (for example, a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A game state changing means (for example, a jackpot end process (S415)) that changes the game state by using the determination result of the determination means.
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes a state suggestion notification (for example, "probability change notification effect mode") that suggests the game state to the player is executed. 81) and
A variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter.
By using the determination result by the determination means, the advantageous state means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state (for example, a jackpot state). ) And, in a gaming machine equipped with
In the advantageous state of 1, the unit game executing means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for executing the unit game (for example, one round) for changing the variable ball entering means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times. )When,
In the advantageous state of 1, after the unit game is executed, the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state, and then a standby game (for example, an interval time) is performed until the second state is changed again. The standby game execution means to be executed (for example, S461 of the open processing (S424)) and
A special area (for example, the right side probability change area 73 and the left side probability change area 74) through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass, and
A special area switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special area (for example, turning on the right probability change effective flag 203 g or the left probability change effective flag 203h) is provided.
The game state changing means
When the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state means (for example, probabilistic transition) capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means. Flag 203i), equipped with
The unit game execution means is
Pseudo-standby execution means for executing a pseudo-standby game (for example, a pseudo-interval time) in which the variable ball-entry means is in the first state for a period equivalent to or substantially equivalent to the standby game during the predetermined unit game. , Equipped with
The second advantageous state means is
When the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated, while the second advantageous state is generated.
It is configured so that the second advantageous state does not occur when the game ball passes through the special area that has not been effectively set by the special area switching means.
The notification means is
At the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the suggestion notification non-execution means corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed (for example, "latent probability variation A". The gaming machine F0, which is characterized by having a "latent probability variation production mode") based on the winning of.

According to the gaming machine F0, a gaming ball is launched by the launching means, and the gaming ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the ball entering means, and the gaming ball enters the ball entering means. As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and by using the determination result of the determination means, the game state is changed by the game state changing means, and the game state is changed by the game state changing means. When the change is made, the notification means executes a state suggestion notification that notifies the player of the game state. Further, a variable ball entry means that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter is provided, and by using the judgment result by the judgment means, The advantageous state means brings the variable ball entry means into an advantageous state from the first state to the second state. Here, in the advantageous state of 1, the unit game executing means executes the unit game for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times, and in the advantageous state of 1, the unit is executed by the standby game executing means. After the game is executed, the variable ball entry means is changed from the second state to the first state, and then the standby game is executed until the second state is changed again. Then, a special area through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass is provided, and whether or not the special area is enabled can be switched by the special area switching means. Further, when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state means provided in the game state changing means causes a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means. Can occur. Here, by the pseudo standby execution means provided in the unit game execution means, during the predetermined unit game, the pseudo standby game in which the variable ball entry means is set as the first state for a period equivalent to or substantially the same as the standby game is performed. Will be executed. Then, when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state means generates the second advantageous state, while the special area switching means effectively sets it. When the game ball passes through a special area that is not present, the second advantageous state means is configured so that the second advantageous state is not generated. Then, the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means prevents the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state from being executed at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means. It is composed. That is, even if the game ball passes through the special area, it is possible to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring unless the special area is valid, and it is assumed that the game ball has passed through the special area set to be valid. However, it is not suggested to the player that the second advantageous state occurs at that timing. Further, by making it difficult for the player to distinguish between the standby game and the pseudo standby game, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp the unit game being executed. This makes it difficult to grasp the unit game in which the special area is valid, and makes it difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs. Therefore, when the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed by the suggestion notification non-execution means so that the player is not recognized as the second advantageous state, the game is played in the second advantageous state. There is an effect that it is possible to create a playability that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The "period equivalent to or substantially equivalent to the waiting game" may be any period as long as it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the waiting time and the pseudo waiting time. For example, the waiting time Examples thereof include a period in which and the pseudo-waiting time completely match, and a period in which a time difference (for example, about 0.2 seconds) that is difficult for humans to recognize occurs between the waiting time and the pseudo-waiting time.

In the gaming machine F0
The special area switching means
The gaming machine F1 is characterized in that during the unit game, at least a predetermined timing effective means for validating the special area at a predetermined timing other than the pseudo standby game by the pseudo standby execution means is provided.

According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined timing effective means provided in the special area switching means enables the special area at least at a predetermined timing other than the pseudo standby game by the pseudo standby execution means during the unit game. As a result, the special area is enabled in the situation where the variable ball entry means is in the second state, and the game ball is configured to be able to pass through the special area, so that the game can be played in the special area when the second advantageous state is desired to be generated. There is an effect that the ball can be passed through and the second advantageous state can be surely generated.

In the gaming machine F0 or F1
The unit game execution means is
The length of the period of the pseudo-standby game executed by the pseudo-standby execution means is the same as the length of the period of the second state period in which the variable ball-entry means is in the second state during the unit game. A gaming machine F2 characterized by executing the unit game.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F0 or F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the length of the period of the pseudo-standby game executed by the unit game execution means by the pseudo-standby execution means is the same as the length of the period of the second state period in which the variable ball entry means in the unit game is in the second state. The unit game is executed so as to be. As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish each of the standby game and the pseudo-standby game only during the period, and it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to grasp the number of unit games being executed.

In the gaming machine F2
The unit game execution means is
The gaming machine F3, characterized in that the second state period is executed a plurality of times during the unit gaming of 1.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the unit game executing means executes the second state period a plurality of times during one unit game. This has the effect of making it more difficult for the player to grasp the number of unit games being executed.

In the game machine F2 or F3
The pseudo standby execution means
A gaming machine F4 characterized in that the pseudo-standby game is executed a plurality of times during the unit game of 1.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F2 or F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the pseudo-standby game is executed a plurality of times during one unit game by the pseudo-standby execution means. As a result, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the standby game and the pseudo-standby game, and it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to grasp the number of unit games being executed.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F4
A game characterized in that the predetermined timing effective means includes effective suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of effective settings of probabilistic regions 73 and 74) that do not suggest that the special region is valid. Machine F5.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F0 to F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effective suggestion non-execution means does not suggest that the special area is effective by the predetermined timing game effective means. As a result, the special area becomes effective in any of the unit games in the advantageous state, and while it is not suggested that the special area is effective, the game ball is made to flow into the special area during the unit game to obtain the second advantageous state. Can be generated. Therefore, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special region. As a result, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F5
The special area is
The first special region (for example, the right side probability variation region 73) and
A second special region different from the first special region (for example, a left probabilistic region 74) is provided.
The special area switching means
A gaming machine F6, characterized in that either one of the first special region or the second special region is enabled and the other is not enabled in the predetermined unit game.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F0 to F5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the special area, a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area are provided, and the first special area or the second special area is provided in a predetermined unit game by the special area switching means. It is configured so that one is valid and the other is not. As a result, by providing effective patterns for a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the first special area or the second special area that are effectively set, and as a result, the game is performed in the second advantageous state. It has the effect of creating a playability that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is present, and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F6
The second advantageous state means is
When it is determined by the determination means that it is the first lottery result (for example, the lottery result of "latent probability variation A") that can generate the second advantageous state, the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. Among them, an effective passing means (for example, turning on the right probability changing effective flag 203g and turning on the right probability changing area solenoid 73b) for passing the game ball through the special area that is effective,
When it is determined by the determination means that the second lottery result does not generate the second advantageous state (for example, the lottery result of "time saving A"), during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, The gaming machine F7 is provided with a passage blocking means (for example, turning on the right probability changing effective flag 203g and turning off the right probability changing region solenoid 73b) that prevents the gaming ball from passing through the special region that is effective. ..

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F0 to F6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the determination means determines that the result is the first lottery that can generate the second advantageous state, the effective passing means provided in the second advantageous state means is in the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. It is configured to allow the game ball to pass through a special area that is valid. On the other hand, when it is determined by the determination means that the result is the second lottery that does not generate the second advantageous state, the passage blocking means provided in the second advantageous state means is used during the advantageous state based on the second advantageous state result. It is configured to prevent the game ball from passing through a special area that is valid. That is, in the case of the first lottery result that can generate the second advantageous state, the second advantageous state is generated by passing the game ball to the effective special area, but the second advantageous state is not generated. In the case of the second lottery result, the second advantageous state is not generated by preventing the game ball from passing through the effective special area. As a result, a second advantageous state is generated depending on whether or not the game ball is passed through the special area that is effective, and even if the game ball passes through the special area, if the special area is not effective, the second advantageous state is generated. By configuring so as not to generate the above, it is possible to create a playability that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. There is.

In the gaming machine F7
A first opening / closing means for opening / closing the first special region (for example, a right probability variable region opening / closing plate 73a) and
A second opening / closing means (for example, a left probability variable region opening / closing plate 74a) for opening / closing the second special region is provided.
The effective passing means is
When the first special area is effective by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is opened to allow the game ball to flow into the first special area.
When the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the gaming machine F8 is characterized in that the second opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the two special areas.

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first opening / closing means opens and closes the first special area, and the second opening / closing means opens and closes the second special area. Then, when the first special area is valid by the special area switching means by the effective passing means, the first opening / closing means is opened and the game ball flows into the first special area, and the second special area switching means second. When the special area is effective, the second opening / closing means is opened and the game ball flows into the second special area. As a result, when the second advantageous state is generated, there is an effect that the second advantageous state can be appropriately generated by passing the game ball through the special region where it is effective.

In the gaming machine F8
The passage blocking means
When the first special area is effective by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is closed to prevent the game ball from flowing into the first special area.
When the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the gaming machine F9 is characterized in that the second opening / closing means is closed to prevent the game ball from flowing into the two special areas.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first special area is effective by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means closes the first opening / closing means so that the game ball does not flow into the first special area. Further, when the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the passage blocking means also closes the second opening / closing means so that the game ball does not flow into the second special area. As a result, when the second advantageous state is not generated, the game ball is not passed to the effective special area, so that even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area, It is possible to create a situation in which a second advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine F8 or F9
The passage blocking means
When the first special area is effective by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is opened to allow the game ball to flow into the second special area.
When the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the gaming machine F10 is characterized in that the first opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the first special area.

According to the gaming machine F10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F8 or F9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first special area is effective by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means opens the second opening / closing means and the game ball flows into the second special area. When the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the passage blocking means also opens the first opening / closing means and the game ball flows into the first special area. As a result, when the second advantageous state is not generated, the game ball is passed to the ineffective special area, so that even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area, the second advantage state is not generated. 2 It is possible to create a situation in which an advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines F7 to F10
The second advantageous state means is
By using the determination result by the determination means, an effective pattern determining means (for example, a probability variation region effective table 202 g) for determining whether or not to enable the special region for each unit game, and
An opening / closing pattern determining means (for example, a probability variation region opening / closing table 202f) that determines whether or not to allow a game ball to flow into the special region for each unit game by using the determination result by the determination means.
The opening / closing pattern same means (for example, the opening / closing pattern "X1") that makes the opening / closing pattern of the special area the same by the opening / closing pattern determining means in the first lottery result and the second lottery result.
The first lottery result and the second lottery result are provided with effective pattern mismatch means (for example, effective patterns "A" and "B") that make the effective pattern of the special area different by the effective pattern determining means. The gaming machine F11 characterized by being

According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F7 to F10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effective pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to enable the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Further, the opening / closing pattern determining means also provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to allow the game ball to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Then, the opening / closing pattern of the special area by the opening / closing pattern determining means is made the same in the first lottery result and the second lottery result by the same opening / closing pattern means, and the first lottery result and the second lottery result are made by the effective pattern mismatching means. Then, the effective pattern of the special area by the effective pattern determining means is different. As a result, the opening / closing pattern of the special area is made the same for the first lottery result and the second lottery result so that the lottery result cannot be identified only by the opening / closing pattern, and the special area is divided between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. By making the effective pattern of the above different, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and the playability is created so that the player can guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines F7 to F11
A display means (for example, a special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and
As a result of making it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result by the display result by the display means (for example, there are 127 types of display patterns of "time saving C" and "latent probability variation C". The gaming machine F12 is characterized in that there are 127 types of display patterns, and each display pattern is a random pattern having no regularity by eight LEDs).

According to the gaming machine F12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F7 to F11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result identification difficult means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result by the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to identify which lottery result is, so that the player does not recognize that the second lottery result is in the second advantageous state. If so, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special area, and whether or not the second advantageous state occurs even in the display result of the display means. I can't recognize it. As a result, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines F0 to F12
The special area is
The gaming machine F13, characterized in that it is arranged at a position visible to the player.

According to the gaming machine F13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F0 to F12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special area is arranged at a position visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the player visually recognize that the game ball has passed through the special area and creating a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not a second advantageous state occurs. effective.

In the gaming machines F0 to F13
The unit game is
A pure unit game in which the variable ball-entry means is changed from the first state to the second state, and then the unit game of 1 is terminated as the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition.
After the variable ball-entry means is changed from the first state to the second state, then changed to the first state as the pseudo-standby game, and then further changed to the second state, based on the establishment of the end condition. The gaming machine F14 is characterized by comprising, as the first state, a pseudo unit game for ending the unit game of 1.

According to the gaming machine F14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F0 to F13, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as a unit game, a pure unit game is provided in which the variable ball entry means is changed from the first state to the second state, and then one unit game is ended as the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition. .. Similarly, as a unit game, the variable ball entry means is changed from the first state to the second state, then changed to the first state as a pseudo standby game, and then further changed to the second state, based on the establishment of the end condition. As the first state, a pseudo unit game for ending one unit game is provided. This has the effect of providing variations in the unit game and improving the interest of the game.

<Group G: Operation check opening before main opening>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on a game board, and a game ball is launched into any of a plurality of entrances provided in the game area. A winning / failing lottery is performed based on the entry of the ball, and when a winning or other advantageous state is won in the hit / fail lottery, the normally closed variable entry means is opened to give the player a predetermined game value. Is configured to be granted.

In such a gaming machine, a special area through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass is provided, the special area is controlled to open and close by an opening / closing member or the like, and when the game ball passes through the special area, the above-mentioned There is a pachinko machine that generates a special game value based on a second advantageous state different from a predetermined game value based on the advantageous state (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, if some abnormality occurs and the opening / closing member is not opened, the gaming ball cannot flow into the special area, and the player may suffer an unexpected disadvantage.

The invention of the G group has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that suppresses giving a disadvantage to the player.

A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 winning opening 64b) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and
An information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the ball entry means, and
A determination means (for example, a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter.
By using the determination result by the determination means, the advantageous state means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state (for example, a jackpot state). )When,
In a gaming machine provided with a second advantageous state means (for example, a probability variation transition flag 203i) capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means.
A special area (for example, the right side probability change area 73 and the left side probability change area 74) through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass, and
An opening / closing means for opening / closing the special region (for example, a right probability changing region opening / closing plate 73a and a left probability changing region opening / closing plate 74a).
A driving means for opening and closing the opening / closing means (for example, a right probabilistic region solenoid 73b and a left probabilistic region solenoid 74b) is provided.
The driving means is
A main opening execution means for executing the main opening that allows the game ball to flow into the special area (for example, opening of "2000 ms" based on the winning of the third count) and
Prior to the execution of the main opening by the main opening executing means, the provisional opening executing means for executing the provisional opening that opens the opening / closing means for a shorter time than the main opening (for example, opening of "60 ms" based on the winning of the first count). )When,
The provisional opening determination means for determining whether or not the provisional opening by the provisional opening execution means has been normally executed (for example, the right probability variation region solenoid 73b and the left probability variation region solenoid 74b operate normally based on the winning of the first count). (Determine whether or not to do),
When the provisional opening determination means determines that the provisional opening is not normally executed, an abnormality notification means (for example, error notification) for notifying that an abnormality has occurred in the opening / closing means is provided. A game machine G0 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine G0, a gaming ball is launched by the launching means, and the gaming ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the ball entering means, and the gaming ball enters the ball entering means. As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. Further, a variable ball entry means that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter is provided, and by using the judgment result by the judgment means, The advantageous state means brings the variable ball entry means into an advantageous state from the first state to the second state. Further, the second advantageous state means may generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means. Here, a special area through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass is provided, the special area is opened / closed by the opening / closing means, and the opening / closing means is driven to open / close by the driving means. Further, the main opening executing means provided in the driving means executes the main opening so that the game ball can flow into the special area, and the provisional opening executing means also provided in the driving means causes the main opening by the opening executing means. Prior to the execution, a provisional opening is executed in which the opening / closing means is opened for a shorter time than the main opening. Then, it is determined whether or not the provisional opening by the provisional opening executing means is normally executed by the provisional opening determining means also provided in the driving means, and the provisional opening is not normally executed by the provisional opening determining means. When it is determined, the abnormality notifying means notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the opening / closing means. As a result, it is possible to execute a provisional opening before flowing the game ball into the special area to determine whether or not the special area is normally opened. If the special area is not opened, it is abnormal. It is possible to recognize that fact at an early stage by being notified. Therefore, it is possible to recognize early that the game ball cannot flow into the special area before the opening of the game, and to make the clerk of the game hall or the like recognize that fact. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park can deal with the player after grasping the abnormality of the opening / closing means, and can suppress giving a disadvantage to the player because the second advantageous state is not given. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine G0
The gaming machine G1 is provided with a game progress stopping means for stopping the progress of the game when it is determined by the provisional opening determining means that the provisional opening is not normally executed.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the provisional opening determination means determines that the provisional opening is not normally executed, the game progress stop means stops the progress of the game. As a result, by stopping the progress of the game at the stage when the abnormality that the special area is not normally opened is recognized, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the game ball does not pass through the special area that may occur after that. This is possible, and there is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving a disadvantage to the player.

In the gaming machine G1
The gaming machine G2 is characterized by comprising a game restarting means for restarting a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition when the game is stopped by the game progress stopping means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game is stopped by the game progress stop means, the game restart means restarts the game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. As a result, for example, by stopping the progress of the game at the stage when an abnormality in which the special area is not normally opened is recognized, it is possible to restart the game after the abnormality is resolved, and the second advantageous state becomes There is an effect that it is possible to suppress giving a disadvantage to the player by not being granted.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G2
The provisional opening execution means is
The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the opening / closing means is openly driven so that the gaming ball is difficult or impossible to flow into the special region.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G0 to G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the provisional opening / closing means is driven to open the opening / closing means so that the game ball is difficult or impossible to flow into the special area. As a result, by preventing the game ball from flowing into the special area at the time of provisional opening, it is possible to prevent an unexpected event such as the game ball staying in the variable entry means from flowing into the special area. There is an effect that it is possible to give the player the game value as expected in the game specifications and prevent an unexpected loss from occurring in the game field.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G3
The present opening execution means is
The main opening determination means (for example, the probability variation region opening / closing table 202f) for determining whether or not to execute the main opening, and
When the main opening determination means determines to execute the main opening, the execution means for executing the main opening (for example, the opening of the right side probability variation region 73 in the first round of "time saving A") is used. Prepare,
The provisional opening execution means is
The gaming machine G4, characterized in that the provisional opening is executed even when the main opening is not executed by the executing means.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G0 to G3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the main opening determining means provided in the main opening determining means determines whether or not to execute the main opening, and when the main opening determining means determines to execute the main opening, the executing means determines. This release is executed. Then, the provisional opening is executed by the provisional opening execution means even when the main opening is not executed by the execution means. As a result, even when the main opening of the special area is not executed, it is possible to recognize whether or not the opening / closing means can be normally opened and the game ball can flow into the special area, and the game ball can be opened to the special area. It is possible to recognize at an early stage that it cannot flow into the game, and to make the clerk of the amusement park or the like recognize that fact. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park can deal with the player after grasping the abnormality of the opening / closing means, and can suppress giving a disadvantage to the player because the second advantageous state is not given. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G4
The special area is
The first special region (for example, the right side probability variation region 73) and
A second special region different from the first special region (for example, a left probabilistic region 74) is provided.
The opening / closing means
A first opening / closing means for opening / closing the first special region (for example, a right probability variable region opening / closing plate 73a) and
A second opening / closing means (for example, a left probability variable region opening / closing plate 74a) for opening / closing the second special region is provided.
The present opening execution means is
Either the first opening / closing means or the second opening / closing means is opened to execute the main opening.
The provisional opening execution means is
The gaming machine G5, characterized in that both the first opening / closing means and the second opening / closing means are opened to execute the provisional opening.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G0 to G4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area are provided in the special area, and the first special area is opened and closed by the first opening and closing means provided in the opening and closing means, and the same opening and closing is performed. The second special area is opened and closed by the second opening and closing means provided in the means. Then, either the first opening / closing means or the second opening / closing means is opened by the main opening / closing executing means to execute the main opening, and both the first opening / closing means and the second opening / closing means are opened by the provisional opening / closing executing means. And the provisional opening is executed. As a result, even if the main opening of the first special area or the second special area is not executed, the provisional opening is executed together by the first opening / closing means and the second opening / closing means, and both opening / closing means are normally opened and special. It is possible to recognize whether or not it is possible to allow the game ball to flow into the area. Therefore, it is possible to recognize at an early stage that the game ball cannot flow into the special area, and to make the clerk of the game hall or the like recognize that fact. As a result, the clerk of the amusement park can deal with the player after grasping the abnormality of the opening / closing means, and can suppress giving a disadvantage to the player because the second advantageous state is not given. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G5
A special area switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special area (for example, turning on the right probability change effective flag 203 g or the left probability change effective flag 203h) is provided.
The second advantageous state means is
When the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated, while the second advantageous state is generated.
The gaming machine G6 is configured so that the second advantageous state does not occur when the gaming ball passes through the special region that has not been effectively set by the special region switching means.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G0 to G5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special area switching means switches whether or not to enable the special area. Then, when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state means generates the second advantageous state, while the special area switching means effectively sets it. When the game ball passes through a special area that is not present, the second advantageous state means is configured so that the second advantageous state is not generated. As a result, even if the game ball passes through the special area, the second advantageous state can be prevented from occurring unless the special area is valid. Therefore, even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur, and the interest of the game can be improved. , Has the effect.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G6
A game state changing means (for example, a jackpot end process (S415)) that changes the game state by using the determination result of the determination means.
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes a state suggestion notification (for example, "probability change notification effect mode") that suggests the game state to the player is executed. 81) and
The notification means is
At the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the suggestion notification non-execution means corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed (for example, "latent probability variation A". The gaming machine G7, which is characterized by having a "latent probability variation production mode") based on the winning of ".

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G0 to G6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by using the determination result of the determination means, when the game state is changed by the game state change means and the game state is changed by the game state change means, the game state is notified to the player by the notification means. The status suggestion notification is executed. Then, at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means by the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means, the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed. It is composed of. As a result, when the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed by the suggestion notification non-execution means and the player is prevented from recognizing the second advantageous state, the game ball in the special region. It is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing through. As a result, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine G6 or G7
The advantageous state means
In the advantageous state of 1, the unit game executing means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for executing the unit game (for example, one round) for changing the variable ball entering means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times. ), With
The special area switching means
In at least one of the unit games, the unit game effective means for validating the special area (for example, the second round of "latent probability fluctuation B") and
A game characterized in that the unit game effective means includes effective suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of valid settings of probabilistic regions 73 and 74) that does not suggest that the special region is valid. Machine G8.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G6 or G7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the unit game executing means provided in the advantageous state means executes the unit game for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times in one advantageous state. Then, the special area is made effective in at least one of the unit games by the unit game effective means provided in the special area switching means, and the unit game is made by the effective suggestion non-execution means also provided in the special area switching means. Effective means do not suggest that the special area is effective. As a result, the special area becomes effective in any of the unit games in the advantageous state, and while it is not suggested that the special area is effective, the game ball is made to flow into the special area during the unit game to obtain the second advantageous state. Can be generated. Therefore, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special region. As a result, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine G8
The special area switching means
A gaming machine G9, characterized in that either one of the first special region or the second special region is enabled and the other is not enabled in the predetermined unit game.

According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special area switching means is configured so that either one of the first special area or the second special area is valid and the other is not valid in a predetermined unit game. As a result, by providing effective patterns for a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the first special area or the second special area that are effectively set, and as a result, the game is performed in the second advantageous state. It has the effect of creating a playability that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is present, and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G9
The second advantageous state means is
When it is determined by the determination means that it is the first lottery result (for example, the lottery result of "latent probability variation A") that can generate the second advantageous state, the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. Among them, an effective passing means (for example, turning on the right probability changing effective flag 203g and turning on the right probability changing area solenoid 73b) for passing the game ball through the special area that is effective,
When it is determined by the determination means that the second lottery result does not generate the second advantageous state (for example, the lottery result of "time saving A"), during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, The gaming machine G10 is provided with a passage blocking means (for example, turning on the right probability changing effective flag 203g and turning off the right probability changing region solenoid 73b) that prevents the gaming ball from passing through the special region that is effective. ..

According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G0 to G9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the determination means determines that the result is the first lottery that can generate the second advantageous state, the effective passing means provided in the second advantageous state means is in the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. It is configured to allow the game ball to pass through a special area that is valid. On the other hand, when it is determined by the determination means that the result is the second lottery that does not generate the second advantageous state, the passage blocking means provided in the second advantageous state means is used during the advantageous state based on the second advantageous state result. It is configured to prevent the game ball from passing through a special area that is valid. That is, in the case of the first lottery result that can generate the second advantageous state, the second advantageous state is generated by passing the game ball to the effective special area, but the second advantageous state is not generated. In the case of the second lottery result, the second advantageous state is not generated by preventing the game ball from passing through the effective special area. As a result, a second advantageous state is generated depending on whether or not the game ball is passed through the special area that is effective, and even if the game ball passes through the special area, if the special area is not effective, the second advantageous state is generated. By configuring so as not to generate the above, it is possible to create a playability that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. There is.

In the gaming machine G10
The effective passing means is
When the first special area is effective by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is opened to allow the game ball to flow into the first special area.
When the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the gaming machine G11 is characterized in that the second opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the two special areas.

According to the gaming machine G11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first special area is valid by the special area switching means by the effective passing means, the first opening / closing means is opened and the game ball flows into the first special area, and the second special area switching means second. When the special area is effective, the second opening / closing means is opened and the game ball flows into the second special area. As a result, when the second advantageous state is generated, there is an effect that the second advantageous state can be appropriately generated by passing the game ball through the special region where it is effective.

In the gaming machine G10 or G11
The passage blocking means
When the first special area is effective by the special area switching means, the first opening / closing means is closed to prevent the game ball from flowing into the first special area.
When the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the game machine G12 is characterized in that the second opening / closing means is closed to prevent the game ball from flowing into the two special areas.

According to the gaming machine G12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G10 or G11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first special area is effective by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means closes the first opening / closing means so that the game ball does not flow into the first special area. Further, when the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the passage blocking means also closes the second opening / closing means so that the game ball does not flow into the second special area. As a result, when the second advantageous state is not generated, the game ball is not passed to the effective special area, so that even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area. , It is possible to create a situation in which a second advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine G11 or G12
The passage blocking means
When the first special area is effective by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is opened to allow the game ball to flow into the second special area.
When the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the gaming machine G13 is characterized in that the first opening / closing means is opened to allow a game ball to flow into the first special area.

According to the gaming machine G13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G11 or G12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first special area is effective by the special game switching means, the passage blocking means opens the second opening / closing means and the game ball flows into the second special area. When the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the passage blocking means also opens the first opening / closing means and the game ball flows into the first special area. As a result, when the second advantageous state is not generated, the game ball is passed to the ineffective special area, so that even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area, the second advantage state is not generated. 2 It is possible to create a situation in which an advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines G8 to G13
The second advantageous state means is
By using the determination result by the determination means, an effective pattern determining means (for example, a probability variation region effective table 202 g) for determining whether or not to enable the special region for each unit game, and
An opening / closing pattern determining means (for example, a probability variation region opening / closing table 202f) that determines whether or not to allow a game ball to flow into the special region for each unit game by using the determination result by the determination means.
The opening / closing pattern same means (for example, the opening / closing pattern "X1") that makes the opening / closing pattern of the special area the same by the opening / closing pattern determining means in the first lottery result and the second lottery result.
The first lottery result and the second lottery result are provided with effective pattern mismatch means (for example, effective patterns "A" and "B") that make the effective pattern of the special area different by the effective pattern determining means. The gaming machine G14 characterized by being

According to the gaming machine G14, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G8 to G13, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effective pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to enable the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Further, the opening / closing pattern determining means also provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to allow the game ball to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Then, the opening / closing pattern of the special area by the opening / closing pattern determining means is made the same in the first lottery result and the second lottery result by the same opening / closing pattern means, and the first lottery result and the second lottery result are made by the effective pattern mismatching means. Then, the effective pattern of the special area by the effective pattern determining means is different. As a result, the opening / closing pattern of the special area is made the same for the first lottery result and the second lottery result so that the lottery result cannot be identified only by the opening / closing pattern, and the special area is divided between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. By making the effective pattern of the above different, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and the playability is created so that the player can guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines G10 to G14
A display means (for example, a special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and
As a result of making it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result by the display result by the display means (for example, there are 127 types of display patterns of "time saving C" and "latent probability variation C". The gaming machine G15 is characterized in that there are 127 types of display patterns, and each display pattern is a random pattern having no regularity due to eight LEDs).

According to the gaming machine G15, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G10 to G14, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result identification difficult means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result by the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to identify which lottery result is, so that the player does not recognize that the second lottery result is in the second advantageous state. If so, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special area, and whether or not the second advantageous state occurs even in the display result of the display means. I can't recognize it. As a result, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G15
The special area is
The gaming machine G16 is characterized in that it is arranged at a position visible to the player.

According to the gaming machine G16, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G0 to G15, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special area is arranged at a position visible to the player. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the player visually recognize that the game ball has passed through the special area and creating a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not a second advantageous state occurs. effective.

<Group H: Double attacker x individual probability variation area (without opening / closing plate)>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on a game board, and a game ball is launched into any of a plurality of entrances provided in the game area. A winning / failing lottery is performed based on the entry of the ball, and when a winning or other advantageous state is won in the hit / fail lottery, the normally closed variable entry means is opened to give the player a predetermined game value. Is configured to be granted.

In such a gaming machine, a special area through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass is provided, the special area is controlled to open and close by an opening / closing member or the like, and when the game ball passes through the special area, the above-mentioned There is a pachinko machine that generates a special game value based on a second advantageous state, which is different from a predetermined game value based on the advantageous state.

Further, in the pachinko machine, for example, even when the second advantageous state occurs, the second advantageous state does not occur without notifying the player whether or not the second advantageous state occurs. Some perform a notification mode. That is, the interest of the game is created by performing an effect as if the second advantageous state does not occur to the player and creating a game property in which it is inferred whether or not the second advantageous state is given to the player. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when the gaming ball passes through the special area, the second advantageous state is generated without exception. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes that the gaming ball has passed through the special area, the second advantageous state is generated. 2 The player recognizes that an advantageous state will occur. For this reason, if the player recognizes the occurrence of the second advantageous state due to the passage of the game ball to the special area and then executes the normal notification mode, the player is given the expected interest in the game. Rather, there is a risk of arousing the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The invention of the H group was made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 winning opening 64b) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and
An information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the ball entry means, and
A determination means (for example, a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A game state changing means (for example, from a "normal game state" to a "latent probability fluctuation state") that changes the game state by using the determination result of the determination means.
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes a state suggestion notification (for example, "probability change notification effect mode") that suggests the game state to the player is executed. 81) and
A first variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) and a second variable entry ball that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter, respectively. Means (eg, second variable winning device 76) and
By using the determination result by the determination means, an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot state) in which one or both of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means is changed from the first state to the second state (for example, a jackpot state). ) (For example, opening of the big winning opening 65a and the second big winning opening 76a at the time of a big hit), in a gaming machine
A first special region (for example, right side probability variation region 73) through which a game ball flowing into the first variable ball entry means can pass, and
A second special region (for example, the left side probability variation region 74) through which the game ball flowing into the second variable ball entry means can pass, and
A special area switching means for switching the validity or invalidity of the first special area or the second special area (for example, turning on the right probability change effective flag 203 g or the left probability change effective flag 203h) is provided.
The game state changing means
A second advantageous state means (for example, generation of a "probability fluctuation state") capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means is provided.
The second advantageous state means is
When the game ball passes through the first special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated.
When the game ball passes through the second special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated, while the second advantageous state is generated.
When the game ball passes through the first special area that has not been effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is not generated.
When the game ball passes through the second special area which is not effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is not generated.
The notification means is
The suggestion notification non-execution means that does not execute the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the first special region or the second special region effectively set by the special region switching means. (For example, the gaming machine H0 comprising the "latent probability variation effect mode" based on the winning of the "latent probability variation A").

According to the gaming machine H0, a gaming ball is launched by the launching means, and the gaming ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the ball entering means, and the gaming ball enters the ball entering means. As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and by using the determination result of the determination means, the game state is changed by the game state changing means, and the game state is changed by the game state changing means. When the change is made, the notification means executes a state suggestion notification that notifies the player of the game state. In addition, a first variable ball entry means and a second variable ball entry means that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter are provided, and the determination means. By using the determination result according to, one or both of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means is set to the advantageous state from the first state to the second state by the advantageous state means. Here, the game ball that has flowed into the first variable entry means is configured to be able to pass through the first special area, and the game ball that has flowed into the second variable entry means is configured to be able to pass through the second special area. The area switching means switches the validity or invalidity of the first special area or the second special area. Further, the second advantageous state means provided in the game state changing means may generate a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means. Then, when the game ball passes through the first special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state means generates the second advantageous state and is effectively set by the special area switching means. When the game ball passes through the second special area, the second advantageous state is generated. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the first special area that is not effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state means is configured so that the second advantageous state is not generated, and the special area switching means When the game ball passes through the second special area that is not effectively set, the second advantageous state means is configured so that the second advantageous state is not generated. Then, the state corresponding to the second advantageous state at the timing when the game ball passes through the first special area or the second special area effectively set by the special area switching means by the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means. Suggestion notification is not executed. That is, even if the game ball passes through the first special region or the second special region, the second advantageous state can be prevented from occurring unless the first special region or the second special region is valid. Even if the game ball passes through the first special area or the second special area that is effectively set, it is not suggested to the player that the second advantageous state occurs at that timing. Thereby, even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the first special area or the second special area, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, when the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed by the suggestion notification non-execution means so that the player is not recognized as the second advantageous state, the first special area or the first special area or the first It is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special area. As a result, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine H0
The advantageous state means
In the advantageous state of 1, a unit game (for example, one round) in which either the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means is changed from the first state to the second state is performed a plurality of times. A unit game execution means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) to be executed is provided.
The special area switching means
In at least one of the unit games, the unit game effective means (for example, the second round of "latent probability variation B") that activates the first special area or the second special area is provided.
The second advantageous state means is
When it is determined by the determination means that it is the first lottery result (for example, the lottery result of "latent probability variation A") that can generate the second advantageous state, the advantageous state based on the first lottery result is in progress. In addition, the effective opening means (for example, the effective opening means (for example,) for controlling the opening and closing of the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means so as to allow the game ball to pass through the first special region or the second special region that is effective. Right probability change effective flag 203g on and big winning opening solenoid 65c on),
When it is determined by the determination means that the second lottery result does not generate the second advantageous state (for example, the lottery result of "time saving A"), it is effective during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result. Passage blocking / opening means (for example, right probability variation effective) that controls the opening / closing of the first variable entry means and the second variable entry means so that the game ball does not pass through the first special area or the second special area. The gaming machine H1 is characterized by having a flag 203g on and a large winning opening solenoid 65c off).

According to the gaming machine H1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the unit game executing means provided in the advantageous state means changes either the first variable ball entry means or the second variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state in one advantageous state. Is executed multiple times. Further, the unit game effective means provided in the special area switching means makes the first special area or the second special area effective in at least one of the unit games. Then, when the effective opening means provided in the second advantageous state means determines that the result is the first lottery that can generate the second advantageous state by the determination means, the advantageous state based on the first lottery result is obtained. The first variable entry means and the second variable entry means are controlled to open and close so as to allow the game ball to pass through the effective first special region or second special region. Further, when the passing blocking means also provided in the second advantageous state means determines that the result is the second lottery that does not generate the second advantageous state by the determination means, the advantageous state based on the second lottery result is in progress. In addition, the opening and closing control of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means is performed so that the game ball does not pass through the effective first special area or the second special area. As a result, the opening / closing control of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means and the control of whether or not the first special area or the second special area is valid are used to control the second advantageous state according to the lottery result. It is not necessary to provide a member for opening and closing the special area in each special area, and the design of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means is complicated. However, there is an effect that the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means can be easily designed with a simple configuration. In addition, there is an effect that the number of parts of the gaming machine can be reduced and the manufacturing cost can be reduced. Further, since it is not necessary to consider the merging of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means, the degree of freedom in designing the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means can be improved. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine H0 or H1
The advantageous state means
In the predetermined advantageous state, each time the unit game is executed, the first variable ball-entry means and the second variable ball-entry means are alternately and seamlessly brought into the second state (for example, the alternate ball-entry means (for example). , The variable winning device 65 and the second variable winning device 76 are opened without an interval time), and the gaming machine H2 is characterized by being provided with.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H0 or H1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, each time the unit game is executed in a predetermined advantageous state by the alternating ball-entry means provided in the advantageous state means, the first variable ball-entry means and the second variable ball-entry means are alternately arranged without interruption. There are two states.

Conventionally, when the advantageous state is digested by opening or closing the variable ball entry means of 1, it is necessary to provide an interval time accompanying the closing of the variable ball entry means, and it takes time to digest the advantageous state. There is a risk that the game will be delayed and the player will be awakened, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H2, the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means are alternately and seamlessly placed in the second state for each unit game in a predetermined advantageous state by the alternate ball entry means. It is possible to eliminate the interval time associated with the closure of the variable ball entry means. Therefore, the advantageous state can be quickly digested, and the game is not delayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being awakened. Further, by giving the second advantageous state by the combination of the open-closed of the variable ball entry means of 2 and the validity or invalidity of the special area of 2, the second advantageous state is obtained unless the variation of each combination is grasped in advance. Cannot be recognized as occurring. As a result, in the advantageous state that is quickly performed, it is possible to reduce the thinking time of the player and make it difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and the game is performed in the second advantageous state. There is an effect that it is possible to create a playability that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is played, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine H1 or H2
The special area switching means
The unit game effective means includes effective suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of effective settings of probabilistic regions 73 and 74) that do not suggest that the first special region or the second special region is valid. A game machine H3 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 or H2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effective suggestion non-execution means provided in the special area switching means does not suggest that the special area is effective by the unit game effective means. As a result, the first special region or the second special region becomes effective in any of the unit games in the advantageous state, and the first special region or the first special region that is effective during the unit game is not suggested to be effective. 2 The second advantageous state can be generated by flowing the game ball into the special area. Therefore, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the first special region or the second special region. As a result, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines H0 to H3
The special area switching means
The gaming machine H4, characterized in that either one of the first special region or the second special region is enabled and the other is not enabled in the predetermined unit game.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H0 to H3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special area switching means is configured so that either one of the first special area or the second special area is valid and the other is not valid in a predetermined unit game. As a result, by providing effective patterns for a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the first special area or the second special area that are effectively set, and as a result, the game is performed in the second advantageous state. It has the effect of creating a playability that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is present, and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines H0 to H4
The second advantageous state means is
Effective pattern determining means (for example, probabilistic region effective table) for determining whether or not to enable the first special region or the second special region for each unit game by using the determination result by the determination means. 202g) and
By using the determination result by the determination means, the first variable entry means or the second variable entry means is opened for each unit game, and the first special area or the second special area is reached. An opening / closing pattern determining means (for example, a large winning opening opening / closing table 202h) for determining whether or not to allow a game ball to flow in,
The opening / closing pattern same means (for example, opening / closing) that makes the opening / closing pattern of the first variable ball entering means or the second variable ball entering means by the opening / closing pattern determining means the same in the first lottery result and the second lottery result. Pattern "lower and upper alternating") and
The first lottery result and the second lottery result are provided with effective pattern mismatch means (for example, effective patterns "A" and "B") that make the effective pattern of the special area different by the effective pattern determining means. The gaming machine H5 characterized by being

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H0 to H4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, whether or not to enable the first special area or the second special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determination means by the effective pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means. It is determined. Further, by using the determination result by the determination means by the opening / closing pattern determining means also provided in the second advantageous state means, the first variable entry means or the second variable entry means is opened for each unit game. Therefore, it is determined whether or not to allow the game ball to flow into the first special area or the second special area. Then, by the opening / closing pattern same means, the opening / closing patterns of the first variable ball entry means and the second variable ball entry means by the opening / closing pattern determining means are made the same in the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the effective pattern mismatch means. As a result, the effective pattern of the special area by the effective pattern determining means is different between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. As a result, the opening / closing patterns of the first variable ball-entry means and the second variable ball-entry means are made the same for the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the lottery result cannot be identified only by the opening / closing pattern. By making the effective patterns of the first special area and the second special area different between the lottery result and the second lottery result, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and the game is played in the second advantageous state. It has the effect of creating a playability that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being performed, and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H5
A display means (for example, a special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and
As a result of making it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result by the display result by the display means (for example, there are 127 types of display patterns of "time saving C" and "latent probability variation C". The gaming machine H6 is characterized in that there are 127 types of display patterns, and each display pattern is a random pattern having no regularity by eight LEDs).

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H1 to H5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result identification difficult means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result by the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to identify which lottery result is, so that the player does not recognize that the second lottery result is in the second advantageous state. If so, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special area, and whether or not the second advantageous state occurs even in the display result of the display means. I can't recognize it. As a result, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines H0 to H6
The first special area and the second special area are
The gaming machine H7 is characterized in that it is arranged at a position visible to the player.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H0 to H6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first special area and the second special area are arranged at positions visible to the player. As a result, the player is made to visually recognize that the game ball has passed through the first special area or the second special area, and the game property is created so that the player can guess whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and the interest of the game is enhanced. It has the effect of being able to improve.

<Group I: 2 specific areas (1 specific area and discharge passage are also acceptable) overlap in the depth direction>
Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game medium such as a game ball is launched toward a game area provided on a game board, and a game ball is launched into any of a plurality of entrances provided in the game area. A winning / failing lottery is performed based on the entry of the ball, and when a winning or other advantageous state is won in the hit / fail lottery, the normally closed variable entry means is opened to give the player a predetermined game value. Is configured to be granted.

In such a gaming machine, a special area through which the game ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass is provided, the special area is controlled to open and close by an opening / closing member or the like, and when the game ball passes through the special area, the above-mentioned There is a pachinko machine that generates a special game value based on a second advantageous state, which is different from a predetermined game value based on the advantageous state.

Further, in the pachinko machine, for example, even when the second advantageous state occurs, the second advantageous state does not occur without notifying the player whether or not the second advantageous state occurs. Some perform a notification mode. That is, the interest of the game is created by performing an effect as if the second advantageous state does not occur to the player and creating a game property in which it is inferred whether or not the second advantageous state is given to the player. (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-148264)).

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, when the gaming ball passes through the special area, the second advantageous state is generated without exception. Therefore, when the player visually recognizes that the gaming ball has passed through the special area, the second advantageous state is generated. 2 The player recognizes that an advantageous state will occur. For this reason, if the player recognizes the occurrence of the second advantageous state due to the passage of the game ball to the special area and then executes the normal notification mode, the player is given the expected interest in the game. Rather, there is a risk of arousing the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The invention of Group I was made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

A launching means for launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
A ball entry means (for example, special figure 1 winning opening 64b) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and
An information acquisition means (for example, the first reserved ball storage area 203d) for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the ball entry means, and
A determination means (for example, a jackpot random number table 202a) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
A variable ball entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter.
By using the determination result by the determination means, the advantageous state means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state (for example, a jackpot state). )When,
In a gaming machine provided with a special region (for example, a front side probability variation region 73e and a back side probability variation region 74e) through which a gaming ball flowing into the variable ball entry means can pass.
A second passing means (for example, the innermost discharge passage 75a) formed at a position overlapping the special area in the front-rear direction of the front view of the gaming machine and through which the gaming ball flowing into the variable ball entering means can pass.
A second advantageous state means (for example, a probability variation transition flag 203i) capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means when the game ball passes through the special region is provided.
The second passing means is
Among the game balls that have flowed into the variable ball entry means, the game machine I0 is characterized in that the game balls that do not pass through the special area pass through.

According to the gaming machine I0, the gaming ball is launched by the launching means, the gaming ball launched by the launching means is configured to be able to enter the ball entering means, and the gaming ball enters the ball entering means. As a result, predetermined information is acquired by the information acquisition means. Then, the determination means determines the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. Further, a variable ball entry means that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter and a second state in which the game ball can enter is provided, and by using the judgment result by the judgment means, The advantageous state means brings the variable ball entry means into an advantageous state from the first state to the second state. In addition, a special area is provided through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass. Here, the gaming ball that has flowed into the variable ball-entry means can pass through the second passing means formed at a position that overlaps the special area in the front-rear direction of the front view of the gaming machine. Then, when the game ball passes through the special area by the second advantageous state means, a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means may occur. Then, among the game balls that have flowed into the variable ball entry means, the game balls that do not pass through the special area are configured to pass through the second passing means. That is, the gaming ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means passes through either the special area or the second passing means arranged so as to overlap from the front view of the gaming machine, and when it passes through the special area, it passes through the special area. It is configured so that a second advantageous state can occur. As a result, it is generally more difficult for human vision to recognize the difference in the depth image than the difference in the plane image. Therefore, the special area and the second passing means overlap in the front-rear direction of the front view of the gaming machine, so that the special area is formed. The player who visually recognizes this special area and the second passing means recognizes which flow path (special area) the player has flowed into, as compared with the case where the player is arranged in a plane from the player. It can be difficult. Therefore, by making it difficult to identify whether or not the game ball has passed through the special region, it is possible to make it difficult to grasp whether or not a second advantageous state can occur. As a result, it is possible to create a playability that allows the player to guess whether or not the second advantageous state is given, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I0
The advantageous state means
A special area switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special area (for example, turning on the right probability change effective flag 203 g or the left probability change effective flag 203h) is provided.
The second advantageous state means is
When the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated, while the second advantageous state is generated.
The gaming machine I1 is configured so that when the gaming ball passes through the special region that has not been effectively set by the special region switching means, the second advantageous state is not generated.

According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, whether or not the special area is enabled is switched by the special area switching means provided in the advantageous state means. Then, when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state means generates the second advantageous state, while the special area switching means effectively sets it. When the game ball passes through a special area that is not present, the second advantageous state means is configured so that the second advantageous state is not generated. That is, even if the game ball passes through the special area, the second advantageous state can be prevented from occurring unless the special area is valid. Thereby, even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, since it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special area, the game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state. It has the effect of being able to create a game and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine I0 or I1
The special area and / or the second passage means
A gaming machine I2, characterized in that it is made of a transparent or translucent material.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I0 or I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special area and / or the second passage means is formed of a transparent or translucent material. As a result, since the special area and / or the second passing means overlap in the front view of the game machine, it is difficult for the player to determine which flow path (special area) the game ball is passing through. Can be made to. As a result, it becomes difficult to recognize the inflow pattern into the special area or the second passing means in advance, and it is possible to create a playability that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state. It has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2
A game state changing means (for example, a jackpot end process (S415)) that changes the game state by using the determination result of the determination means.
When the game state is changed by the game state changing means, a notification means (for example, a third symbol display device) that executes a state suggestion notification (for example, "probability change notification effect mode") that suggests the game state to the player is executed. 81) and
The notification means is
At the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the suggestion notification non-execution means corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed (for example, "latent probability variation A". The gaming machine I3, which is characterized by having a "latent probability variation effect mode") based on the winning of ".

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I1 or I2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, by using the determination result of the determination means, when the game state is changed by the game state change means and the game state is changed by the game state change means, the game state is notified to the player by the notification means. The status suggestion notification is executed. Then, the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means by the suggestion notification non-execution means provided in the notification means. That is, even if the game ball passes through the special area, it is possible to prevent the second advantageous state from occurring unless the special area is valid, and it is assumed that the game ball has passed through the special area set to be valid. However, it is not suggested to the player that the second advantageous state occurs at that timing. Thereby, even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area, it is possible to create a situation in which the second advantageous state cannot occur. Then, the state suggestion notification corresponding to the second advantageous state is not executed at the timing when the game ball passes through the special area set effectively by the suggestion notification non-execution means, and the player is informed that the game is in the second advantageous state. When not recognizing, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special area. As a result, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I3
The advantageous state means
In the advantageous state of 1, the unit game executing means (for example, jackpot processing (S103)) for executing the unit game (for example, one round) for changing the variable ball entering means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times. ), With
The special area switching means
In at least one of the unit games, the unit game effective means for validating the special area (for example, the second round of "latent probability fluctuation B") and
A game characterized in that the unit game effective means includes effective suggestion non-execution means (for example, non-notification of effective settings of probabilistic regions 73e and 74e) that do not suggest that the special region is valid. Machine I4.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I1 to I3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the unit game executing means provided in the advantageous state means executes the unit game for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state a plurality of times in one advantageous state. Then, the special area is made effective in at least one of the unit games by the unit game effective means provided in the special area switching means, and the unit game is made by the effective suggestion non-execution means also provided in the special area switching means. Effective means do not suggest that the special area is effective. As a result, the special area becomes effective in any of the unit games in the advantageous state, and while it is not suggested that the special area is effective, the game ball is made to flow into the special area during the unit game to obtain the second advantageous state. Can be generated. Therefore, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special region. As a result, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine I4
The special area is
The first special region (for example, the front side probabilistic region 73e) and
A second special region different from the first special region (for example, a back side probability variation region 74e) is provided.
The special area switching means
A gaming machine I5, characterized in that either one of the first special region or the second special region is enabled and the other is not enabled in the predetermined unit game.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the special area, a first special area and a second special area different from the first special area are provided, and the first special area or the second special area is provided in a predetermined unit game by the special area switching means. It is configured so that one is valid and the other is not. As a result, by providing effective patterns for a plurality of special areas, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the first special area or the second special area that are effectively set, and as a result, the game is performed in the second advantageous state. It has the effect of creating a playability that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is present, and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines I1 to I5
The second advantageous state means is
When it is determined by the determination means that it is the first lottery result (for example, the lottery result of "latent probability variation A") that can generate the second advantageous state, the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. Among them, the effective passing means for passing the game ball to the special area that is effective (for example, the right (front) probability change effective flag 203 g is turned on and the front probability change area solenoid 73 g is turned on).
When it is determined by the determination means that the second lottery result does not generate the second advantageous state (for example, the lottery result of "time saving A"), during the advantageous state based on the second lottery result, It is characterized in that it is provided with a passage blocking means (for example, the right (front) probability variation effective flag 203 g is turned on and the front probability variation region solenoid 73 g is off) that prevents the game ball from passing through the special region that is effective. Game machine I6.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I1 to I5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the determination means determines that the result is the first lottery that can generate the second advantageous state, the effective passing means provided in the second advantageous state means is in the advantageous state based on the first lottery result. It is configured to allow the game ball to pass through a special area that is valid. On the other hand, when it is determined by the determination means that the result is the second lottery that does not generate the second advantageous state, the passage blocking means provided in the second advantageous state means is used during the advantageous state based on the second advantageous state result. It is configured to prevent the game ball from passing through a special area that is valid. That is, in the case of the first lottery result that can generate the second advantageous state, the second advantageous state is generated by passing the game ball to the effective special area, but the second advantageous state is not generated. In the case of the second lottery result, the second advantageous state is not generated by preventing the game ball from passing through the effective special area. As a result, a second advantageous state is generated depending on whether or not the game ball is passed through the special area that is effective, and even if the game ball passes through the special area, if the special area is not effective, the second advantageous state is generated. By configuring so as not to generate the above, it is possible to create a playability that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. There is.

In the game machine I6
An opening / closing means for opening / closing the special region (for example, a front probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73f and a back probabilistic region opening / closing plate 74f) is provided.
The effective passing means is
When the special area is effective by the special area switching means, the gaming machine I7 is characterized in that the opening / closing means is opened to allow the game ball to flow into the special area.

According to the gaming machine I7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special area is opened and closed by the opening and closing means. Then, when the special area is effective by the special area switching means by the effective passing means, the opening / closing means is opened and the game ball flows into the special area. As a result, when the second advantageous state is generated, there is an effect that the second advantageous state can be appropriately generated by passing the game ball through the special region where it is effective.

In the game machine I7
The opening / closing means
A gaming machine I8, characterized in that it is made of a transparent or translucent material.

According to the gaming machine I8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the opening / closing means is formed of a transparent or translucent material. This makes it difficult for the player to determine the driving mode of the opening / closing means. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the opening / closing means is open and can flow into the special area or the opening / closing means is closed and can flow into the second flow path. It can be difficult to recognize. As a result, it becomes difficult to recognize the inflow pattern into the special region or the second flow path in advance, and it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state. It has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In the gaming machine I7 or I8
The passage blocking means
The gaming machine I9 is characterized in that when the special region is effective by the special region switching means, the opening / closing means is closed to prevent the gaming ball from flowing into the special region.

According to the gaming machine I9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I7 or I8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the special area is effective by the passage blocking means and the special game switching means, the opening / closing means is closed and the game ball does not flow into the special area. As a result, even when the player recognizes that the game ball has flowed into the variable ball entry means by preventing the game ball from passing through the effective special area when the second advantageous state is not generated. , It is possible to create a situation in which a second advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines I7 to I9
The opening / closing means
A first opening / closing means for opening / closing the first special region (for example, a front probabilistic region opening / closing plate 73f) and
A second opening / closing means (for example, a back probability changing region opening / closing plate 74f) for opening / closing the second special region is provided.
The passage blocking means
When the first special area is effective by the special area switching means, the second opening / closing means is opened to allow the game ball to flow into the second special area.
When the second special area is effective by the special area switching means, the game machine I10 is characterized in that the first opening / closing means is opened to allow the game ball to flow into the first special area.

According to the gaming machine I10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I7 to I9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first special area is opened and closed by the first opening and closing means provided in the opening and closing means, and the second special area is opened and closed by the second opening and closing means also provided in the opening and closing means. Then, when the first special area is effective by the special game switching means by the passage blocking means, the second opening / closing means is opened and the game ball flows into the second special area. Similarly, when the second special area is effective by the special area switching means by the passage blocking means, the first opening / closing means is opened and the game ball flows into the first special area. As a result, when the second advantageous state is not generated, the game ball is passed to the ineffective special area, so that even if the player recognizes the passage of the game ball to the special area, the second advantage state is not generated. 2 It is possible to create a situation in which an advantageous state cannot occur. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines I7 to I10
The second advantageous state means is
Using the determination result by the determination means, an effective pattern determining means (for example, a probability variation region effective table 202 g) for determining whether or not to enable the special region for each unit game, and
An opening / closing pattern determining means (for example, a probability variation region opening / closing table 202f) that determines whether or not to allow a game ball to flow into the special area for each unit game using the determination result by the determination means.
The opening / closing pattern same means (for example, the opening / closing pattern "X1") that makes the opening / closing pattern of the special area the same by the opening / closing pattern determining means in the first lottery result and the second lottery result.
The first lottery result and the second lottery result are provided with effective pattern mismatch means (for example, effective patterns "A" and "B") that make the effective pattern of the special area different by the effective pattern determining means. The gaming machine I11 characterized by being

According to the gaming machine I11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I7 to I10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the effective pattern determining means provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to enable the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Further, the opening / closing pattern determining means also provided in the second advantageous state means determines whether or not to allow the game ball to flow into the special area for each unit game by using the determination result by the determining means. Then, the opening / closing pattern of the special area by the opening / closing pattern determining means is made the same in the first lottery result and the second lottery result by the same opening / closing pattern means, and the first lottery result and the second lottery result are made by the effective pattern mismatching means. Then, the effective pattern of the special area by the effective pattern determining means is different. As a result, the opening / closing pattern of the special area is made the same for the first lottery result and the second lottery result so that the lottery result cannot be identified only by the opening / closing pattern, and the special area is divided between the first lottery result and the second lottery result. By making the effective pattern of the above different, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs, and the playability is created so that the player can guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

In any of the gaming machines I7 to I11
A display means (for example, a special symbol display device 37) for displaying the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and
As a result of making it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result by the display result by the display means (for example, there are 127 types of display patterns of "time saving C" and "latent probability variation C". The gaming machine I12 is characterized in that there are 127 types of display patterns, and each display pattern is a random pattern having no regularity by eight LEDs).

According to the gaming machine I12, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I7 to I11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display means displays the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the result identification difficult means makes it difficult to identify the first lottery result or the second lottery result by the display result by the display means. As a result, even if the first lottery result and the second lottery result are displayed, it is difficult to identify which lottery result is, so that the player does not recognize that the second lottery result is in the second advantageous state. If so, it is not possible to recognize whether or not the second advantageous state occurs only by passing the game ball in the special area, and whether or not the second advantageous state occurs even in the display result of the display means. I can't recognize it. As a result, it is possible to create a game property that allows the player to guess whether or not the game is being played in the second advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines A0 to A10, the gaming machines B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, I0 to 0. The configuration limited to any one of I12 may be applied.

Further, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines B0 to B12, the gaming machines A0 to A10, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, I0 to 0. The configuration limited to any one of I12 may be applied.

Further, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines C0 to C12, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, I0 to 0. The configuration limited to any one of I12 may be applied.

Further, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines D0 to D11, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, I0 to 0. The configuration limited to any one of I12 may be applied.

Further, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines E0 to E12, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, I0 to 0. The configuration limited to any one of I12 may be applied.

Further, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines F0 to F14, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, I0 to 0. The configuration limited to any one of I12 may be applied.

Further, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines G0 to G16, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, H0 to H7, I0 to 0. The configuration limited to any one of I12 may be applied.

Further, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines H0 to H7, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, I0 to 0. The configuration limited to any one of I12 may be applied.

Further, for any of the configurations of the gaming machines I0 to I12, the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to 0. The configuration limited to any one of H7 may be applied.

In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, and I0 to I12, the gaming machine is a slot machine. The gaming machine J1 characterized by this. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, and I0 to I12, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. A gaming machine J2 characterized by being there. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (large winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A10, B0 to B12, C0 to C12, D0 to D11, E0 to E12, F0 to F14, G0 to G16, H0 to H7, and I0 to I12, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. The gaming machine J3 is characterized by being fused with a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
37 Special symbol display device (part of display means)
37b 2nd LED group (part of means for difficult result identification)
64b Special figure 1 winning opening (part of the ball entry means)
65 Variable winning device (part of variable ball entry means, part of first variable ball entry means)
72 Guide flow path (part of the first flow path, part of the flow path)
73 Right side probability variation area (part of special area, part of first special area)
73a Right probability variable region opening / closing plate (part of the first opening / closing means, part of the opening / closing means)
73b Right probability variable region solenoid (part of passing means when effective, part of passing blocking means, part of driving means, part of this opening executing means)
73e Front side probability variation area (part of special area, part of first special area)
73f Front probabilistic area opening / closing plate (part of opening / closing means, part of first opening / closing means)
73g Front probabilistic region solenoid (part of passing means when effective, part of passing blocking means)
74 Left side probability variation area (part of special area, part of first special area)
74a Left probability variable area opening / closing plate (part of the second opening / closing means, part of the opening / closing means)
74b Left probabilistic region solenoid (part of passing means when effective, part of passing blocking means, part of driving means, part of this opening execution means)
74e Back side probability variation area (part of special area, part of second special area)
74f Back probability change area opening / closing plate (part of opening / closing means, part of second opening / closing means)
74g Back probability change area solenoid (part of passing means when effective, part of passing blocking means)
75 Discharge passage (part of discharge means)
75a Deepest discharge passage (part of the second passage means, part of the discharge means)
76 Second variable winning device (part of the second variable winning means)
77 Communication passage (part of the second passage)
77a Confluence (part of confluence)
78a Probability change area opening / closing motor (part of drive means)
78c Probability change area opening / closing plate (part of opening / closing means)
81 Third symbol display device (part of notification means, part of abnormality notification means)
110 Main controller (part of judgment means)
112 Launch control device (part of specific interval launch means)
112a Ball launch unit (part of launch means)
201 MPU (part of game progress stop means, part of game restart means)
202a jackpot random number table (part of judgment means)
202g Probability change area effective table (part of effective pattern determination means, part of effective pattern mismatching means, part of multiple timing inflow means, part of predetermined timing effective means)
202f Probability change area open / close table (part of open / close pattern determination means, part of open / close pattern same means, part of multiple timing inflow means, part of pseudo standby execution means, part of main open execution means, provisional open execution means Part of, part of the provisional opening decision means, part of the main opening decision means)
203d 1st reserved ball storage area (part of information acquisition means)
203g Right probability change effective flag (part of special area switching means, part of unit game effective means)
203h Left probability change effective flag (part of special area switching means, part of unit game effective means)
203i Probability change transition flag (part of the second advantageous state means)
S103 Big hit processing (part of advantageous state means, part of unit game execution means)
S415 Big hit end processing (part of game state changing means)
S436 (part of the first drive pattern means, part of the second drive pattern means)
S452 (part of effective delay means)
S461 (Standby game execution means)
S491 (part of effective means after the period has passed)
S511 (part of alternating ball entry means)
S521 (part of the first direction driving means, part of the second direction driving means)
S1204 (part of suggestion notification non-execution means, effective suggestion non-execution means)

Claims (1)

Launch means to launch a game ball,
An entry means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launch means, and a ball entry means.
An information acquisition means for acquiring predetermined information due to a game ball entering the ball entry means,
A determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and a determination means for determining the predetermined information.
A variable ball entry means that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter, and a second state in which the game ball can enter.
By using the determination result by the determination means, the advantageous state means for changing the variable ball entry means from the first state to the second state, and
A special area through which the game ball that has flowed into the variable ball entry means can pass, and
In a gaming machine provided with a second advantageous state means capable of generating a second advantageous state different from the advantageous state by the advantageous state means.
The advantageous state means
A special area switching means for switching whether or not to enable the special area is provided.
The second advantageous state means is
When the game ball passes through the special area effectively set by the special area switching means, the second advantageous state is generated, while the second advantageous state is generated.
It is configured so that the second advantageous state does not occur when the game ball passes through the special area that has not been effectively set by the special area switching means.
A game characterized in that, when the second advantageous state is generated, a plurality of timing inflow means for inflowing the game ball into the special area effectively set at a plurality of timings in the advantageous state are provided. Machine.

Images